Ultimate Microsoft Technical Q & A

Register your resume: www.terrafirmajobs.
com
_________________________________________________
www.terrafirmajobs.com
Ultimate C#, .Net Interview Q&AE-book
Free E-books available with Terra Firma

! Java Interview Q&A
! Terra Firma’s Interview Kit
! Are you stressed at your Desk
! Restore the rhythm of your life
! IT Resume writing tips
! Heart-Care Tips
To get these free e-books, email to: rakesh@terrafirmajobs.com with

the title of the e-book.
Copy Right Note

You are permitted to freely distribute/print the unmodified version of this issue/e-book/article.
We are not attempting to obtain commercial benefit from the valuable work of the authors and the
Editor/Publisher claims the ‘fair use’ of copyrighted material. If you think that by publishing a
particular material, your copyright has been violated, please let us know. The Editor/Publisher is
not responsible for statements or opinions expressed herein nor do such statements necessarily
express the views of Editor/Publisher.
1
More Career Tips: http://www.terrafirmajobs.com/ITpros/IT_resources.asp?id=4
______________________________________________________________________________
Register your resume: www.terrafirmajobs.com
_________________________________________________
Index
Chapter Name Page
1) C# interview Questions and Answers. 4

1.1) Advance C# interview Questions
2) General Questions 17
2.1 ) General Questions
2.2 ) Methods and Property
2.3) Assembly Questions
2.4) XML Documentation Question
2.5) Debugging and Testing
3) ADO.net and Database Question 26
4) C#, DOT NET, XML, IIS Interview Questions 28

4.1 ) Framework.
4.2 ) COM
4.3 ) OOPS
4.4 ) C# Language Features
4.5 ) Access Specifier
4.6 ) Constructor / Destructor
4.7 ) ADO.net
4.8 ) ASP.net
4.8.1) Session.
4.8.2) Security.
4.8.3) Web Servcing & Remoting
4.9 ) XML
4.10 ) IIS
4.11 ) Controls
4.12 ) Programming
5) Dot NET. 120

5.1 ) Dot NET
5.2 ) Basic Technology.
5.3 ) Assemblies
5.4 ) Application Domain
5.5 ) Garbeg collection
5.6 ) Serialization
2
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5.7 ) Attribute
5.8 ) Code Access Security.
5.9 ) Interimediate Language (IL)
5.10 ) Implications for COM.
5.11 ) Miscellaneous
5.12 ) Class Library
5.12.1) File I/ O
5.12.2 ) Text Processing
5.12.3 ) Internet.
5.12.4) XML
5.12.5) Threading
5.12.6) Tracing.
6) C# FAQ's 151
6.1 ) Introduction
6.2 ) Basic Datatype.
6.3 ) Classes & Structs.
6.4 ) Exceptions
6.5 ) Runtime type information.
6.7 ) Advantage features.
6.8 ) Miscellaneous.
7) Interview Questions for Dot NET Forms. 161

8) Interview Questions for Dot NET Remoting 164
9) Interview Questions for ASP .NET 167
10 ) ASP.NET ,C#, VB.NET and COM etc….Full of microsoft Technology 173
11 ) .NET Framework FAQ's 204
12 ) C# and VB.NET 285
13) COM & COM + 307
14 ) Remoting FAQ's 311
15 ) WinForms FAQ 316
3
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
C# Interview Questions and Answers
Q 1. What’s the implicit name of the parameter that gets passed into the class’
set method?
Ans: - Value and its data type depend on whatever variable we’re changing.
Q 2. How do you inherit from a class in C#?
Ans: - Place a colon and then the name of the base class. Notice that it’s double
colon in C++.
Q 3. Does C# support multiple inheritances?
Ans: - No, use interfaces instead.
Q 4. When you inherit a protected class-level variable, who is it available to?
Ans: - Classes in the same namespace.
Q 5. Are private class-level variables inherited?
Ans: - Yes, but they are not accessible, so looking at it you can honestly say that
they are not inherited. But they are.
Q 6. Describe the accessibility modifier protected internal?
Ans: - It’s available to derived classes and classes within the same Assembly (and
naturally from the base class it’s declared in).
Q 7. C# provides a default constructor for me. I write a constructor that takes a

string as a parameter, but want to keep the no parameter one. How many
constructors should I write?
Ans: - Two. Once you write at least one constructor, C# cancels the freebie
constructor, and now you have to write one yourself, even if there’s no
implementation in it.
Q 8. What’s the top .NET class that everything is derived from?
Ans: - System. Object.
4
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 9. How’s method overriding different from overloading?
Ans: - When overriding, you change the method behavior for a derived class.
Overloading simply involves having a method with the same name within the
class.
Q 10. What does the keyword virtual mean in the method definition?
Ans: - The method can be over-ridden.
Q 11. Can you declare the override method static while the original method is
non-static?
Ans: - No, you can’t, the signature of the virtual method must remain the same,
only the keyword virtual is changed to keyword override.
Q 12. Can you override private virtual methods?
Ans: - No, moreover, you cannot access private methods in inherited classes,
have to be protected in the base class to allow any sort of access.
Q 13. Can you prevent your class from being inherited and becoming a base
class for some other classes?
Ans: - Yes, that’s what keyword sealed in the class definition is for. The
developer trying to derive from your class will get a message: cannot inherit from
Sealed class Whatever Base Class Name. It’s the same concept as final class in
Java.
Q 14. Can you allow class to be inherited, but prevent the method from being
over-ridden?
Ans: - Yes, just leave the class public and make the method sealed.
Q 16. What’s an abstract class?
Ans: - A class that cannot be instantiated. A concept in C++ known as pure

virtual method. A class that must be inherited and have the methods over-
ridden. Essentially, it’s a blueprint for a class without any implementation.
5
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 17. When do you absolutely have to declare a class as abstract (as opposed to
free-willed educated choice or decision based on UML diagram)?
Ans: - When at least one of the methods in the class is abstract. When the class
itself is inherited from an abstract class, but not all base abstract methods have
been over-ridden.
Q 18. What’s an interface class?
Ans: - It’s an abstract class with public abstract methods all of which must be
implemented in the inherited classes.
Q 19. Why can’t you specify the accessibility modifier for methods inside the
interface?
Ans: - They all must be public. Therefore, to prevent you from getting the false
impression that you have any freedom of choice, you are not allowed to specify
any accessibility, its public by default.
Q 20 Can you inherit multiple interfaces?
Ans: - Yes, why not.
Q 21. And if they have conflicting method names?
Ans: - It’s up to you to implement the method inside your own class, so
implementation is left entirely up to you. This might cause a problem on a
higher-level scale if similarly named methods from different interfaces expect
different data, but as far as compiler cares you’re okay.
Q 22. What’s the difference between an interface and abstract class?
Ans: - In the interface all methods must be abstract; in the abstract class some
methods can be concrete. In the interface no accessibility modifiers are allowed,
which is ok in abstract classes.
Q 23. How can you overload a method?
Ans: - Different parameter data types, different number of parameters, different

order of parameters.
6
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 24. If a base class has a bunch of overloaded constructors, and an inherited
class has another bunch of overloaded constructors, can you enforce a call
from an inherited constructor to an arbitrary base constructor?
Ans: - Yes, just place a colon, and then keyword base (parameter list to invoke
the appropriate constructor) in the overloaded constructor definition inside the
inherited class.
Q 25. What’s the difference between Systems? String and System.StringBuilder

classes?
Ans: - System. String is immutable; System.StringBuilder was designed with the

purpose of having a mutable string where a variety of operations can be
performed.
Q 26. What’s the advantage of using System.Text.StringBuilder over System

String?
Ans: - String Builder is more efficient in the cases, where a lot of manipulation is
done to the text. Strings are immutable, so each time it’s being operated on, a
new instance is created.
Q 27. Can you store multiple data types in System? Array?
Ans:- No.
Q 28. What’s the difference between the System.Array.CopyTo () and

System.Array.Clone ()?
Ans: - The first one performs a deep copy of the array, the second one is shallow.
Q 29. How can you sort the elements of the array in descending order?
Ans: - By calling Sort () and then Reverse () methods.
Q 30. What’s the .NET data type that allows the retrieval of data by a unique
key?
Ans: - Hash Table.
Q 31. What’s class Sorted List underneath?
Ans: - A sorted Hash Table.
7
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 32. Will finally block get executed if the exception had not occurred?
Ans: - Yes.
Q 33. What’s the C# equivalent of C++ catch (…), which was a catch-all
statement for any possible exception?
Ans: - A catch block that catches the exception of type System. Exception. You
can also omit the parameter data type in this case and just write catch {}.
Q 34. Can multiple catch blocks be executed?
Ans: - No, once the proper catch code fires off, the control is transferred to the
finally block (if there are any), and then whatever follows the finally block.
Q 35. Why is it a bad idea to throw your own exceptions?
Ans: - Well, if at that point you know that an error has occurred, then why not
write the proper code to handle that error instead of passing a new Exception
object to the catch block? Throwing your own exceptions signifies some design
flaws in the project.
Q 36. What’s a delegate?
Ans:- A delegate object encapsulates a reference to a method. In C++ they were

referred to as function pointers.
Q 37. What’s a multicast delegate?
Ans: - It’s a delegate that points to and eventually fires off several methods.
Q 38 How’s the DLL Hell problem solved in .NET?
Ans: - Assembly versioning allows the application to specify not only the library
it needs to run (which was available under Win32), but also the version of the
assembly.
Q 39. What are the ways to deploy an assembly?
Ans: - An MSI installer, a CAB archive, and XCOPY command.
8
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 40. What’s a satellite assembly?
Ans: - When you write a multilingual or multi-cultural application in .NET, and

want to distribute the core application separately from the localized modules, the
localized assemblies that modify the core application are called satellite
assemblies.
Q 41. What namespaces are necessary to create a localized application?
Ans: - System. Globalization, System. Resources.
Q 42. What’s the difference between // comments, /* */ comments and ///

comments?
Ans: - Single-line, multi-line and XML documentation comments.
Q 43 How do you generate documentation from the C# file commented properly

with a command-line compiler?
Ans: - Compile it with a /doc switch.
Q 44. What’s the difference between <c> and <code> XML documentation tag?
Ans: - Single line code example and multiple-line code example.
Q 45. Is XML case-sensitive?
Ans: - Yes, so <Student> and <student> are different elements.
Q 46. What debugging tools come with the .NET SDK?
Ans: - CorDBG – command-line debugger, and DbgCLR – graphic debugger.

Visual Studio .NET uses the DbgCLR. To use CorDbg, you must compile the
original C# file using the /debug switch.
Q 47. What does the window show in the debugger?
Ans: - It points to the object that’s pointed to by this reference. Object’s instance
data is shown.
9
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 48. What does assert () do?
Ans: - In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a parameter,

and shows the error dialog if the condition is false. The program proceeds
without any interruption if the condition is true.
Q 49. What’s the difference between the Debug class and Trace class?
Ans: - Documentation looks the same. Use Debug class for debug builds, use
Trace class for both debug and release builds.
Q 50. Why are there five tracing levels in System.Diagnostics.TraceSwitcher?
Ans: - The tracing dumps can be quite verbose and for some applications that are
constantly running you run the risk of overloading the machine and the hard
drive there. Five levels range from none to Verbose, allowing fine-tuning the
tracing activities.
Q 51. Where is the output of TextWriterTraceListener redirected?
Ans: - To the Console or a text file depending on the parameter passed to the
constructor.
Q 52. How do you debug an ASP.NET Web application?
Ans: - Attach the aspnet_wp.exe process to the DbgClr debugger.
Q 53. What are three test cases you should go through in unit testing?
Ans: - Positive test cases (correct data, correct output), negative test cases
(broken or missing data, proper handling), exception test cases (exceptions are
thrown and caught properly).
Q 54. Can you change the value of a variable while debugging a C# application?
Ans: - Yes, if you are debugging via Visual Studio.NET, just go to immediate
window.
Q 55. Explain the three services model (three-tier application)?
Ans: - Presentation (UI), business (logic and underlying code) and data (from
storage or other sources).
10
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 56. What are advantages and disadvantages of Microsoft-provided data
provider classes in ADO.NET?
Ans: - SQLServer.NET data provider is high-speed and robust, but requires SQL
Server license purchased from Microsoft. OLE-DB.NET is universal for accessing
other sources, like Oracle, DB2, Microsoft Access and Informix, but it’s a .NET
layer on top of OLE layer, so not the fastest thing in the world. ODBC.NET is a
deprecated layer provided for backward compatibility to ODBC engines.
Q 57. What’s the role of the Data Reader class in ADO.NET connections?
Ans: - It returns a read-only dataset from the data source when the command is
executed.
Q 58. What is the wildcard character in SQL? Let’s say you want to query
database with LIKE for all employees whose name starts with La.
Ans: - The wildcard character is %, the proper query with LIKE would involve
‘La%’.
Q 59. Explain ACID rule of thumb for transactions?
Ans: - Transaction must be Atomic (it is one unit of work and does not dependent
on previous and following transactions), Consistent (data is either committed or
roll back, no “in-between” case where something has been updated and
something hasn’t), Isolated (no transaction sees the intermediate results of the
current transaction), Durable (the values persist if the data had been committed
even if the system crashes right after).
Q 60. What connections does Microsoft SQL Server support?
Ans: - Windows Authentication (via Active Directory) and SQL Server

authentication (via Microsoft SQL Server username and passwords).
Q 61. Which one is trusted and which one is untrusted?
Ans: - Windows Authentication is trusted because the username and password

are checked with the Active Directory; the SQL Server authentication is
untrusted, since SQL Server is the only verifier participating in the transaction.
Q 62. Why would you use untrusted verificaion?
Ans: - Web Services might use it, as well as non-Windows applications.
11
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 63. What does the parameter Initial Catalog define inside Connection String?
Ans: - The database name to connect to.
Q 64. What’s the data provider name to connect to Access database?
Ans: - Microsoft. Access.
Q 65. What does dispose method do with the connection object?
Ans: - Deletes it from the memory.
Q 66. What is a pre-requisite for connection pooling?
Ans: - Multiple processes must agree that they will share the same connection,
where every parameter is the same, including the security settings.
Ans: - Multiple processes must agree that they will share the same connection,
where every parameter is the same, including the security settings.
Advanced C# interview questions

. Q 68. Can you store multiple data types in System? Array?
Ans: - No.
Q 69. What’s the difference between the System.Array.CopyTo () and

Ans: - The first one performs a deep copy of the array, the second one is shallow.
Ans: - Yes.
12
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - A catch block that catches the exception of type System. Exception. You
can also omit the parameter data type in this case and just write catch {}.
Ans: - No, once the proper catch code fires off, the control is transferred to the
finally block (if there are any), and then whatever follows the finally block.
Ans: - Well, if at that point you know that an error has occurred, then why not
write the proper code to handle that error instead of passing a new Exception
object to the catch block? Throwing your own exceptions signifies some design
flaws in the project.
Ans: - A delegate object encapsulates a reference to a method. In C++ they were

Q 78. How’s the DLL Hell problem solved in .NET?
Ans: - Assembly versioning allows the application to specify not only the library
it needs to run (which was available under Win32), but also the version of the
assembly.
Q 80. What’s a satellite assembly?
Ans: - When you write a multilingual or multi-cultural application in .NET, and

localized assemblies that modify the core application are called satellite
assemblies.
13
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - System. Globalization, System.Resources.
Q 82. What’s the difference between // comments, /* */ comments and ///

comments?
Ans: - Single-line, multi-line and XML documentation comments.
Q 83. How do you generate documentation from the C# file commented properly
Ans: - Compile it with a /doc switch.
Q 84. What’s the difference between <c> and <code> XML documentation tag?
Ans: - Yes, so <Student> and <student> are different elements.
Ans: - CorDBG – command-line debugger, and DbgCLR – graphic debugger.

Visual Studio .NET uses the DbgCLR. To use CorDbg, you must compile the
original C# file using the /debug switch.
Q 87. What does the window show in the debugger?
Ans: - It points to the object that’s pointed to by this reference. Object’s instance
data is shown.
Q 88. What does assert () do?
Ans: - In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a parameter,

and shows the error dialog if the condition is false. The program proceeds
without any interruption if the condition is true.
Documentation looks the same?
Ans: - Use Debug class for debug builds, use Trace class for both debug and
release builds.
14
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - The tracing dumps can be quite verbose and for some applications that are
drive there. Five levels range from none to Verbose, allowing fine-tuning the
tracing activities.
Ans: - To the Console or a text file depending on the parameter passed to the
constructor.
Ans: - Positive test cases (correct data, correct output), negative test cases
(broken or missing data, proper handling), exception test cases (exceptions are
thrown and caught properly).
Ans: - Yes, if you are debugging via Visual Studio.NET, just go to immediate
window.
Q 95. Explain the three services model (three-tier application)?

Ans :- SQLServer.NET data provider is high-speed and robust, but requires SQL
Server license purchased from Microsoft. OLE-DB.NET is universal for accessing
other sources, like Oracle, DB2, Microsoft Access and Informix, but it’s a .NET
layer on top of OLE layer, so not the fastest thing in the world. ODBC.NET is a
deprecated layer provided for backward compatibility to ODBC engines.
15
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 97. What’s the role of the Data Reader class in ADO.NET connections?
Ans: - It returns a read-only dataset from the data source when the command is
executed.
Q 98. What is the wildcard character in SQL? Let’s say you want to query
database with LIKE for all employees whose name starts with La?
Ans: - The wildcard character is %, the proper query with LIKE would involve
‘La%’.
Q 99. Explain ACID rule of thumb for transactions?
Ans: - Transaction must be Atomic (it is one unit of work and does not dependent
on previous and following transactions), Consistent (data is either committed or
roll back, no “in-between” case where something has been updated and
something hasn’t), Isolated (no transaction sees the intermediate results of the
current transaction), Durable (the values persist if the data had been committed
even if the system crashes right after).
Ans: - Windows Authentication (via Active Directory) and SQL Server

authentication (via Microsoft SQL Server username and passwords).
Ans :- Windows Authentication is trusted because the username and password

untrusted, since SQL Server is the only verifier participating in the transaction.
Q 103. What does the parameter Initial Catalog define inside Connection
String?
16
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 104. What’s the data provider name to connect to Access database?
Ans: - Microsoft. Access.
Q 105. What does dispose method do with the connection object?
General Questions
Q 106. Does C# support multiple-inheritance?
Ans: - No, use interfaces instead.
Ans :- Classes in the same namespace.
Ans :- Yes, but they are not accessible. Although they are not visible or
accessible via the class interface, they are inherited.
Q 109. Describe the accessibility modifier “protected internal”.
Ans :- It is available to derived classes and classes within the same Assembly
(and naturally from the base class it’s declared in). To do: Confirm the “within
the same assembly” portion.
Q 110. C# provides a default class constructor for me. I decide to write a

constructor that takes a string as a parameter, but want to keep the
constructor that has no parameter. How many constructors should I write?
Ans :- Two. Once you write at least one constructor, C# cancels the freebie
constructor, and now you have to write one yourself, even if there’s no
implementation in it.
17
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 111. What’s the top .NET class that everything is derived from?
Ans :- System. Object.
Q 112. What’s the difference between Systems? String and

System.StringBuilder classes?
Ans :- System. String is immutable. System.StringBuilder was designed with

the purpose of having a mutable string where a variety of operations can be
performed.
Q 113. What’s the advantage of using System.Text.StringBuilder over

System. String?
Ans :- String Builder is more efficient in cases where there is a large amount
of string manipulation. Strings are immutable, so each time it’s being
operated on, a new instance is created.
Q 114. Can you store multiple data types in System. Array?
Ans :- No.
Q 115 what’s the difference between the System.Array.CopyTo () and

Ans:-The first one performs a deep copy of the array, the second one is
shallow.
1. To do: improve the answer.
Q 116. . How can you sort the elements of the array in descending order?
Q 117. What’s the .NET class that allows the retrieval of a data element
using a unique key?
Ans :- Hash Table.
18
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 118 Will the finally block get executed if an exception has not occurred?
Ans: - Yes.
Ans: - A catch block that catches the exception of type System. Exception.
You can also omit the parameter data type in this case and just write catch {}.
Ans: - No. Once the proper catch code fires off, the control is transferred to
the finally block (if there are any), and then whatever follows the finally
block.
Q 121. Explain the three services model commonly know as a three-tier

application?
Q 122. What is the role of the Data Reader class in ADO.NET connections?
Ans: - It returns a read-only dataset from the data source when the command
is executed.
Class Questions
Ans: - Place a colon and then the name of the base class.
Q 124. Can you prevent your class from being inherited by another class?
19
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - Yes. The keyword “sealed” will prevent the class from being inherited.
Q 125. Can you allow a class to be inherited, but prevent the method from
being over-ridden?
Ans: - Yes. Just leave the class public and make the method sealed.
Q 126. What’s an abstract class?
Ans: - A class that cannot be instantiated. An abstract class is a class that

must be inherited and have the methods overridden. An abstract class is
essentially a blueprint for a class without any implementation.
Q 127. When do you absolutely have to declare a class as abstract?
Ans :- 1. When at least one of the methods in the class is abstract.
2. When the class itself is inherited from an abstract class, but not
all base abstract methods have been overridden.
Q 128. What’s an interface class?
Ans: - It’s an abstract class with public abstract methods all of which must be
Q 129. Why can’t you specify the accessibility modifier for methods inside the
interface?
Ans: - They all must be public. Therefore, to prevent you from getting the
false impression that you have any freedom of choice, you are not allowed to
specify any accessibility, its public by default.
Q130. Can you inherit multiple interfaces?
Ans: - Yes, why not.
20
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - It’s up to you to implement the method inside your own class, so
implementation is left entirely up to you. This might cause a problem on a
higher-level scale if similarly named methods from different interfaces expect
different data, but as far as compiler cares you’re okay.
Q 132. What’s the difference between an interface and abstract class?
Ans: - In an interface class, all methods must be abstract. In an abstract

class some methods can be concrete. In an interface class, no accessibility
modifiers are allowed, which is ok in an abstract class.
Q 133. What is the difference between a Struct and a Class?
Ans :- Structs are value-type variables and are thus saved on the stack ->
additional overhead but faster retrieval. Another difference is that structs
CANNOT inherit. (Questions courtesy of Eyal)
Method and Property Questions

Q 134. What’s the implicit name of the parameter that gets passed into the
set method/property of a class?
Ans: - The data type of the value parameter is defined by whatever data type
the property is declared as.
Q 135. What does the keyword “virtual” declare for a method or property?
Ans: - The method or property can be overridden.
Q 136. How is method overriding different from method overloading?
21
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans: - When overriding a method, you change the behavior of the method for
the derived class. Overloading a method simply involves having another
method with the same name within the class.
Q 137. Can you declare an override method to be static if the original method
is non-static?
Ans: - No. The signature of the virtual method must remain the same, only
the keyword virtual is changed to keyword override.
Ans: - No. Private methods are not accessible outside the class.
Original answer: No, moreover, you cannot access private methods in

inherited classes, have to be protected in the base class to allow any sort of
access
To do: Can a private method even be declared a virtual?
Q 139.. What are the different ways a method can be overloaded?
Ans: - parameter data types, different number of parameters, different order

of parameters.
Q 140. If a base class has a number of overloaded constructors, and an

inherited class has a number of overloaded constructors; can you enforce a
call from an inherited constructor to a specific base constructor?
Ans: - Yes, just place a colon, and then keyword base (parameter list to
invoke the appropriate constructor) in the overloaded constructor definition
inside the inherited class.
Ans: - Well, if at that point you know that an error has occurred, then why
not write the proper code to handle that error instead of passing a new
22
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Exception object to the catch block?
Throwing your own exceptions signifies some design flaws in the project.
Ans :- A delegate object encapsulates a reference to a method.
Assembly Questions
Q 153. How is the DLL Hell problem solved in .NET?
Ans: - Assembly versioning allows the application to specify not only the
library it needs to run (which was available under Win32), but also the
version of the assembly.
Q 155. What is a satellite assembly?
Ans: - When you write a multilingual or multi-cultural application in .NET,

and want to distribute the core application separately from the localized
modules, the localized assemblies that modify the core application are called
satellite assemblies.
Q 156.. What namespaces are necessary to create a localized application?

Ans: - System. Globalization and System.Resources.
XML Documentation Questions

Q 157 what’s the difference between // comments, /* */ comments and ///
comments?
Ans :- Single-line comments, multi-line comments, and XML documentation

comments.
23
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 158. How do you generate documentation from the C# file commented
properly with a command-line compiler?
Ans: - Compile it with the /doc switch.
Q 159.What the difference is between and XML documentation tag?
Ans :- Yes.
Debugging and Testing Questions

Ans :-
1. CorDBG – command-line debugger. To use CorDbg, you must

compile the original C# file using the /debug switch.
2. DbgCLR – graphic debugger. Visual Studio .NET uses the

DbgCLR.
Q 162. What does the “This” window show in the debugger?
Ans: - It points to the object that’s pointed to by this reference. Object’s

instance data is shown.
Q 163.. What does assert () method do?
Ans :-In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a

parameter, and shows the error dialog if the condition is false. The program
proceeds without any interruption if the condition is true.
24
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:-Documentation looks the same. Use Debug class for debug builds, use
Trace class for both debug and release builds.
Q 165. Why are there five tracing levels in

System.Diagnostics.TraceSwitcher?
Ans:-The tracing dumps can be quite verbose. For applications that are
drive. Five levels range from none to Verbose, allowing you to fine-tune the
tracing activities.
Q 166 where is the output of TextWriterTraceListener redirected?
Ans :-To the Console or a text file depending on the parameter passed to the
constructor.
1. Positive test cases (correct data, correct output).
2. Negative test cases (broken or missing data, proper handling).
3. Exception test cases (exceptions are thrown and caught

properly).
Q 169. Can you change the value of a variable while debugging a C#

application?
Ans: - Yes. If you are debugging via Visual Studio.NET, just go to Immediate
window.
25
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ADO.NET and Database Questions
Ans: - SQLServer.NET data provider is high-speed and robust, but requires

SQL Server license purchased from Microsoft. OLE-DB.NET is universal for
accessing other sources, like Oracle, DB2, Microsoft Access and Informix.
OLE-DB.NET is a .NET layer on top of the OLE layer, so it’s not as fastest
and efficient as SqlServer.NET.
Q 171.. What is the wildcard character in SQL?
Ans: - Let’s say you want to query database with LIKE for all employees
whose name starts with La. The wildcard character is %, the proper query
with LIKE would involve ‘La%’.
Q 172 Explain ACID rule of thumb for transactions?
Ans: - A transaction must be:
1. Atomic - it is one unit of work and does not dependent on

previous and following transactions.
2. Consistent - data is either committed or roll back, no “in-

between” case where something has been updated and something
hasn’t.
3. Isolated - no transaction sees the intermediate results of the

current transaction).
4. Durable - the values persist if the data had been committed even
if the system crashes right after.
Ans :- Windows Authentication (via Active Directory) and SQL Server

authentication (via Microsoft SQL Server username and password).
26
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:-Windows Authentication is trusted because the username and password

untrusted, since SQL Server is the only verifier participating in the
transaction.
Q 176. What does the Initial Catalog parameter define in the connection
string?
Q 177. What is the data provider name to connect to an Access database?
Ans: - Microsoft.Access.
Q 178. What does the Dispose method do with the connection object?
1. To do: answer better. The current answer is not entirely correct.
Ans: - Multiple processes must agree that they will share the same
connection, where every parameter is the same, including the security
settings. The connection string must be identical.
27
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
C#, .NET, XML, IIS - Interview Questions

(Framework)
Q 1. What is .NET Framework?
Ans :- The .NET Framework has two main components: the common
language runtime and the .NET Framework class library.
You can think of the runtime as an agent that manages code at execution
time, providing core services such as memory management, thread
management, and remoting, while also enforcing strict type safety and
other forms of code accuracy that ensure security and robustness.
The class library is a comprehensive, object-oriented collection of reusable
types that you can use to develop applications ranging from traditional
command-line or graphical user interface (GUI) applications to
applications based on the latest innovations provided by ASP.NET, such
as Web Forms and XML Web services.
Q 2. What is CLR, CTS, and CLS?
Ans: - The .NET Framework provides a runtime environment called the

Common Language Runtime or CLR (similar to the Java Virtual Machine
or JVM in Java), which handles the execution of code and provides useful
services for the implementation of the program. CLR takes care of code
management at program execution and provides various beneficial
services such as memory management, thread management, security
management, code verification, compilation, and other system services.
The managed code that targets CLR benefits from useful features such as
cross-language integration, cross-language exception handling,
versioning, enhanced security, deployment support, and debugging.
Common Type System (CTS) describes how types are declared, used and
managed in the runtime and facilitates cross-language integration, type
safety, and high performance code execution.
The CLS is simply a specification that defines the rules to support
language integration in such a way that programs written in any
language, yet can interoperate with one another, taking full advantage of
inheritance, polymorphism, exceptions, and other features. These rules
and the specification are documented in the ECMA proposed standard
document, "Partition I Architecture", http://msdn.microsoft.com/net/ecma/
28
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 3. What are the new features of Framework 1.1 ?
Ans: - Native Support for Developing Mobile Web Applications
Q 4. Enable Execution of Windows Forms Assemblies Originating

from the Internet?
Ans :- Assemblies originating from the Internet zone—for example,

Microsoft Windows® Forms controls embedded in an Internet-based Web
page or Windows Forms assemblies hosted on an Internet Web server and
loaded either through the Web browser or programmatically using the
System.Reflection.Assembly.LoadFrom () method—now receive sufficient
permission to execute in a semi-trusted manner. Default security policy
has been changed so that assemblies assigned by the common language
runtime (CLR) to the Internet zone code group now receive the
constrained permissions associated with the Internet permission set. In
the .NET Framework 1.0 Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2, such
applications received the permissions associated with the Nothing
permission set and could not execute.
Q 5. Enable Code Access Security for ASP.NET Applications ?
Ans :- Systems administrators can now use code access security to further
lock down the permissions granted to ASP.NET Web applications and
Web services. Although the operating system account under which an
application runs imposes security restrictions on the application, the code
access security system of the CLR can enforce additional restrictions on
selected application resources based on policies specified by systems
administrators. You can use this feature in a shared server environment
(such as an Internet service provider (ISP) hosting multiple Web
applications on one server) to isolate separate applications from one
another, as well as with stand-alone servers where you want applications
to run with the minimum necessary privileges.
Native Support for Communicating with ODBC and Oracle Databases
Unified Programming Model for Smart Client Application Development

The Microsoft .NET Compact Framework brings the CLR, Windows
Forms controls, and other .NET Framework features to small devices. The
.NET Compact Framework supports a large subset of the .NET
Framework class library optimized for small devices.
29
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Support for IPv6
the .NET Framework 1.1 supports the emerging update to the Internet
Protocol, commonly referred to as IP version 6, or simply IPv6. This
protocol is designed to significantly increase the address space used to
identify communication endpoints in the Internet to accommodate its
ongoing growth.
http://msdn.microsoft.com/netframework/technologyinfo/Overview/whatsn
ew.aspx
Q 6. Is .NET a runtime service or a development platform?
Ans :- Ans: It's both and actually a lot more. Microsoft .NET includes a
new way of delivering software and services to businesses and consumers.
A part of Microsoft.NET is the .NET Frameworks. The .NET frameworks
SDK consists of two parts: the .NET common language runtime and the
.NET class library. In addition, the SDK also includes command-line
compilers for C#, C++, JScript, and VB. You use these compilers to build
applications and components. These components require the runtime to
execute so this is a development platform.
Q 7. What is MSIL, IL?
Ans :- When compiling to managed code, the compiler translates your

source code into Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL), which is a CPU-
independent set of instructions that can be efficiently converted to native
code. MSIL includes instructions for loading, storing, initializing, and
calling methods on objects, as well as instructions for arithmetic and
logical operations, control flow, direct memory access, exception handling,
and other operations. Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) is a
language used as the output of a number of compilers and as the input to
a just-in-time (JIT) compiler. The common language runtime includes a
JIT compiler for converting MSIL to native code.
Q 8. Can I write IL programs directly?
Ans :- Yes. Peter Drayton posted this simple example to the DOTNET
mailing list:
.assembly MyAssembly {}
.class MyApp {
.method static void Main() {
.entrypoint
30
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ldstr "Hello, IL!"
call void System.Console::WriteLine(class System.Object)
ret
}
}
Just put this into a file called hello.il, and then run ilasm hello.il. An exe
assembly will be generated.
Q 7. What is JIT (just in time)? how it works?
Ans :- Before Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) can be executed, it

must be converted by a .NET Framework just-in-time (JIT) compiler to
native code, which is CPU-specific code that runs on the same computer
architecture as the JIT compiler.
Rather than using time and memory to convert all the MSIL in a portable
executable (PE) file to native code, it converts the MSIL as it is needed
during execution and stores the resulting native code so that it is
accessible for subsequent calls.
The runtime supplies another mode of compilation called install-time code
generation. The install-time code generation mode converts MSIL to
native code just as the regular JIT compiler does, but it converts larger
units of code at a time, storing the resulting native code for use when the
assembly is subsequently loaded and executed.
As part of compiling MSIL to native code, code must pass a verification
process unless an administrator has established a security policy that
allows code to bypass verification. Verification examines MSIL and
metadata to find out whether the code can be determined to be type safe,
which means that it is known to access only the memory locations it is
authorized to access.
Q 9. What is strong name?
Ans :- A name that consists of an assembly's identity—its simple text

name, version number, and culture information (if provided)—
strengthened by a public key and a digital signature generated over the
assembly.
31
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 10. What is portable executable (PE)?
Ans :- The file format defining the structure that all executable files
(EXE) and Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL) must use to allow them to be
loaded and executed by Windows. PE is derived from the Microsoft
Common Object File Format (COFF). The EXE and DLL files created
using the .NET Framework obey the PE/COFF formats and also add
additional header and data sections to the files that are only used by the
CLR. The specification for the PE/COFF file formats is available at
http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/hwdev/hardware/pecoffdown.mspx
Q 11. What is Event - Delegate? clear syntax for writing a event

delegate?
Ans :- The event keyword lets you specify a delegate that will be called
upon the occurrence of some "event" in your code. The delegate can have
one or more associated methods that will be called when your code
indicates that the event has occurred. An event in one program can be
made available to other programs that target the .NET Framework
Common Language Runtime.
// keyword_delegate.cs
// delegate declaration
delegate void MyDelegate(int i);
class Program
{
public static void Main()
{
TakesADelegate(new MyDelegate(DelegateFunction));
}
public static void TakesADelegate(MyDelegate SomeFunction)
{
SomeFunction(21);
}
public static void DelegateFunction(int i)
{
System.Console.WriteLine("Called by delegate with number: {0}.", i);
}
}
32
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 12. What is Code Access Security (CAS)?
Ans:- CAS is the part of the .NET security model that determines whether
or not a piece of code is allowed to run, and what resources it can use
when it is running. For example, it is CAS that will prevent a .NET web
applet from formatting your hard disk.
Q 13. How does CAS work?
Ans :- The CAS security policy revolves around two key concepts - code
groups and permissions. Each .NET assembly is a member of a particular
code group, and each code group is granted the permissions specified in a
named permission set.
For example, using the default security policy, a control downloaded from
a web site belongs to the 'Zone - Internet' code group, which adheres to
the permissions defined by the 'Internet' named permission set.
(Naturally the 'Internet' named permission set represents a very
restrictive range of permissions.)
Q 14. Who defines the CAS code groups?
Ans :- Microsoft defines some default ones, but you can modify these and
even create your own. To see the code groups defined on your system, run
'caspol -lg' from the command-line. On my syystem it looks like this:
Level = Machine
Code Groups:
1. All code: Nothing

1.1. Zone - MyComputer: FullTrust
1.1.1. Honor SkipVerification requests: SkipVerification
1.2. Zone - Intranet: LocalIntranet
1.3. Zone - Internet: Internet
1.4. Zone - Untrusted: Nothing
1.5. Zone - Trusted: Internet
1.6. StrongName –
0024000004800000940000000602000000240000525341310004000003
000000CFCB3291AA715FE99D40D49040336F9056D7886FED46775BC7
BB5430BA4444FEF8348EBD06
F962F39776AE4DC3B7B04A7FE6F49F25F740423EBF2C0B89698D8D0
8AC48D69CED0FC8F83B465E08
33
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
07AC11EC1DCC7D054E807A43336DDE408A5393A48556123272CEEEE
72F1660B71927D38561AABF5C
AC1DF1734633C602F8F2D5: Everything
Note the hierarchy of code groups - the top of the hierarchy is the most
general ('All code'), which is then sub-divided into several groups, each of
which in turn can be sub-divided. Also note that (somewhat counter-
intuitively) a sub-group can be associated with a more permissive
permission set than its parent.
Q 15. How do I define my own code group?
Ans :- Use caspol. For example, suppose you trust code from
www.mydomain.com and you want it have full access to your system, but
you want to keep the default restrictions for all other internet sites. To
achieve this, you would add a new code group as a sub-group of the 'Zone -
Internet' group, like this:
caspol -ag 1.3 -site www.mydomain.com FullTrust
Now if you run caspol -lg you will see that the new group has been added
as group 1.3.1:
...
1.3.1. Site - www.mydomain.com: FullTrust
...
Note that the numeric label (1.3.1) is just a caspol invention to make the
code groups easy to manipulate from the command-line. The underlying
runtime never sees it.
Q 16. How do I change the permission set for a code group?
Ans :- Use caspol. If you are the machine administrator, you can operate
at the 'machine' level - which means not only that the changes you make
become the default for the machine, but also that users cannot change the
permissions to be more permissive. If you are a normal (non-admin) user
you can still modify the permissions, but only to make them more
restrictive. For example, to allow intranet code to do what it likes you
might do this:
caspol -cg 1.2 FullTrust
Note that because this is more permissive than the default policy (on a
standard system), you should only do this at the machine level - doing it
at the user level will have no effect.
Q 17. I'm having some trouble with CAS. How can I diagnose my
problem?
Ans :- Caspol has a couple of options that might help. First, you can ask
caspol to tell you what code group an assembly belongs to, using caspol -
34
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
rsg. Similarly, you can ask what permissions are being applied to a
particular assembly using caspol -rsp.
Q 18. I can't be bothered with all this CAS stuff. Can I turn it off?
Ans :- Yes, as long as you are an administrator. Just run:
caspol -s off
http://www.codeproject.com/dotnet/UB_CAS_NET.asp
Q 19. Which namespace is the base class for .net Class library?
Ans :- system.object
Q 20. What are object pooling and connection pooling and difference?
Where do we set the Min and Max Pool size for connection pooling?
Ans :- Object pooling is a COM+ service that enables you to reduce the
overhead of creating each object from scratch. When an object is
activated, it is pulled from the pool. When the object is deactivated, it is
placed back into the pool to await the next request. You can configure
object pooling by applying the ObjectPoolingAttribute attribute to a class
that derives from the System.EnterpriseServices.ServicedComponent
class.
Object pooling lets you control the number of connections you use, as
opposed to connection pooling, where you control the maximum number
reached.
Following are important differences between object pooling and
connection pooling:
Creation. When using connection pooling, creation is on the same thread,

so if there is nothing in the pool, a connection is created on your behalf.
With object pooling, the pool might decide to create a new object.
However, if you have already reached your maximum, it instead gives you
the next available object. This is crucial behavior when it takes a long
time to create an object, but you do not use it for very long.
Enforcement of minimums and maximums. This is not done in connection

pooling. The maximum value in object pooling is very important when
trying to scale your application. You might need to multiplex thousands of
requests to just a few objects. (TPC/C benchmarks rely on this.)
35
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
COM+ object pooling is identical to what is used in .NET Framework
managed SQL Client connection pooling. For example, creation is on a
different thread and minimums and maximums are enforced.
Q 21. What is Application Domain?
Ans :- The primary purpose of the AppDomain is to isolate an application

from other applications. Win32 processes provide isolation by having
distinct memory address spaces. This is effective, but it is expensive and
doesn't scale well. The .NET runtime enforces AppDomain isolation by
keeping control over the use of memory - all memory in the AppDomain is
managed by the .NET runtime, so the runtime can ensure that
AppDomains do not access each other's memory.
Objects in different application domains communicate either by
transporting copies of objects across application domain boundaries, or by
using a proxy to exchange messages.
MarshalByRefObject is the base class for objects that communicate across
application domain boundaries by exchanging messages using a proxy.
Objects that do not inherit from MarshalByRefObject are implicitly
marshal by value. When a remote application references a marshal by
value object, a copy of the object is passed across application domain
boundaries.
Q 22. How does an AppDomain get created?
Ans :- AppDomains are usually created by hosts. Examples of hosts are

the Windows Shell, ASP.NET and IE. When you run a .NET application
from the command-line, the host is the Shell. The Shell creates a new
AppDomain for every application.
AppDomains can also be explicitly created by .NET applications. Here is a
C# sample which creates an AppDomain, creates an instance of an object
inside it, and then executes one of the object's methods. Note that you
must name the executable 'appdomaintest.exe' for this code to work as-is.
using System;
using System.Runtime.Remoting;
public class CAppDomainInfo : MarshalByRefObject

{
public string GetAppDomainInfo()
36
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
{
return "AppDomain = "
AppDomain.CurrentDomain.FriendlyName;
}
}
public class App
{
public static int Main()
{
AppDomain ad = AppDomain.CreateDomain( "Andy's
new domain", null, null );
ObjectHandle oh = ad.CreateInstance( "appdomaintest",
"CAppDomainInfo" );
CAppDomainInfo adInfo =
(CAppDomainInfo)(oh.Unwrap());
string info = adInfo.GetAppDomainInfo();
Console.WriteLine( "AppDomain info: " + info );
return 0;
}
}
Q 23. What is serialization in .NET? What are the ways to control
serialization?
Ans :- Serialization is the process of converting an object into a stream of

bytes. Deserialization is the opposite process of creating an object from a
stream of bytes. Serialization/Deserialization is mostly used to transport
objects (e.g. during remoting), or to persist objects (e.g. to a file or
database).Serialization can be defined as the process of storing the state
of an object to a storage medium. During this process, the public and
private fields of the object and the name of the class, including the
assembly containing the class, are converted to a stream of bytes, which is
then written to a data stream. When the object is subsequently
deserialized, an exact clone of the original object is created.
Binary serialization preserves type fidelity, which is useful for preserving

the state of an object between different invocations of an application. For
example, you can share an object between different applications by
serializing it to the clipboard. You can serialize an object to a stream,
disk, memory, over the network, and so forth. Remoting uses serialization
37
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
to pass objects "by value" from one computer or application domain to
another.
XML serialization serializes only public properties and fields and does not
preserve type fidelity. This is useful when you want to provide or consume
data without restricting the application that uses the data. Because XML
is an open standard, it is an attractive choice for sharing data across the
Web. SOAP is an open standard, which makes it an attractive choice.
There are two separate mechanisms provided by the .NET class library -
XmlSerializer and SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter. Microsoft uses
XmlSerializer for Web Services, and uses
SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter for remoting. Both are available for use
in your own code.
Q 24. Why do I get errors when I try to serialize a Hashtable?
Ans :- XmlSerializer will refuse to serialize instances of any class that
implements IDictionary, e.g. Hashtable. SoapFormatter and
BinaryFormatter do not have this restriction.
Q 25. Q 38. What is exception handling?
Ans :- When an exception occurs, the system searches for the nearest
catch clause that can handle the exception, as determined by the run-time
type of the exception. First, the current method is searched for a lexically
enclosing try statement, and the associated catch clauses of the try
statement are considered in order. If that fails, the method that called the
current method is searched for a lexically enclosing try statement that
encloses the point of the call to the current method. This search continues
until a catch clause is found that can handle the current exception, by
naming an exception class that is of the same class, or a base class, of the
run-time type of the exception being thrown. A catch clause that doesn't
name an exception class can handle any exception.
Once a matching catch clause is found, the system prepares to transfer
control to the first statement of the catch clause. Before execution of the
catch clause begins, the system first executes, in order, any finally clauses
that were associated with try statements more nested that than the one
that caught the exception.
Exceptions that occur during destructor execution are worth special
mention. If an exception occurs during destructor execution, and that
exception is not caught, then the execution of that destructor is
terminated and the destructor of the base class (if any) is called. If there
38
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
is no base class (as in the case of the object type) or if there is no base
class destructor, then the exception is discarded.
Q 26. What is Assembly?
Ans :-Assemblies are the building blocks of .NET Framework

applications; they form the fundamental unit of deployment, version
control, reuse, activation scoping, and security permissions. An assembly
is a collection of types and resources that are built to work together and
form a logical unit of functionality. An assembly provides the common
language runtime with the information it needs to be aware of type
implementations. To the runtime, a type does not exist outside the
context of an assembly.
Assemblies are a fundamental part of programming with the .NET
Framework. An assembly performs the following functions:
It contains code that the common language runtime executes. Microsoft

intermediate language (MSIL) code in a portable executable (PE) file will
not be executed if it does not have an associated assembly manifest. Note
that each assembly can have only one entry point (that is, DllMain,
WinMain, or Main).
It forms a security boundary. An assembly is the unit at which

permissions are requested and granted.
It forms a type boundary. Every type's identity includes the name of the
assembly in which it resides. A type called MyType loaded in the scope of
one assembly is not the same as a type called MyType loaded in the scope
of another assembly.
It forms a reference scope boundary. The assembly's manifest contains

assembly metadata that is used for resolving types and satisfying
resource requests. It specifies the types and resources that are exposed
outside the assembly. The manifest also enumerates other assemblies on
which it depends.
It forms a version boundary. The assembly is the smallest versionable

unit in the common language runtime; all types and resources in the
same assembly are versioned as a unit. The assembly's manifest describes
the version dependencies you specify for any dependent assemblies.
39
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
It forms a deployment unit. When an application starts, only the
assemblies that the application initially calls must be present. Other
assemblies, such as localization resources or assemblies containing utility
classes, can be retrieved on demand. This allows applications to be kept
simple and thin when first downloaded.
It is the unit at which side-by-side execution is supported.

Assemblies can be static or dynamic. Static assemblies can include .NET
Framework types (interfaces and classes), as well as resources for the
assembly (bitmaps, JPEG files, resource files, and so on). Static
assemblies are stored on disk in PE files. You can also use the .NET
Framework to create dynamic assemblies, which are run directly from
memory and are not saved to disk before execution. You can save dynamic
assemblies to disk after they have executed.
There are several ways to create assemblies. You can use development
tools, such as Visual Studio .NET, that you have used in the past to create
.dll or .exe files. You can use tools provided in the .NET Framework SDK
to create assemblies with modules created in other development
environments. You can also use common language runtime APIs, such as
Reflection.Emit, to create dynamic assemblies.
Q 27. What are the contents of assembly?
Ans :- In general, a static assembly can consist of four elements:
The assembly manifest, which contains assembly metadata.
Type metadata.
Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) code that implements the types.
A set of resources.
Q 28. Q 41. What are the different types of assemblies?
Ans :- Private, Public/Shared, Satellite
40
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 29. What is the difference between a private assembly and a
shared assembly?
Ans :- Location and visibility: A private assembly is normally used by a

single application, and is stored in the application's directory, or a sub-
directory beneath. A shared assembly is normally stored in the global
assembly cache, which is a repository of assemblies maintained by the
.NET runtime. Shared assemblies are usually libraries of code which
many applications will find useful, e.g. the .NET framework classes.
Versioning: The runtime enforces versioning constraints only on shared

assemblies, not on private assemblies.
Q 30. What are Satellite Assemblies? How you will create this? How
will you get the different language strings?
Ans :- Satellite assemblies are often used to deploy language-specific

resources for an application. These language-specific assemblies work in
side-by-side execution because the application has a separate product ID
for each language and installs satellite assemblies in a language-specific
subdirectory for each language. When uninstalling, the application
removes only the satellite assemblies associated with a given language
and .NET Framework version. No core .NET Framework files are
removed unless the last language for that .NET Framework version is
being removed.
(For example, English and Japanese editions of the .NET Framework
version 1.1 share the same core files. The Japanese .NET Framework
version 1.1 adds satellite assemblies with localized resources in a \ja
subdirectory. An application that supports the .NET Framework version
1.1, regardless of its language, always uses the same core runtime files.)
http://www.ondotnet.com/lpt/a/2637
**
41
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 31. How will u load dynamic assembly? How will create assemblies
at run time? What is Assembly manifest? what all details the
assembly manifest will contain?
Ans :- Every assembly, whether static or dynamic, contains a collection of

data that describes how the elements in the assembly relate to each other.
The assembly manifest contains this assembly metadata. An assembly
manifest contains all the metadata needed to specify the assembly's
version requirements and security identity, and all metadata needed to
define the scope of the assembly and resolve references to resources and
classes. The assembly manifest can be stored in either a PE file (an .exe
or .dll) with Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) code or in a
standalone PE file that contains only assembly manifest information.
It contains Assembly name, Version number, Culture, Strong name
information, List of all files in the assembly, Type reference information,
Information on referenced assemblies.
Q 32. Difference between assembly manifest & metadata?
Ans :- assembly manifest - An integral part of every assembly that

renders the assembly self-describing. The assembly manifest contains the
assembly's metadata. The manifest establishes the assembly identity,
specifies the files that make up the assembly implementation, specifies
the types and resources that make up the assembly, itemizes the compile-
time dependencies on other assemblies, and specifies the set of
permissions required for the assembly to run properly. This information is
used at run time to resolve references, enforce version binding policy, and
validate the integrity of loaded assemblies. The self-describing nature of
assemblies also helps makes zero-impact install and XCOPY deployment
feasible.
metadata - Information that describes every element managed by the
common language runtime: an assembly, loadable file, type, method, and
so on. This can include information required for debugging and garbage
collection, as well as security attributes, marshaling data, extended class
and member definitions, version binding, and other information required
by the runtime.
42
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 33. What is Global Assembly Cache (GAC) and what is the purpose
of it? (How to make an assembly to public? Steps) How more than one
version of an assembly can keep in same place?
Ans :-Each computer where the common language runtime is installed

has a machine-wide code cache called the global assembly cache. The
global assembly cache stores assemblies specifically designated to be
shared by several applications on the computer. You should share
assemblies by installing them into the global assembly cache only when
you need to.
Steps
- Create a strong name using sn.exe tool
eg: sn -k keyPair.snk
- with in AssemblyInfo.cs add the generated file name
eg: [assembly: AssemblyKeyFile("abc.snk")]
- recompile project, then install it to GAC by either
drag & drop it to assembly folder (C:\WINDOWS\assembly OR
C:\WINNT\assembly) (shfusion.dll tool)
or
gacutil -i abc.dll
Q 34. If I have more than one version of one assemblies, then how'll I
use old version (how/where to specify version number?)in my
application?
**
Q 35. How to find methods of a assembly file (not using ILDASM)?
Ans :- Reflection
Q 36. What is Garbage Collection in .Net? Garbage collection

process?
Ans :- The process of transitively tracing through all pointers to actively

used objects in order to locate all objects that can be referenced, and then
arranging to reuse any heap memory that was not found during this
trace. The common language runtime garbage collector also compacts the
memory that is in use to reduce the working space needed for the heap.
43
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 37. What is Reflection in .NET? Namespace? How will you load an
assembly which is not referenced by current assembly?
Ans :- All .NET compilers produce metadata about the types defined in
the modules they produce. This metadata is packaged along with the
module (modules in turn are packaged together in assemblies), and can be
accessed by a mechanism called reflection. The System.Reflection
namespace contains classes that can be used to interrogate the types for a
module/assembly.
Using reflection to access .NET metadata is very similar to using
ITypeLib/ITypeInfo to access type library data in COM, and it is used for
similar purposes - e.g. determining data type sizes for marshaling data
across context/process/machine boundaries.
Reflection can also be used to dynamically invoke methods (see
System.Type.InvokeMember), or even create types dynamically at run-
time (see System.Reflection.Emit.TypeBuilder).
Q 38. What is Custom attribute? How to create? If I'm having custom

attribute in an assembly, how to say that name in the code?
Ans :- The primary steps to properly design custom attribute classes are
as follows:
Applying the AttributeUsageAttribute

([AttributeUsage(AttributeTargets.All, Inherited = false, AllowMultiple =
true)])
Declaring the attribute. (class public class MyAttribute : System.Attribute

{ // . . . })
Declaring constructors (public MyAttribute(bool myvalue) { this.myvalue

= myvalue; })
Declaring properties
public bool MyProperty
{
get {return this.myvalue;}
set {this.myvalue = value;}
}
The following example demonstrates the basic way of using reflection to

get access to custom attributes.
44
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
class MainClass
{
{
System.Reflection.MemberInfo info = typeof(MyClass);
object[] attributes = info.GetCustomAttributes();
for (int i = 0; i < attributes.Length; i ++)
{
System.Console.WriteLine(attributes[i]);
}
}
}
Q 39. What is the managed and unmanaged code in .net?
Ans :- The .NET Framework provides a run-time environment called the

Common Language Runtime, which manages the execution of code and
provides services that make the development process easier. Compilers
and tools expose the runtime's functionality and enable you to write code
that benefits from this managed execution environment. Code that you
develop with a language compiler that targets the runtime is called
managed code; it benefits from features such as cross-language
integration, cross-language exception handling, enhanced security,
versioning and deployment support, a simplified model for component
interaction, and debugging and profiling services.
Q 40. How do you create threading in .NET? What is the namespace

for that?
Ans :- System.Threading.Thread
Q 41. Serialize and MarshalByRef?
Ans :- using directive vs using statement

You create an instance in a using statement to ensure that Dispose is
called on the object when the using statement is exited. A using
statement can be exited either when the end of the using statement is
reached or if, for example, an exception is thrown and control leaves the
statement block before the end of the statement.
The using directive has two uses:
45
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Create an alias for a namespace (a using alias).
Permit the use of types in a namespace, such that, you do not have to
qualify the use of a type in that namespace (a using directive).
Q 42. Describe the Managed Execution Process?
Ans :- The managed execution process includes the following steps:
Choosing a compiler.
To obtain the benefits provided by the common language runtime, you
must use one or more language compilers that target the runtime.
Compiling your code to Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL).

Compiling translates your source code into MSIL and generates the
required metadata.
Compiling MSIL to native code.

At execution time, a just-in-time (JIT) compiler translates the MSIL into
native code. During this compilation, code must pass a verification
process that examines the MSIL and metadata to find out whether the
code can be determined to be type safe.
Executing your code.

The common language runtime provides the infrastructure that enables
execution to take place as well as a variety of services that can be used
during execution.
Q 43. What is Active Directory? What is the namespace used to

access the Microsoft Active Directories? What are ADSI Directories?
Ans :- Active Directory Service Interfaces (ADSI) is a programmatic

interface for Microsoft Windows Active Directory. It enables your
applications to interact with diverse directories on a network, using a
single interface. Visual Studio .NET and the .NET Framework make it
easy to add ADSI functionality with the DirectoryEntry and
DirectorySearcher components.
Using ADSI, you can create applications that perform common
46
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
administrative tasks, such as backing up databases, accessing printers,
and administering user accounts. ADSI makes it possible for you to:
Log on once to work with diverse directories. The DirectoryEntry

component class provides username and password properties that can be
entered at runtime and communicated to the Active Directory object you
are binding to.
Use a single application programming interface (API) to perform tasks on

multiple directory systems by offering the user a variety of protocols to
use. The DirectoryServices namespace provides the classes to perform
most administrative functions.
Perform "rich querying" on directory systems. ADSI technology allows for

searching for an object by specifying two query dialects: SQL and LDAP.
Access and use a single, hierarchical structure for administering and

maintaining diverse and complicated network configurations by accessing
an Active Directory tree.
Integrate directory information with databases such as SQL Server. The

DirectoryEntry path may be used as an ADO.NET connection string
provided that it is using the LDAP provider.
using System.DirectoryServices;
Q 44. How Garbage Collector (GC) Works?
Ans :- The methods in this class influence when an object is garbage

collected and when resources allocated by an object are released.
Properties in this class provide information about the total amount of
memory available in the system and the age category, or generation, of
memory allocated to an object. Periodically, the garbage collector
performs garbage collection to reclaim memory allocated to objects for
which there are no valid references. Garbage collection happens
automatically when a request for memory cannot be satisfied using
available free memory. Alternatively, an application can force garbage
collection using the Collect method.
Garbage collection consists of the following steps:
The garbage collector searches for managed objects that are referenced in
managed code.
47
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The garbage collector attempts to finalize objects that are not referenced.
The garbage collector frees objects that are not referenced and reclaims
their memory.
Q 45. Why do we need to call CG.SupressFinalize?
Ans :- Requests that the system not call the finalizer method for the
specified object.
public static void SuppressFinalize(
object obj
); The method removes obj from the set of objects that require finalization.
The obj parameter is required to be the caller of this method.
Objects that implement the IDisposable interface can call this method
from the IDisposable.Dispose method to prevent the garbage collector
from calling Object.Finalize on an object that does not require it.
Q 46. What is nmake tool?
Ans :- The Nmake tool (Nmake.exe) is a 32-bit tool that you use to build
projects based on commands contained in a .mak file.
usage : nmake -a all
Q 47. What are Namespaces?
Ans :-The namespace keyword is used to declare a scope. This namespace

scope lets you organize code and gives you a way to create globally-unique
types. Even if you do not explicitly declare one, a default namespace is
created. This unnamed namespace, sometimes called the global
namespace, is present in every file. Any identifier in the global namespace
is available for use in a named namespace. Namespaces implicitly have
public access and this is not modifiable.
Q 48. What is the difference between CONST and READONLY?
Ans :- Both are meant for constant values. A const field can only be
initialized at the declaration of the field. A readonly field can be
initialized either at the declaration or in a constructor. Therefore,
readonly fields can have different values depending on the constructor
used.
readonly int b;
public X()
48
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
{
b=1;
}
public X(string s)
{
b=5;
}
public X(string s, int i)
{
b=i;
}
Also, while a const field is a compile-time constant, the readonly field can
be used for runtime constants, as in the following example:
public static readonly uint l1 = (uint) DateTime.Now.Ticks; (this can't be
possible with const)
Q 49. What is the difference between ref & out parameters?
Ans :- An argument passed to a ref parameter must first be initialized.

Compare this to an out parameter, whose argument does not have to be
explicitly initialized before being passed to an out parameter.
Q 50. What is the difference between Array and LinkedList?What is

the difference between Array and Arraylist?
Ans :- As elements are added to an ArrayList, the capacity is

automatically increased as required through reallocation. The capacity
can be decreased by calling TrimToSize or by setting the Capacity
property explicitly.
Q 51. What is Jagged Arrays?
Ans :- A jagged array is an array whose elements are arrays. The

elements of a jagged array can be of different dimensions and sizes. A
jagged array is sometimes called an "array-of-arrays."
Q 52. What are indexers?
Ans :- Indexers are similar to properties, except that the get and set
accessors of indexers take parameters, while property accessors do not.
49
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
(COM)
Q 53. What is Interop Services?
Ans :- The common language runtime provides two mechanisms for

interoperating with unmanaged code:
Platform invoke, which enables managed code to call functions exported

from an unmanaged library.
COM interop, which enables managed code to interact with COM objects
through interfaces.
Both platform invoke and COM interop use interop marshaling to
accurately move method arguments between caller and callee and back, if
required.
Q 54. How does u handle this COM components developed in other
programming languages in .NET?
Q 55. What is RCW (Runtime Callable Wrappers)?
Ans :- The common language runtime exposes COM objects through a

proxy called the runtime callable wrapper (RCW). Although the RCW
appears to be an ordinary object to .NET clients, its primary function is to
marshal calls between a .NET client and a COM object.
Q 56. What is CCW (COM Callable Wrapper) ?

Ans :- proxy object generated by the common language runtime so that
existing COM applications can use managed classes, including .NET
Framework classes, transparently.
Q 57. Q 68. How CCW and RCW is working?
**
Q 58. How will you register com+ services?
Ans :- The .NET Framework SDK provides the .NET Framework Services
Installation Tool (Regsvcs.exe - a command-line tool) to manually register
an assembly containing serviced components. You can also access these
50
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
registration features programmatically with the
System.EnterpriseServicesRegistrationHelper class by creating an
instance of class RegistrationHelper and using the method
InstallAssembly
Q 59. What is use of ContextUtil class?
Ans :- ContextUtil is the preferred class to use for obtaining COM+

context information.
Q 60. What is Pinvoke?
Ans :- Platform invoke is a service that enables managed code to call

unmanaged functions implemented in dynamic-link libraries (DLLs), such
as those in the Win32 API. It locates and invokes an exported function
and marshals its arguments (integers, strings, arrays, structures, and so
on) across the interoperation boundary as needed.
Q 61. Is it true that COM objects no longer need to be registered on

the server?
Ans :- Answer: Yes and No. Legacy COM objects still need to be registered
on the server before they can be used. COM developed using the new
.NET Framework will not need to be registered. Developers will be able to
auto-register these objects just by placing them in the 'bin' folder of the
application.
Q 62. Can .NET Framework components use the features of

Component Services?
Ans:- Yes, you can use the features and functions of Component Services
from a .NET Framework component.
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/techart/Pahlcompserv.htm
(OOPS)
Q 63. What are the OOPS concepts?
Ans :- 1) Encapsulation: It is the mechanism that binds together code and

data in manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside interference and
51
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
misuse. In short it isolates a particular code and data from all other codes
and data. A well-defined interface controls the access to that particular
code and data.
2) Inheritance: It is the process by which one object acquires the
properties of another object. This supports the hierarchical classification.
Without the use of hierarchies, each object would need to define all its
characteristics explicitly. However, by use of inheritance, an object need
only define those qualities that make it unique within its class. It can
inherit its general attributes from its parent. A new sub-class inherits all
of the attributes of all of its ancestors.
3) Polymorphism: It is a feature that allows one interface to be used for
general class of actions. The specific action is determined by the exact
nature of the situation. In general polymorphism means "one interface,
multiple methods", This means that it is possible to design a generic
interface to a group of related activities. This helps reduce complexity by
allowing the same interface to be used to specify a general class of action.
It is the compiler's job to select the specific action (that is, method) as it
applies to each situation.
Q 64. What is the difference between a Struct and a Class?
Ans :- The struct type is suitable for representing lightweight objects such
as Point, Rectangle, and Color. Although it is possible to represent a point
as a class, a struct is more efficient in some scenarios. For example, if you
declare an array of 1000 Point objects, you will allocate additional
memory for referencing each object. In this case, the struct is less
expensive.
When you create a struct object using the new operator, it gets created
and the appropriate constructor is called. Unlike classes, structs can be
instantiated without using the new operator. If you do not use new, the
fields will remain unassigned and the object cannot be used until all of
the fields are initialized.
It is an error to declare a default (parameterless) constructor for a struct.

A default constructor is always provided to initialize the struct members
to their default values.
It is an error to initialize an instance field in a struct.
52
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
There is no inheritance for structs as there is for classes. A struct cannot
inherit from another struct or class, and it cannot be the base of a class.
Structs, however, inherit from the base class Object. A struct can
implement interfaces, and it does that exactly as classes do.
A struct is a value type, while a class is a reference type.
Q 65. Value type & reference types difference? Example from .NET.
Integer & struct are value types or reference types in .NET?
Ans: -Most programming languages provide built-in data types, such as

integers and floating-point numbers, that are copied when they are
passed as arguments (that is, they are passed by value). In the .NET
Framework, these are called value types. The runtime supports two kinds
of value types:
Built-in value types

The .NET Framework defines built-in value types, such as System.Int32
and System.Boolean, which correspond and are identical to primitive data
types used by programming languages.
User-defined value types

Your language will provide ways to define your own value types, which
derive from System.ValueType. If you want to define a type representing
a value that is small, such as a complex number (using two floating-point
numbers), you might choose to define it as a value type because you can
pass the value type efficiently by value. If the type you are defining would
be more efficiently passed by reference, you should define it as a class
instead.
Variables of reference types, referred to as objects, store references to the
actual data. This following are the reference types:
class
interface
delegate
This following are the built-in reference types:
object
string
53
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 66. What is Method overloading?
Ans:- Method overloading occurs when a class contains two methods with
the same name, but different signatures.
Q 67. What is Method Overriding? How to override a function in C#?
Ans:- Use the override modifier to modify a method, a property, an

indexer, or an event. An override method provides a new implementation
of a member inherited from a base class. The method overridden by an
override declaration is known as the overridden base method. The
overridden base method must have the same signature as the override
method.
You cannot override a non-virtual or static method. The overridden base
method must be virtual, abstract, or override.
Q 68. Can we call a base class method without creating instance?
Ans :- Its possible If its a static method.

Its possible by inheriting from that class also.
Its possible from derived classes using base keyword.
Q 69. You have one base class virtual function how will call that
function from derived class?
Ans:
class a
{
public virtual int m()
{
return 1;
}
}
class b:a
{
public int j()
{
return m();
}
}
54
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 70. In which cases you use override and new base?
Ans :- Use the new modifier to explicitly hide a member inherited from a
base class. To hide an inherited member, declare it in the derived class
using the same name, and modify it with the new modifier.
C# Language features
Q 71. What are Sealed Classes in C#?
Ans :- The sealed modifier is used to prevent derivation from a class. A

compile-time error occurs if a sealed class is specified as the base class of
another class. (A sealed class cannot also be an abstract class)
Q 72. What is Polymorphism? How does VB.NET/C# achieve

polymorphism?
Ans :- class Token

{
public string Display()
{
//Implementation goes here
return "base";
}
}
class IdentifierToken:Token
{
public new string Display() //What is the use of new
keyword
{
return "derive";
}
}
static void Method(Token t)
{
Console.Write(t.Display());
}
{
55
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
IdentifierToken Variable=new IdentifierToken();
Method(Variable); //Which Class Method is called here
Console.ReadLine();
}
For the above code What is the "new" keyword and Which Class
Method is
called here
A: it will call base class Display method
class Token
{
public virtual string Display()
{
return "base";
}
}
class IdentifierToken:Token
{
public override string Display() //What is the use of new
keyword
{
return "derive";
}
}
static void Method(Token t)
{
Console.Write(t.Display());
}
{
IdentifierToken Variable=new IdentifierToken();
Method(Variable); //Which Class Method is called here
Console.ReadLine();
}
A: Derive
56
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 73. In which Scenario you will go for Interface or Abstract Class?
Ans :- Interfaces, like classes, define a set of properties, methods, and

events. But unlike classes, interfaces do not provide implementation.
They are implemented by classes, and defined as separate entities from
classes. Even though class inheritance allows your classes to inherit
implementation from a base class, it also forces you to make most of your
design decisions when the class is first published.
Abstract classes are useful when creating components because they allow
you specify an invariant level of functionality in some methods, but leave
the implementation of other methods until a specific implementation of
that class is needed. They also version well, because if additional
functionality is needed in derived classes, it can be added to the base class
without breaking code.
Interfaces vs. Abstract Classes
Feature Interface Abstract class
A class
may A class may
Multiple implemen extend only
inheritance t several one abstract
interfaces class.
.
An An abstract
interface class can
cannot provide
Default provide complete code,
implementat any code default code,
ion at all, and/or just
much less stubs that
default have to be
code. overridden.
Static Both instance

final and static
constants constants are
Constants only, can possible. Both
use them static and
without instance
qualificat intialiser code
57
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ion in are also
classes possible to
that compute the
implemen constants.
t the
interface.
On the
other
paw,
these
unqualifi
ed names
pollute
the
namespac
e. You
can use
them and
it is not
obvious
where
they are
coming
from
since the
qualificat
ion is
optional.
An
interface
implemen
A third party
tation
class must be
may be
Third party rewritten to
added to
convenience extend only
any
from the
existing
abstract class.
third
party
class.
58
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Interfaces
are often
used to
describe
the An abstract
periphera class defines
l abilities the core
of a class, identity of its
not its descendants. If
central you defined a
identity, Dog abstract
e.g. an class then
Automobi Damamation
is-a vs -able le class descendants
or can-do might are Dogs, they
implemen are not merely
t the dogable.
Recyclabl Implemented
e interfaces
interface, enumerate the
which general things
could a class can do,
apply to not the things
many a class is.
otherwise
totally
unrelated
objects
59
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
You must use
the abstract
class as-is for
the code base,
with all its
attendant
baggage, good
or bad. The
abstract class
author has
imposed
structure on
you.
Depending on
the cleverness
of the author
of the abstract
class, this may
You can write a new
be good or bad.
replacement module
Another issue
for an interface that
that's
contains not one
important is
stick of code in
what I call
common with the
"heterogeneous
existing
vs.
implementations.
homogeneous."
When you
If
implement the
implementors/
interface, you start
subclasses are
from scratch
homogeneous,
Plug-in without any default
tend towards
implementation.
an abstract
You have to obtain
base class. If
your tools from
they are
other classes;
heterogeneous,
nothing comes with
use an
the interface other
interface.
than a few
(Now all I have
constants. This
to do is come
gives you freedom to
up with a good
implement a
60 definition of
radically different
hetero/homoge
internal design.
neous in this
context.) If the
______________________________________________________________________________
various objects
are all of-a-
kind, and
share a
_________________________________________________
If all the
various If the various
implemen implementatio
tations ns are all of a
share is kind and share
the a common
Homogeneity
method status and
signature behavior,
s, then an usually an
interface abstract class
works works best.
best.
If your
client
code talks
Just like an
only in
interface, if
terms of
your client
an
code talks only
interface,
in terms of an
you can
abstract class,
easily
Maintenance you can easily
change
change the
the
concrete
concrete
implementatio
implemen
n behind it,
tation
using a factory
behind it,
method.
using a
factory
method.
Slow,
requires
extra
Speed indirectio Fast
n to find
the
correspon
ding
61
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
method
in the
actual
class.
Modern
JVMs are
discoveri
ng ways
to reduce
this
speed
penalty.
The You can put

constant shared code
declaratio into an
ns in an abstract class,
interface where you
are all cannot into an
presumed interface. If
public interfaces
static want to share
final, so code, you will
you may have to write
leave that other
part out. bubblegum to
Terseness You can't arrange that.
call any You may use
methods methods to
to compute the
compute initial values
the initial of your
values of constants and
your variables, both
constants instance and
. You static. You
need not must declare
declare all the
individua individual
l methods methods of an
62
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
of an abstract class
interface abstract.
abstract.
They are
all
presumed
so.
If you add
a new
method to
an
interface,
If you add a
you must
new method to
track
an abstract
down all
class, you have
implemen
the option of
tations of
providing a
that
Adding default
interface
functionality implementatio
in the
n of it. Then
universe
all existing
and
code will
provide
continue to
them
work without
with a
change.
concrete
implemen
tation of
that
method.
see the code

interface ICommon
{
int getCommon();
}
interface ICommonImplements1:ICommon
{
}
63
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
interface ICommonImplements2:ICommon
{
}
public class a:ICommonImplements1,ICommonImplements2
{
}
Q 74. How to implement getCommon method in class a? Are you
seeingany problem in the implementation?
Ans: public class a:ICommonImplements1,ICommonImplements2
{
public int getCommon()
{
return 1;
}
}
interface IWeather
{
void display();
}
public class A:IWeather
{
public void display()
{
MessageBox.Show("A");
}
}
public class B:A
{
}
public class C:B,IWeather
{
public void display()
{
MessageBox.Show("C");
}
}
Q 75. When I instantiate C.display(), will it work?
Ans :- interface IPrint
{
string Display();
64
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
interface IWrite
{
string Display();
}
class PrintDoc:IPrint,IWrite
{
//Here is implementation
}
how to implement the Display in the class printDoc (How to resolve the
naming Conflict) A: no naming conflicts
class PrintDoc:IPrint,IWrite
{
public string Display()
{
return "s";
}
}
interface IList
{
int Count { get; set; }
}
interface ICounter
{
void Count(int i);
}
interface IListCounter: IList, ICounter {}
class C
{
void Test(IListCounter x)
{
x.Count(1); // Error
x.Count = 1; // Error
((IList)x).Count = 1; // Ok, invokes IList.Count.set
((ICounter)x).Count(1); // Ok, invokes ICounter.Count
}
}
Q 76. Write one code example for compile time binding and one for
run time binding? What is early/late binding?
65
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:- An object is early bound when it is assigned to a variable declared to
be of a specific object type. Early bound objects allow the compiler to
allocate memory and perform other optimizations before an application
executes.
' Create a variable to hold a new object.
Dim FS As FileStream
' Assign a new object to the variable.
FS = New FileStream("C:\tmp.txt", FileMode.Open)
By contrast, an object is late bound when it is assigned to a variable
declared to be of type Object. Objects of this type can hold references to
any object, but lack many of the advantages of early-bound objects.
Dim xlApp As Object
xlApp = CreateObject("Excel.Application")
(Access specifiers)
Q 77. What are the access-specifiers available in c#?
Ans :- Private, Protected, Public, Internal, Protected Internal.
Q 78. Explain about Protected and protected internal, “internal”

access-specifier?
Ans :- protected - Access is limited to the containing class or types derived

from the containing class.
internal - Access is limited to the current assembly.
protected internal - Access is limited to the current assembly or types
derived from the containing class.
(Constructor / Destructor)
Q 79. Difference between type constructor and instance constructor?

What is static constructor, when it will be fired? And what is its use?
Ans :- (Class constructor method is also known as type constructor or type

initializer)
Instance constructor is executed when a new instance of type is created
and the class constructor is executed after the type is loaded and before
66
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
any one of the type members is accessed. (It will get executed only 1st
time, when we call any static methods/fields in the same class.) Class
constructors are used for static field initialization. Only one class
constructor per type is permitted, and it cannot use the vararg (variable
argument) calling convention.
A static constructor is used to initialize a class. It is called automatically
to initialize the class before the first instance is created or any static
members are referenced.
Q 80. What is Private Constructor? and it’s use? Can you create
instance of a class which has Private Constructor?
Ans :- A: When a class declares only private instance constructors, it is

not possible for classes outside the program to derive from the class or to
directly create instances of it. (Except Nested classes)
Make a constructor private if:
- You want it to be available only to the class itself. For example, you
might have a special constructor used only in the implementation of your
class' Clone method.
- You do not want instances of your component to be created. For example,
you may have a class containing nothing but Shared utility functions, and
no instance data. Creating instances of the class would waste memory.
Q 81. I have 3 overloaded constructors in my class. In order to avoid

making instance of the class do I need to make all constructors to
private?
Ans :- (yes)
Q 82. Overloaded constructor will call default constructor internally?
Ans :- (no)
Q 83. What are virtual destructors? Destructor and finalize?
Ans ;- Generally in C++ the destructor is called when objects gets

destroyed. And one can explicitly call the destructors in C++. And also the
objects are destroyed in reverse order that they are created in. So in C++
you have control over the destructors.
In C# you can never call them, the reason is one cannot destroy an object.
67
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
So who has the control over the destructor (in C#)? it's the .Net
frameworks Garbage Collector (GC). GC destroys the objects only when
necessary. Some situations of necessity are memory is exhausted or user
explicitly calls System.GC.Collect() method.
Points to remember:
1. Destructors are invoked automatically, and cannot be invoked
explicitly.
2. Destructors cannot be overloaded. Thus, a class can have, at most, one
destructor.
3. Destructors are not inherited. Thus, a class has no destructors other
than the one, which may be declared in it.
4. Destructors cannot be used with structs. They are only used with
classes.
5. An instance becomes eligible for destruction when it is no longer
possible for any code to use the instance.
6. Execution of the destructor for the instance may occur at any time after
the instance becomes eligible for destruction.
7. When an instance is destructed, the destructors in its inheritance chain
are called, in order, from most derived to least derived.
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-
us/cpguide/html/cpconfinalizemethodscdestructors.asp
Q 84. What is the difference between Finalize and Dispose (Garbage

collection)?
Ans :- Class instances often encapsulate control over resources that are
not managed by the runtime, such as window handles (HWND), database
connections, and so on. Therefore, you should provide both an explicit and
an implicit way to free those resources. Provide implicit control by
implementing the protected Finalize Method on an object (destructor
syntax in C# and the Managed Extensions for C++). The garbage collector
calls this method at some point after there are no longer any valid
references to the object.
In some cases, you might want to provide programmers using an object
with the ability to explicitly release these external resources before the
garbage collector frees the object. If an external resource is scarce or
expensive, better performance can be achieved if the programmer
explicitly releases resources when they are no longer being used. To
provide explicit control, implement the Dispose method provided by the
IDisposable Interface. The consumer of the object should call this method
68
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
when it is done using the object. Dispose can be called even if other
references to the object are alive.
Note that even when you provide explicit control by way of Dispose, you
should provide implicit cleanup using the Finalize method. Finalize
provides a backup to prevent resources from permanently leaking if the
programmer fails to call Dispose.
Q 85. What is close method? How its different from Finalize &
Dispose?
Q 86. What is boxing & unboxing?
Q 87. What is check/uncheck?
Q 88. What is the use of base keyword? Tell me a practical example

for base keyword’s usage?
Q 89. What are the different .net tools which u used in projects?
Ans : -
Try
{
...
}
catch
{
...//exception occurred here. What'll happen?
}
finally
{
..
}
Ans : It will throw exception.
69
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 90. What will do to avoid prior case?
Ans:-
try
{
try
{
...
}
catch
{
...
//exception occurred here.
}
finally
{
...
}
}
catch
{
...
}
finally
{
...
}
try
{
...
}
catch
{
...
}
finally
{
70
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
..
}
Q 91. Will it go to finally block if there is no exception happened?
Ans: Yes. The finally block is useful for cleaning up any resources
allocated in the try block. Control is always passed to the finally block
regardless of how the try block exits.
Q 92. Is goto statement supported in C#? How about Java?
Ans :- Gotos are supported in C#to the fullest. In Java goto is a reserved
keyword that provides absolutely no functionality.
Q 93. What’s different about switch statements in C#?
Ans : - No fall-throughs allowed. Unlike the C++ switch statement, C#

does not support an explicit fall through from one case label to another. If
you want, you can use goto a switch-case, or goto default.
case 1:
cost += 25;
break;
case 2:
cost += 25;
goto case 1;
(ADO.NET)
Q 94. Advantage of ADO.Net?
Ans :-
ADO.NET Does Not Depend On Continuously Live Connections
Database Interactions Are Performed Using Data Commands
Data Can Be Cached in Datasets
Datasets Are Independent of Data Sources
Data Is Persisted as XML
Schemas Define Data Structures
71
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 95. How would u connect to database using .NET?
Ans :-
SqlConnection nwindConn = new SqlConnection("Data Source=localhost;

Integrated Security=SSPI;" +
"Initial Catalog=northwind");
nwindConn.Open();
Q 96. What are relation objects in dataset and how & where to use
them?
Ans : - In a DataSet that contains multiple DataTable objects, you can use
DataRelation objects to relate one table to another, to navigate through
the tables, and to return child or parent rows from a related table.
Adding a DataRelation to a DataSet adds, by default, a UniqueConstraint
to the parent table and a ForeignKeyConstraint to the child table.
The following code example creates a DataRelation using two DataTable
objects in a DataSet. Each DataTable contains a column named CustID,
which serves as a link between the two DataTable objects. The example
adds a single DataRelation to the Relations collection of the DataSet. The
first argument in the example specifies the name of the DataRelation
being created. The second argument sets the parent DataColumn and the
third argument sets the child DataColumn.
custDS.Relations.Add("CustOrders",
custDS.Tables["Customers"].Columns["CustID"],
custDS.Tables["Orders"].Columns["CustID"]);
OR
private void CreateRelation()

{
// Get the DataColumn objects from two DataTable objects in a DataSet.
DataColumn parentCol;
DataColumn childCol;
// Code to get the DataSet not shown here.
parentCol = DataSet1.Tables["Customers"].Columns["CustID"];
childCol = DataSet1.Tables["Orders"].Columns["CustID"];
// Create DataRelation.
72
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
DataRelation relCustOrder;
relCustOrder = new DataRelation("CustomersOrders", parentCol,
childCol);
// Add the relation to the DataSet.
DataSet1.Relations.Add(relCustOrder);
}
Q 97. Difference between OLEDB Provider and SqlClient ?
Ans :- Ans: SQLClient .NET classes are highly optimized for the .net /
sqlserver combination and achieve optimal results. The SqlClient data
provider is fast. It's faster than the Oracle provider, and faster than
accessing database via the OleDb layer. It's faster because it accesses the
native library (which automatically gives you better performance), and it
was written with lots of help from the SQL Server team.
Q 98. What are the different namespaces used in the project to

connect the database? What data providers available in .net to connect
to database?
Ans :- System.Data.OleDb – classes that make up the .NET Framework

Data Provider for OLE DB-compatible data sources. These classes allow
you to connect to an OLE DB data source, execute commands against the
source, and read the results.
System.Data.SqlClient – classes that make up the .NET Framework Data

Provider for SQL Server, which allows you to connect to SQL Server 7.0,
execute commands, and read results. The System.Data.SqlClient
namespace is similar to the System.Data.OleDb namespace, but is
optimized for access to SQL Server 7.0 and later.
System.Data.Odbc - classes that make up the .NET Framework Data

Provider for ODBC. These classes allow you to access ODBC data source
in the managed space.
System.Data.OracleClient - classes that make up the .NET Framework

Data Provider for Oracle. These classes allow you to access an Oracle data
source in the managed space.
73
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 99. Difference between DataReader and DataAdapter / DataSet
and DataAdapter?
Ans :- You can use the ADO.NET DataReader to retrieve a read-only,

forward-only stream of data from a database. Using the DataReader can
increase application performance and reduce system overhead because
only one row at a time is ever in memory.
After creating an instance of the Command object, you create a
DataReader by calling Command.ExecuteReader to retrieve rows from a
data source, as shown in the following example.
SqlDataReader myReader = myCommand.ExecuteReader();
You use the Read method of the DataReader object to obtain a row from
the results of the query.
while (myReader.Read())
Console.WriteLine("\t{0}\t{1}", myReader.GetInt32(0),
myReader.GetString(1));
myReader.Close();
The DataSet is a memory-resident representation of data that provides a
consistent relational programming model regardless of the data source. It
can be used with multiple and differing data sources, used with XML
data, or used to manage data local to the application. The DataSet
represents a complete set of data including related tables, constraints,
and relationships among the tables. The methods and objects in a
DataSet are consistent with those in the relational database model. The
DataSet can also persist and reload its contents as XML and its schema
as XML Schema definition language (XSD) schema.
The DataAdapter serves as a bridge between a DataSet and a data source
for retrieving and saving data. The DataAdapter provides this bridge by
mapping Fill, which changes the data in the DataSet to match the data in
the data source, and Update, which changes the data in the data source to
match the data in the DataSet. If you are connecting to a Microsoft SQL
Server database, you can increase overall performance by using the
SqlDataAdapter along with its associated SqlCommand and
SqlConnection. For other OLE DB-supported databases, use the
DataAdapter with its associated OleDbCommand and OleDbConnection
objects.
Q 100. Which method do you invoke on the DataAdapter control to

load your generated dataset with data?
Ans :- Fill()
74
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 101. Explain different methods and Properties of DataReader which

you have used in your project?
Ans : -Read
GetString
GetInt32
while (myReader.Read())
Console.WriteLine("\t{0}\t{1}", myReader.GetInt32(0),
myReader.GetString(1));
myReader.Close();
Q 102. What happens when we issue Dataset.ReadXml command?
Ans :-Reads XML schema and data into the DataSet.
Q 103. In how many ways we can retrieve table records count? How to
find the count of records in a dataset?
Ans :- foreach(DataTable thisTable in myDataSet.Tables){

// For each row, print the values of each column.
foreach(DataRow myRow in thisTable.Rows){
Q 104. How to check if a datareader is closed or opened?
Ans :- IsClosed()
Q 105. What happens when u try to update data in a dataset in .NET

while the record is already deleted in SQL SERVER as backend?
OR What is concurrency? How will you avoid concurrency when
dealing with dataset? (One user deleted one row after that another
user through his dataset was trying to update same row. What will
happen? How will you avoid the problem?)
**
Q 106. How do you merge 2 datasets into the third dataset in a simple
manner? OR If you are executing these statements in commandObject.
"Select * from Table1;Select * from Table2” how you will deal result
75
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
set?
**
Q 107. How do you sort a dataset?

**
Q 108. If a dataset contains 100 rows, how to fetch rows between 5

and 15 only?
**
Q 109. Differences between dataset.clone and dataset.copy?
Ans : -Clone - Copies the structure of the DataSet, including all

DataTable schemas, relations, and constraints. Does not copy any data.
Copy - Copies both the structure and data for this DataSet.
Q 110. What is the use of parameter object?

**
Q 111. How to generate XML from a dataset and vice versa?

**
Q 112. What is method to get XML and schema from Dataset?
Ans: getXML () and get Schema ()
Q 113. How do u implement locking concept for dataset?

**
(ASP.NET)
Q 114. Asp.net and asp – differences?
Ans :-
Code Declaration
Code Render Block
Block
Compiled
Request/Response Event Driven
Object Oriented -
Constructors/Destruct
76
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ors, Inheritance,
overloading..
Exception Handling -
Try, Catch, Finally
Down-level Support
Cultures
User Controls
In-built client side
validation
It can span across
servers, It can survive
Session - weren't
server crashes, can
transferable across
work with browsers
servers
that don't support
cookies
its an integral part of
OS under the .net
built on top of the framework. It shares
window & IIS, it was many of the same
always a separate objects that traditional
entity & its applications would
functionality was use, and all .net
limited. objects are available
for asp.net's
consumption.
Garbage Collection
Declare variable with
datatype
In built graphics
support
Cultures
Q 115. How ASP and ASP.NET page works? Explain about asp.net
page life cycle?
**
77
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 116. Order of events in an asp.net page? Control Execution
Lifecycle?
Ans :-
Phase What a Method or event to override
control
needs to
do
Initialize Initialize Init event (OnInit method)
settings
needed
during
the
lifetime
of the
incoming
Web
request.
Load At the LoadViewState method
view end of
state this
phase,
the
ViewStat
e
property
of a
control is
automati
cally
populate
d as
describe
d in
Maintai
ning
State in
a
Control.
78
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
A control
can
override
the
default
impleme
ntation
of the
LoadVie
wState
method
to
customiz
e state
restorati
on.
Process Process LoadPostData method (if
postback incoming IPostBackDataHandler is
data form implemented)
data and
update
propertie
s
accordin
gly.
Load Perform Load event
actions (OnLoad method)
common
to all
requests,
such as
setting
up a
database
query.
At this
point,
server
controls
79
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
in the
tree are
created
and
initialize
d, the
state is
restored,
and form
controls
reflect
client-
side
data.
Send Raise RaisePostDataChangedEvent
postback change method (if
change events in IPostBackDataHandler is
notificatio response implemented)
ns to state
changes
between
the
current
and
previous
postback
s.
Handle Handle RaisePostBackEvent
postback the method(if
events client- IPostBackEventHandler is
side implemented)
event
that
caused
the
postback
and
raise
appropri
80
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ate
events
on the
server.
Prerender Perform PreRender event
any (OnPreRender method)
updates
before
the
output is
rendered
. Any
changes
made to
the state
of the
control
in the
prerende
r phase
can be
saved,
while
changes
made in
the
renderin
g phase
are lost.
Save The SaveViewState method
state ViewStat
e
property
of a
control is
automati
cally
persisted
to a
81
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
string
object
after this
stage.
This
string
object is
sent to
the
client
and back
as a
hidden
variable.
For
improvin
g
efficienc
y, a
control
can
override
the
SaveVie
wState
method
to
modify
the
ViewStat
e
property.
Render Generate Render method
output to
be
rendered
to the
client.
Dispose Perform Dispose method
82
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
any final
cleanup
before
the
control is
torn
down.
Referenc
es to
expensiv
e
resource
s such as
database
connecti
ons must
be
released
in this
phase.
Unload Perform UnLoad event (On UnLoad
any final method)
cleanup
before
the
control is
torn
down.
Control
authors
generall
y
perform
cleanup
in
Dispose
and do
not
handle
83
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
this
event.
Note To override an EventName event, override the OnEventName
method (and call base. OnEventName).
Q 117. What are server controls?
Ans :- ASP.NET server controls are components that run on the server
and encapsulate user-interface and other related functionality. They are
used in ASP.NET pages and in ASP.NET code-behind classes.
Q 118. What is the difference between Web User Control and Web
Custom Control?
Ans :- Web custom controls are compiled components that run on the
server and that encapsulate user-interface and other related functionality
into reusable packages. They can include all the design-time features of
standard ASP.NET server controls, including full support for Visual
Studio design features such as the Properties window, the visual
designer, and the Toolbox.
There are several ways that you can create Web custom controls:
You can compile a control that combines the functionality of two or more
existing controls. For example, if you need a control that encapsulates a
button and a text box, you can create it by compiling the existing controls
together.
If an existing server control almost meets your requirements but lacks

some required features, you can customize the control by deriving from it
and overriding its properties, methods, and events.
If none of the existing Web server controls (or their combinations) meet
your requirements, you can create a custom control by deriving from one
of the base control classes. These classes provide all the basic
84
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
functionality of Web server controls, so you can focus on programming the
features you need.
If none of the existing ASP.NET server controls meet the specific

requirements of your applications, you can create either a Web user
control or a Web custom control that encapsulates the functionality you
need. The main difference between the two controls lies in ease of creation
vs. ease of use at design time.
Web user controls are easy to make, but they can be less convenient to use
in advanced scenarios. You develop Web user controls almost exactly the
same way that you develop Web Forms pages. Like Web Forms, user
controls can be created in the visual designer, they can be written with
code separated from the HTML, and they can handle execution events.
However, because Web user controls are compiled dynamically at run
time they cannot be added to the Toolbox, and they are represented by a
simple placeholder glyph when added to a page. This makes Web user
controls harder to use if you are accustomed to full Visual Studio .NET
design-time support, including the Properties window and Design view
previews. Also, the only way to share the user control between
applications is to put a separate copy in each application, which takes
more maintenance if you make changes to the control.
Web custom controls are compiled code, which makes them easier to use
but more difficult to create; Web custom controls must be authored in
code. Once you have created the control, however, you can add it to the
Toolbox and display it in a visual designer with full Properties window
support and all the other design-time features of ASP.NET server
controls. In addition, you can install a single copy of the Web custom
control in the global assembly cache and share it between applications,
which makes maintenance easier.
Web usercontrols Web custom controls
Easier to create Harder to create
Limited supportfor Full visual design tool
consumers who use a support for consumers
visual design tool
A separate copy of the Only a single copy of the
control is required in each control is required, in the
application global assembly cache
Cannot be added to the Can be added to the Toolbox
Toolbox in Visual Studio in Visual Studio
85
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Good for static layout Good for dynamic layout
(Session/State)
Q 119. Application and Session Events?
Ans :- The ASP.NET page framework provides ways for you to work with
events that can be raised when your application starts or stops or when
an individual user's session starts or stops:
Application events are raised for all requests to an application. For

example, Application_BeginRequest is raised when any Web Forms page
or XML Web service in your application is requested. This event allows
you to initialize resources that will be used for each request to the
application. A corresponding event, Application_EndRequest, provides
you with an opportunity to close or otherwise dispose of resources used for
the request.
Session events are similar to application events (there is a

Session_OnStart and a Session_OnEnd event), but are raised with each
unique session within the application. A session begins when a user
requests a page for the first time from your application and ends either
when your application explicitly closes the session or when the session
times out.
You can create handlers for these types of events in the Global.asax file.
Q 120. Difference between ASP Session and ASP.NET Session?
Ans :- asp.net session supports cookie less session & it can span across
multiple servers
Q 121. What is cookie less session? How it works?
Ans :- By default, ASP.NET will store the session state in the same
process that processes the request, just as ASP does. If cookies are not
available, a session can be tracked by adding a session identifier to the
URL. This can be enabled by setting the following:
86
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
<sessionState cookieless="true" />
http://samples.gotdotnet.com/quickstart/aspplus/doc/stateoverview.aspx
Q 122. How you will handle session when deploying application in

more than a server? Describe session handling in a webfarm, how does
it work and what are the limits?
Ans :- By default, ASP.NET will store the session state in the same
process that processes the request, just as ASP does. Additionally,
ASP.NET can store session data in an external process, which can even
reside on another machine. To enable this feature:
Start the ASP.NET state service, either using the Services snap-in or by
executing "net start aspnet_state" on the command line. The state service
will by default listen on port 42424. To change the port, modify the
registry key for the service:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\aspn
et_state\Parameters\Port
Set the mode attribute of the <sessionState> section to "StateServer".
Configure the stateConnectionString attribute with the values of the

machine on which you started aspnet_state.
The following sample assumes that the state service is running on the
same machine as the Web server ("localhost") and uses the default port
(42424):
<sessionState mode="StateServer"
stateConnectionString="tcpip=localhost:42424" />
Note that if you try the sample above with this setting, you can reset the
Web server (enter iisreset on the command line) and the session state
value will persist.
**
Q 123. What method do you use to explicitly kill a users session?
Ans :- Abandon()
Q 124. What are the different ways you would consider sending data
across pages in ASP (i.e between 1.asp to 2.asp)?
87
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Session
public properties
Q 125. What is State Management in .Net and how many ways are
there to maintain a state in .Net? What is view state?
Ans :- Web pages are recreated each time the page is posted to the server.
In traditional Web programming, this would ordinarily mean that all
information associated with the page and the controls on the page would
be lost with each round trip.
To overcome this inherent limitation of traditional Web programming, the
ASP.NET page framework includes various options to help you preserve
changes — that is, for managing state. The page framework includes a
facility called view state that automatically preserves property values of
the page and all the controls on it between round trips.
However, you will probably also have application-specific values that you
want to preserve. To do so, you can use one of the state management
options.
Client-Based State Management Options:
View State
Hidden Form Fields
Cookies
Query Strings
Server-Based State Management Options
Application State
Session State
Database Support
Q 126. What are the disadvantages of view state / what are the
benefits?
Ans:- Automatic view-state management is a feature of server controls

that enables them to repopulate their property values on a round trip
(without you having to write any code). This feature does impact
performance, however, since a server control's view state is passed to and
from the server in a hidden form field. You should be aware of when view
state helps you and when it hinders your page's performance.
Q 127. When maintaining session through Sql server, what is the

impact of Read and Write operation on Session objects? will
performance degrade?
88
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:-Maintaining state using database technology is a common practice
when storing user-specific information where the information store is
large. Database storage is particularly useful for maintaining long-term
state or state that must be preserved even if the server must be restarted.
**
Q 128. What are the contents of cookie?

**
Q 129. How do you create a permanent cookie?

**
Q 130. What is ViewState? What does the "EnableViewState" property

do? Why would I want it on or off?
**
Q 131. Explain the differences between Server-side and Client-side

code?
Ans :- Server side code will process at server side & it will send the result
to client. Client side code (javascript) will execute only at client side.
Q 132. Can you give an example of what might be best suited to place
in the Application_Start and Session_Start subroutines?
**
Q 133. Which ASP.NET configuration options are supported in the

ASP.NET implementation on the shared web hosting platform?
Ans :- A: Many of the ASP.NET configuration options are not

configurable at the site, application or subdirectory level on the shared
hosting platform. Certain options can affect the security, performance
and stability of the server and, therefore cannot be changed. The
following settings are the only ones that can be changed in your site’s
web.config file (s):
browserCaps
clientTarget
pages
89
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
customErrors
globalization
authorization
authentication
webControls
webServices
us/cpguide/html/cpconaspnetconfiguration.asp
Q 134. Briefly describe the role of global.asax?
Q 135. How can u debug your .net application?
Q 136. How do u deploy your asp.net application?
Q 137. Where do we store our connection string in asp.net application?
Q 138. Various steps taken to optimize a web based application

(caching, stored procedure etc.)
Q 139. How does ASP.NET framework maps client side events to

Server side events.
(Security)
Q 140. Security types in ASP/ASP.NET? Different Authentication
modes?
Q 141. How .Net has implemented security for web applications?
Q 142. How to do Forms authentication in asp.net?
Q 143. Explain authentication levels in .net ?
Q 144. Explain autherization levels in .net ?
Q 145. What is Role-Based security?
90
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- A role is a named set of principals that have the same privileges
with respect to security (such as a teller or a manager). A principal can be
a member of one or more roles. Therefore, applications can use role
membership to determine whether a principal is authorized to perform a
requested action.
**
Q 146. How will you do windows authentication and what is the

namespace? If a user is logged under integrated windows
authentication mode, but he is still not able to logon, what might be
the possible cause for this? In ASP.Net application how do you find
the name of the logged in person under windows authentication?
Q 147. What are the different authentication modes in the .NET

environment?
Ans :- <authentication mode="Windows|Forms|Passport|None">

<forms name="name"
loginUrl="url"
protection="All|None|Encryption|Validation"
timeout="30" path="/" >
requireSSL="true|false"
slidingExpiration="true|false">
<credentials passwordFormat="Clear|SHA1|MD5">
<user name="username" password="password"/>
</credentials>
</forms>
<passport redirectUrl="internal"/>
</authentication>
Attribute Option Description

mode Controls the default
authentication mode
for an application.
91
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Windows Specifies Windows
authentication as
the default
authentication
mode. Use this mode
when using any
form of Microsoft
Internet
Information
Services (IIS)
authentication:
Basic, Digest,
Integrated Windows
authentication
(NTLM/Kerberos),
or certificates.
Forms Specifies ASP.NET
forms-based
authentication as
the default
authentication
mode.
Passport Specifies Microsoft
Passport
authentication as
the default
authentication
mode.
None Specifies no
authentication. Only
anonymous users
are expected or
applications can
handle events to
provide their own
authentication.
Q 148. How do you specify whether your data should be passed as
Query string and Forms (Mainly about POST and GET)?
92
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans : - Through attribute tag of form tag.
Q 149. What is the other method, other than GET and POST, in
ASP.NET?
Q 150. What are validator? Name the Validation controls in asp.net?

How do u disable them? Will the asp.net validators run in server side
or client side? How do you do Client-side validation in .Net? How to
disable validator control by client side JavaScript?
Ans :-A set of server controls included with ASP.NET that test user input
in HTML and Web server controls for programmer-defined requirements.
Validation controls perform input checking in server code. If the user is
working with a browser that supports DHTML, the validation controls
can also perform validation ("EnableClientScript" property set to
true/false) using client script.
The following validation controls are available in asp.net:
RequiredFieldValidator Control, CompareValidator Control,
RangeValidator Control, RegularExpressionValidator Control,
CustomValidator Control, ValidationSummary Control.
Q 151. Which two properties are there on every validation control?
Ans :- ControlToValidate, ErrorMessage
Q 152. How do you use css in asp.net?
Ans: -Within the <HEAD> section of an HTML document that will use
these styles, add a link to this external CSS style sheet that
follows this form:
<LINK REL="STYLESHEET" TYPE="text/css" HREF="MyStyles.css">
MyStyles.css is the name of your external CSS style sheet.
Q 153. How do you implement postback with a text box? What is

postback and usestate?
93
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Make AutoPostBack property to true
Q 154. How can you debug an ASP page, without touching the code?
Q 155. What is SQL injection?
Ans :- An SQL injection attack "injects" or manipulates SQL code by

adding unexpected SQL to a query.
Many web pages take parameters from web user, and make SQL query to
the database. Take for instance when a user login, web page that user
name and password and make SQL query to the database to check if a
user has valid name and password.
Username: ' or 1=1 ---
Password: [Empty]
This would execute the following query against the users table:
select count(*) from users where userName='' or 1=1 --' and userPass=''
Q 156. How can u handle Exceptions in Asp.Net?
Q 157. How can u handle Un Managed Code Exceptions in ASP.Net?
Q 158. Asp.net - How to find last error which occurred?
Ans :- : Server.GetLastError();
[C#]
Exception LastError;
String ErrMessage;
LastError = Server.GetLastError();
if (LastError != null)
ErrMessage = LastError.Message;
else
ErrMessage = "No Errors";
Response.Write("Last Error = " + ErrMessage);
Q 159. How to do Caching in ASP?

A: <%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="None" %>
VaryByParam
Description
value
94
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
One version of page cached
none
(only raw GET)
n versions of page cached
* based on query string and/or
POST body

based on value of v1
v1
variable in query string or
POST body
based on value of v1 and v2
v1;v2
variables in query string or
POST body
<%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="none" %>
<%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="*" %>
<%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="name;age" %>
The OutputCache directive supports several other cache varying options
VaryByHeader - maintain separate cache entry for header string changes

(UserAgent, UserLanguage, etc.)
VaryByControl - for user controls, maintain separate cache entry for

properties of a user control
VaryByCustom - can specify separate cache entries for browser types and
version or provide a custom GetVaryByCustomString method in
HttpApplicationderived class
Q 160. What is the Global ASA(X) File?
Ans:- Any alternative to avoid name collisions other then Namespaces.

A scenario that two namespaces named N1 and N2 are there both having
the same class say A. now in another class i ve written
using N1;using N2;
and i am instantiating class A in this class. Then how will u avoid name
collisions?
Ans: using alias
Eg: using MyAlias = MyCompany.Proj.Nested;
95
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 161. Which is the namespace used to write error message in event
Log File?
Q 162. What are the page level transaction and class level
transaction?
Q 163. What are different transaction options?
Q 164. What is the namespace for encryption?
Q 165. What is the difference between application and cache

variables?
Q 166. What is the difference between control and component?
Q 167. You ve defined one page_load event in aspx page and same
page_load event in code behind how will prog run?
Q 168. Where would you use an IHttpModule, and what are the
limitations of any approach you might take in implementing one?
Ans:- Can you edit data in the Repeater control? Which template must
you provide, in order to display data in a Repeater control? How can you
provide an alternating color scheme in a Repeater control? What property
must you set, and what method must you call in your code, in order to
bind the data from some data source to the Repeater control?
Q 169. What is the use of web.config? Difference between

machine.config and Web.config?
Ans :- ASP.NET configuration files are XML-based text files--each named

web.config--that can appear in any directory on an ASP.NET
Web application server. Each web.config file applies configuration settings
to the directory it is located in and to all
virtual child directories beneath it. Settings in child directories can
optionally override or modify settings specified in
parent directories. The root configuration file--
WinNT\Microsoft.NET\Framework\<version>\config\machine.config--
provides
default configuration settings for the entire machine. ASP.NET configures
IIS to prevent direct browser access to web.config
96
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
files to ensure that their values cannot become public (attempts to access
them will cause ASP.NET to return 403: Access
Forbidden).
At run time ASP.NET uses these web.config configuration files to
hierarchically compute a unique collection of settings for
each incoming URL target request (these settings are calculated only once
and then cached across subsequent requests; ASP.NET
automatically watches for file changes and will invalidate the cache if any
of the configuration files change).
http://samples.gotdotnet.com/quickstart/aspplus/doc/configformat.aspx
Q 170. What is the use of sessionstate tag in the web.config file?
Ans :- Configuring session state: Session state features can be configured

via the <sessionState> section in a web.config file. To double the default
timeout of 20 minutes, you can add the following to the web.config file of
an application:
<sessionState
timeout="40"
/>
Q 171. What are the different modes for the sessionstates in the
web.config file?
Ans :-
Off Indicates that session state is not enabled.
Inproc Indicates that session state is stored
locally.
StateServer Indicates that session state is stored on a
remote server.
SQLServer Indicates that session state is stored on the
SQL Server.
Q 172. What is smart navigation?
Ans :- When a page is requested by an Internet Explorer 5 browser, or

later, smart navigation enhances the user's experience of the page by
performing the following:
eliminating the flash caused by navigation.

97
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
persisting the scroll position when moving from page to page.
persisting element focus between navigations.
retaining only the last page state in the browser's history.

Smart navigation is best used with ASP.NET pages that require frequent
postbacks but with visual content that does not change dramatically on
return. Consider this carefully when deciding whether to set this property
to true.
Set the SmartNavigation attribute to true in the @ Page directive in the
.aspx file. When the page is requested, the dynamically generated class
sets this property.
Q 173. In what order do the events of an ASPX page execute. As a
developer is it important to undertsand these events?
Q 174. How would you get ASP.NET running in Apache web servers -
why would you even do this?
Q 175. What tags do you need to add within the asp:datagrid tags to
bind columns manually
Q 176. What base class do all Web Forms inherit from?
Ans :- System.Web.UI.Page
Q 177. How can we create pie chart in asp.net?
Q 178. Is it possible for me to change my aspx file extension to some

other name?
Ans :-Yes.
Open IIS->Default Website -> Properties
Select HomeDirectory tab
Click on configuration button
Click on add. Enter aspnet_isapi details
(C:\WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v1.0.3705\aspnet_isapi.dll
| GET,HEAD,POST,DEBUG)
Open
machine.config(C:\WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v1.0.3705\C
98
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ONFIG) & add new extension under <httpHandlers> tag
<add verb="*" path="*.santhosh"
type="System.Web.UI.PageHandlerFactory"/>
Q 179. What is AutoEventWireup attribute for ?
(WEBSERVICE & REMOTING)
Q 180. What is a WebService and what is the underlying protocol used

in it?Why Web Services?
Ans :- Web Services are applications delivered as a service on the Web.

Web services allow for programmatic access of business logic over the
Web. Web services typically rely on XML-based protocols, messages, and
interface descriptions for communication and access. Web services are
designed to be used by other programs or applications rather than directly
by end user. Programs invoking a Web service are called clients. SOAP
over HTTP is the most commonly used protocol for invoking Web services.
There are three main uses of Web services.
Application integration Web services within an intranet are commonly

used to integrate business applications running on disparate platforms.
For example, a .NET client running on Windows 2000 can easily invoke a
Java Web service running on a mainframe or Unix machine to retrieve
data from a legacy application.
Business integration Web services allow trading partners to engage in e-

business leveraging the existing Internet infrastructure. Organizations
can send electronic purchase orders to suppliers and receive electronic
invoices. Doing e-business with Web services means a low barrier to entry
because Web services can be added to existing applications running on
any platform without changing legacy code.
Commercial Web services focus on selling content and business services to

clients over the Internet similar to familiar Web pages. Unlike Web
pages, commercial Web services target applications not humans as their
direct users. Continental Airlines exposes flight schedules and status Web
services for travel Web sites and agencies to use in their applications.
99
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Like Web pages, commercial Web services are valuable only if they expose
a valuable service or content. It would be very difficult to get customers to
pay you for using a Web service that creates business charts with the
customers? data. Customers would rather buy a charting component (e.g.
COM or .NET component) and install it on the same machine as their
application. On the other hand, it makes sense to sell real-time weather
information or stock quotes as a Web service. Technology can help you
add value to your services and explore new markets, but ultimately
customers pay for contents and/or business services, not for technology
Q 181. Are Web Services a replacement for other distributed

computing platforms?
Ans:- No. Web Services is just a new way of looking at existing

implementation platforms.
Q 182. In a Webservice, need to display 10 rows from a table. So

DataReader or DataSet is best choice?
Ans:- WebService will support only DataSet.
Q 183. How to generate WebService proxy? What is SOAP, WSDL,

UDDI and the concept behind Web Services? What are various
components of WSDL? What is the use of WSDL.exe utility?
Ans :- SOAP is an XML-based messaging framework specifically designed

for exchanging formatted data across the Internet, for example using
request and reply messages or sending entire documents. SOAP is simple,
easy to use, and completely neutral with respect to operating system,
programming language, or distributed computing platform.
After SOAP became available as a mechanism for exchanging XML
messages among enterprises (or among disparate applications within the
same enterprise), a better way was needed to describe the messages and
how they are exchanged. The Web Services Description Language (WSDL)
is a particular form of an XML Schema, developed by Microsoft and IBM
for the purpose of defining the XML message, operation, and protocol
mapping of a web service accessed using SOAP or other XML protocol.
WSDL defines web services in terms of "endpoints" that operate on XML
messages. The WSDL syntax allows both the messages and the operations
on the messages to be defined abstractly, so they can be mapped to
multiple physical implementations. The current WSDL spec describes
100
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
how to map messages and operations to SOAP 1.1, HTTP GET/POST, and
MIME. WSDL creates web service definitions by mapping a group of
endpoints into a logical sequence of operations on XML messages. The
same XML message can be mapped to multiple operations (or services)
and bound to one or more communications protocols (using "ports").
The Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI) framework
defines a data model (in XML) and SOAP APIs for registration and
searches on business information, including the web services a business
exposes to the Internet. UDDI is an independent consortium of vendors,
founded by Microsoft, IBM, and Ariba, for the purpose of developing an
Internet standard for web service description registration and discovery.
Microsoft, IBM, and Ariba also are hosting the initial deployment of a
UDDI service, which is conceptually patterned after DNS (the Internet
service that translates URLs into TCP addresses). UDDI uses a private
agreement profile of SOAP (i.e. UDDI doesn't use the SOAP serialization
format because it's not well suited to passing complete XML documents
(it's aimed at RPC style interactions). The main idea is that businesses
use the SOAP APIs to register themselves with UDDI, and other
businesses search UDDI when they want to discover a trading partner,
for example someone from whom they wish to procure sheet metal, bolts,
or transistors. The information in UDDI is categorized according to
industry type and geographical location, allowing UDDI consumers to
search through lists of potentially matching businesses to find the specific
one they want to contact. Once a specific business is chosen, another call
to UDDI is made to obtain the specific contact information for that
business. The contact information includes a pointer to the target
business's WSDL or other XML schema file describing the web service
that the target business publishes.
Q 184. How to generate proxy class other than .net app and wsdl tool?
Ans :- To access an XML Web service from a client application, you first
add a Web reference, which is a reference to an XML Web service. When
you create a Web reference, Visual Studio creates an XML Web service
proxy class automatically and adds it to your project. This proxy class
exposes the methods of the XML Web service and handles the
marshalling of appropriate arguments back and forth between the XML
Web service and your application. Visual Studio uses the Web Services
101
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Description Language (WSDL) to create the proxy.
To generate an XML Web service proxy class:
From a command prompt, use Wsdl.exe to create a proxy class, specifying

(at a minimum) the URL to an XML Web service or a service description,
or the path to a saved service description.
Wsdl /language:language /protocol:protocol /namespace:myNameSpace
/out:filename
/username:username /password:password /domain:domain <url or path>
Q 185. What is a proxy in web service? How do I use a proxy server

when invoking a Web service?
Q 186. asynchronous web service means?
Q 187. What are the events fired when web service called?
Q 188. How will do transaction in Web Services?
Q 189. How does SOAP transport happen and what is the role of
HTTP in it? How you can access a webservice using soap?
Q 190. What are the different formatters can be used in both? Why?..
binary/soap?
Q 191. How you will protect / secure a web service?
Ans :- For the most part, things that you do to secure a Web site can be
used to secure a Web Service. If you need to encrypt the data exchange,
you use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or a Virtual Private Network to keep
the bits secure. For authentication, use HTTP Basic or Digest
authentication with Microsoft® Windows® integration to figure out who
the caller is.
these items cannot:
Parse a SOAP request for valid values
Authenticate access at the Web Method level (they can authenticate at

the Web Service level)
Stop reading a request as soon as it is recognized as invalid

102
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
us/cpguide/html/cpcontransactionsupportinaspnetwebservices.asp
Q 192. How will you expose/publish a webservice?
Q 193. What is disco file?
Q 194. What’s the attribute for webservice method? What is the

namespace for creating webservice?
Ans :- [WebMethod]
using System.Web;
using System.Web.Services;
Q 195. What is Remoting?
Ans :- The process of communication between different operating system

processes, regardless of whether they are on the same computer. The
.NET remoting system is an architecture designed to simplify
communication between objects living in different application domains,
whether on the same computer or not, and between different contexts,
whether in the same application domain or not.
Q 196. Difference between web services & remoting?
Ans :-
ASP.NET .NET
Web Services Remoting
Can be
accessed over
Can be any protocol
Protocol accessed only (including
over HTTP TCP, HTTP,
SMTP and so
on)
Web services Provide
State work in a support for
Management stateless both stateful
environment and stateless
103
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
environments
through
Singleton and
SingleCall
objects
Web services
support only
Using binary
the datatypes
communicatio
defined in the
n, .NET
XSD type
Remoting can
Type System system,
provide
limiting the
support for
number of
rich type
objects that
system
can be
serialized.
Web services
support
.NET
interoperabili
remoting
ty across
requires the
platforms,
client be built
Interoperability and are ideal
using .NET,
for
enforcing
heterogeneou
homogenous
s
environment.
environments
.
Can also take
advantage of
IIS for fault
Highly
isolation. If
reliable due
IIS is not
to the fact
used,
Reliability that Web
application
services are
needs to
always hosted
provide
inIIS
plumbing for
ensuring the
reliability of
104
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
the
application.
Provides
extensibility
Very
by allowing
extensible by
us to
allowing us to
intercept the
customize the
SOAP
Extensibility different
messages
components of
during the
the .NET
serialization
remoting
and
framework.
deserializatio
n stages.
Easy-to-
Ease-of- Complex to
create and
Programming program.
deploy.
Though both the .NET Remoting infrastructure and ASP.NET Web
services can enable cross-process communication, each is designed to
benefit a different target audience. ASP.NET Web services provide a
simple programming model and a wide reach. .NET Remoting provides a
more complex programming model and has a much narrower reach.
As explained before, the clear performance advantage provided by
TCPChannel-remoting should make you think about using this channel
whenever you can afford to do so. If you can create direct TCP connections
from your clients to your server and if you need to support only the .NET
platform, you should go for this channel. If you are going to go cross-
platform or you have the requirement of supporting SOAP via HTTP, you
should definitely go for ASP.NET Web services.
Both the .NET remoting and ASP.NET Web services are powerful
technologies that provide a suitable framework for developing distributed
applications. It is important to understand how both technologies work
and then choose the one that is right for your application. For applications
that require interoperability and must function over public networks,
Web services are probably the best bet. For those that require
communications with other .NET components and where performance is a
key priority, .NET Remoting is the best choice. In short, use Web services
when you need to send and receive data from different computing
platforms, use .NET Remoting when sending and receiving data between
105
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.NET applications. In some architectural scenarios, you might also be able
to use.NET Remoting in conjunction with ASP.NET Web services and
take advantage of the best of both worlds.
The Key difference between ASP.NET webservices and .NET Remoting is
how they serialize data into messages and the format they choose for
metadata. ASP.NET uses XML serializer for serializing or Marshalling.
And XSD is used for Metadata. .NET Remoting relies on
System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatter.Binary and
System.Runtime.Serialization.SOAPFormatter and relies on .NET CLR
Runtime assemblies for metadata.
Q 197. Can you pass SOAP messages through remoting?CAO and

SAO.?
Ans :- Client Activated objects are those remote objects whose Lifetime is
directly Controlled by the client. This is in direct contrast to SAO. Where
the server, not the client has complete control over the lifetime of the
objects.
Client activated objects are instantiated on the server as soon as the
client request the object to be created. Unlike as SAO a CAO doesn’t delay
the object creation until the first method is called on the object. (In SAO
the object is instantiated when the client calls the method on the object)
singleton and singlecall.

Singleton types never have more than one instance at any one time. If an
instance exists, all client requests are serviced by that instance.
Single Call types always have one instance per client request. The next
method invocation will be serviced by a different server instance, even if
the previous instance has not yet been recycled by the system.
Q 198. What is Asynchronous Web Services?
Q 199. Web Client class and its methods?
Q 200. Flow of remoting?
Q 201. What is the use of trace utility?

Using the SOAP Trace Utility?
106
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- The Microsoft® Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) Toolkit 2.0
includes a TCP/IP trace utility, MSSOAPT.EXE. You use this trace utility
to view the SOAP messages sent by HTTP between a SOAP client and a
service on the server.
Using the Trace Utility on the Server

To see all of a service's messages received from and sent to all clients,
perform the following steps on the server.
On the server, open the Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file.
In the WSDL file, locate the <soap:address> element that corresponds to

the service and change the location attribute for this element to port
8080. For example, if the location attribute specifies
<http://MyServer/VDir/Service.wsdl> change this attribute to
<http://MyServer:8080/VDir/Service.wsdl>.
Run MSSOAPT.exe.
On the File menu, point to New, and either click Formatted Trace (if you
don't want to see HTTP headers) or click Unformatted Trace (if you do
want to see HTTP headers).
In the Trace Setup dialog box, click OK to accept the default values.
Using the Trace Utility on the Client

To see all messages sent to and received from a service, do the following
steps on the client.
Copy the WSDL file from the server to the client.
Modify location attribute of the <soap:address> element in thelocal copy

of the WSDL document to direct the client to localhost:8080 and make a
note of the current host and port. For example, if the WSDL contains
<http://MyServer/VDir/Service.wsdl>, change it to
<http://localhost:8080/VDir/Service.wsdl> and make note of "MyServer".
On the client, run MSSOPT.exe.
On the File menu, point to New, and either click Formatted Trace (if you
don't want to see HTTP headers) or click Unformatted Trace (if you do
want to see HTTP headers).
107
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
In the Destination host box, enter the host specified in Step 2.
In the Destination port box, enter the port specified in Step 2.
Click OK.
(XML)
Q 202. Explain the concept of data island?
Q 203. How to use XML DOM model on client side using JavaScript.
Q 204. What are the ways to create a tree view control using XML,
XSL & JavaScript?
Q 205. Questions on XPathNavigator, and the other classes in

System.XML Namespace?
Q 206. What is Use of Template in XSL?
Q 207. What is “Well Formed XML” and “Valid XML”
Q 208. How you will do SubString in XSL
Q 209. Can we do sorting in XSL ? how do you deal sorting columns

dynamically in XML?
Q 210. What is “Async” property of XML Means ?
Q 211. What is XPath Query ?
Q 212. Difference Between Element and Node.
Q 213. What is CDATA Section.
Q 214. DOM & SAX parsers explanation and difference
Q 215. What is GetElementbyname method will do?
Q 216. What is selectnode method will give?
Q 217. What is valid xml document? What a well formed xml

document?
108
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 218. What is the Difference between XmlDocument and
XmlDataDocument?
Q 219. Explain what a DiffGram is, and a good use for one?
Ans :- A DiffGram is an XML format that is used to identify current and

original versions of data elements. When sending and retrieving a
DataSet from an XML Web service, the DiffGram format is implicitly
used.
The DataSet uses the DiffGram format to load and persist its contents,
and to serialize its contents for transport across a network connection.
When a DataSet is written as a DiffGram, it populates the DiffGram with
all the necessary information to accurately recreate the contents, though
not the schema, of the DataSet, including column values from both the
Original and Current row versions, row error information, and row order.
DiffGram Format
The DiffGram format is divided into three sections: the current data, the
original (or "before") data, and an errors section, as shown in the following
example.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<diffgr:diffgram
xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"
xmlns:diffgr="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-diffgram-v1"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<DataInstance>
</DataInstance>
<diffgr:before>
</diffgr:before>
<diffgr:errors>
</diffgr:errors>
</diffgr:diffgram>
The DiffGram format consists of the following blocks of data:

<DataInstance>
109
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The name of this element, DataInstance, is used for explanation purposes
in this documentation. A DataInstance element represents a DataSet or a
row of a DataTable. Instead of DataInstance, the element would contain
the name of the DataSet or DataTable. This block of the DiffGram format
contains the current data, whether it has been modified or not. An
element, or row, that has been modified is identified with the
diffgr:hasChanges annotation.
<diffgr:before>
This block of the DiffGram format contains the original version of a row.
Elements in this block are matched to elements in the DataInstance block
using the diffgr:id annotation.
<diffgr:errors>
This block of the DiffGram format contains error information for a
particular row in the DataInstance block. Elements in this block are
matched to elements in the DataInstance block using the diffgr:id
annotation.
Q 220. If I replace my Sqlserver with XML files and how about

handling the same?
Q 221. Write syntax to serialize class using XML Serializer?
(IIS)
Q 222. In which process does IIS runs (was asking about the EXE file)
Ans:- inetinfo.exe is the Microsoft IIS server running, handling ASP.NET

requests among other things. When an ASP.NET request is received
(usually a file with .aspx extension), the ISAPI filter aspnet_isapi.dll
takes care of it by passing the request to the actual worker process
aspnet_wp.exe.
Q 223. Where are the IIS log files stored?
110
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- C:\WINDOWS\system32\Logfiles\W3SVC1
OR
c:\winnt\system32\LogFiles\W3SVC1
Q 224. What are the different IIS authentication modes in IIS 5.0 and
Explain? Difference between basic and digest authentication modes?
Ans:- IIS provides a variety of authentication schemes:
Anonymous (enabled by default)
Basic
Digest
Integrated Windows authentication (enabled by default)
Client Certificate Mapping

Anonymous
Anonymous authentication gives users access to the public areas of your
Web site without prompting them for a user name or password. Although
listed as an authentication scheme, it is not technically performing any
client authentication because the client is not required to supply any
credentials. Instead, IIS provides stored credentials to Windows using a
special user account, IUSR_machinename. By default, IIS controls the
password for this account. Whether or not IIS controls the password
affects the permissions the anonymous user has. When IIS controls the
password, a sub authentication DLL (iissuba.dll) authenticates the user
using a network logon. The function of this DLL is to validate the
password supplied by IIS and to inform Windows that the password is
valid, thereby authenticating the client. However, it does not actually
provide a password to Windows. When IIS does not control the password,
IIS calls the LogonUser() API in Windows and provides the account name,
password and domain name to log on the user using a local logon. After
the logon, IIS caches the security token and impersonates the account. A
local logon makes it possible for the anonymous user to access network
resources, whereas a network logon does not.
Basic Authentication
IIS Basic authentication as an implementation of the basic authentication
scheme found in section 11 of the HTTP 1.0 specification.
As the specification makes clear, this method is, in and of itself, non-
111
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
secure. The reason is that Basic authentication assumes a trusted
connection between client and server. Thus, the username and password
are transmitted in clear text. More specifically, they are transmitted
using Base64 encoding, which is trivially easy to decode. This makes
Basic authentication the wrong choice to use over a public network on its
own.
Basic Authentication is a long-standing standard supported by nearly all
browsers. It also imposes no special requirements on the server side --
users can authenticate against any NT domain, or even against accounts
on the local machine. With SSL to shelter the security credentials while
they are in transmission, you have an authentication solution that is both
highly secure and quite flexible.
Digest Authentication
The Digest authentication option was added in Windows 2000 and IIS 5.0.
Like Basic authentication, this is an implementation of a technique
suggested by Web standards, namely RFC 2069 (superceded by RFC
2617).
Digest authentication also uses a challenge/response model, but it is much
more secure than Basic authentication (when used without SSL). It
achieves this greater security not by encrypting the secret (the password)
before sending it, but rather by following a different design pattern -- one
that does not require the client to transmit the password over the wire at
all.
Instead of sending the password itself, the client transmits a one-way
message digest (a checksum) of the user's password, using (by default) the
MD5 algorithm. The server then fetches the password for that user from a
Windows 2000 Domain Controller, reruns the checksum algorithm on it,
and compares the two digests. If they match, the server knows that the
client knows the correct password, even though the password itself was
never sent. (If you have ever wondered what the default ISAPI filter
"md5filt" that is installed with IIS 5.0 is used for, now you know.
Integrated Windows Authentication
Integrated Windows authentication (formerly known as NTLM
authentication and Windows NT Challenge/Response authentication) can
use either NTLM or Kerberos V5 authentication and only works with
Internet Explorer 2.0 and later.
When Internet Explorer attempts to access a protected resource, IIS
sends two WWW-Authenticate headers, Negotiate and NTLM.
If Internet Explorer recognizes the Negotiate header, it will choose it
because it is listed first. When using Negotiate, the browser will return
112
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
information for both NTLM and Kerberos. At the server, IIS will use
Kerberos if both the client (Internet Explorer 5.0 and later) and server
(IIS 5.0 and later) are running Windows 2000 and later, and both are
members of the same domain or trusted domains. Otherwise, the server
will default to using NTLM.
If Internet Explorer does not understand Negotiate, it will use NTLM.

So, which mechanism is used depends upon a negotiation between
Internet Explorer and IIS.
When used in conjunction with Kerberos v5 authentication, IIS can
delegate security credentials among computers running Windows 2000
and later that are trusted and configured for delegation. Delegation
enables remote access of resources on behalf of the delegated user.
Integrated Windows authentication is the best authentication scheme in
an intranet environment where users have Windows domain accounts,
especially when using Kerberos. Integrated Windows authentication, like
digest authentication, does not pass the user's password across the
network. Instead, a hashed value is exchanged.
Client Certificate Mapping
A certificate is a digitally signed statement that contains information
about an entity and the entity's public key, thus binding these two pieces
of information together. A trusted organization (or entity) called a
Certification Authority (CA) issues a certificate after the CA verifies that
the entity is who it says it is. Certificates can contain different types of
data. For example, an X.509 certificate includes the format of the
certificate, the serial number of the certificate, the algorithm used to sign
the certificate, the name of the CA that issued the certificate, the name
and public key of the entity requesting the certificate, and the CA's
signature. X.509 client certificates simplify authentication for larger user
bases because they do not rely on a centralized account database. You can
verify a certificate simply by examining the certificate.
us/vsent7/html/vxconIISAuthentication.asp
Q 225. How to configure the sites in Web server (IIS)? Advantages in
IIS 6.0?
Ans :-
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/iis/evaluation/features/defa
ult.mspx
113
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
http://www.microsoft.com/technet/treeview/default.asp?url=/technet/prodt
echnol/windowsserver2003/proddocs/datacenter/gs_whatschanged.asp
Q 226. IIS Isolation Levels?
Ans:- Internet Information Server introduced the notion "Isolation Level",

which is also present in IIS4 under a different name. IIS5 supports three
isolation levels, that you can set from the Home Directory tab of the site's
Properties dialog:
Low (IIS Process): ASP pages run in INetInfo.Exe, the main IIS process,
therefore they are executed in-process. This is the fastest setting, and is
the default under IIS4. The problem is that if ASP crashes, IIS crashes as
well and must be restarted (IIS5 has a reliable restart feature that
automatically restarts a server when a fatal error occurs).
Medium (Pooled): In this case ASP runs in a different process, which

makes this setting more reliable: if ASP crashes IIS won't. All the ASP
applications at the Medium isolation level share the same process, so you
can have a web site running with just two processes (IIS and ASP
process). IIS5 is the first Internet Information Server version that
supports this setting, which is also the default setting when you create an
IIS5 application. Note that an ASP application that runs at this level is
run under COM+, so it's hosted in DLLHOST.EXE (and you can see this
executable in the Task Manager).
High (Isolated): Each ASP application runs out-process in its own process
space, therefore if an ASP application crashes, neither IIS nor any other
ASP application will be affected. The downside is that you consume more
memory and resources if the server hosts many ASP applications. Both
IIS4 and IIS5 supports this setting: under IIS4 this process runs inside
MTS.EXE, while under IIS5 it runs inside DLLHOST.EXE.
When selecting an isolation level for your ASP application, keep in mind
that out-process settings - that is, Medium and High - are less efficient
than in-process (Low). However, out-process communication has been
vastly improved under IIS5, and in fact IIS5's Medium isolation level
often deliver better results than IIS4's Low isolation. In practice, you
shouldn't set the Low isolation level for an IIS5 application unless you
really need to serve hundreds pages per second.
114
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Controls
Q 227. How will you do Redo and Undo in a TextControl?
Q 228. How to implement DataGrid in .NET?
Q 229. How would u make a combo-box appear in one column of a

DataGrid?
Q 230. What are the ways to show data grid inside a data grid for a
master details type of tables? If we write any code for DataGrid
methods, what is the access specifier used for that methods in the code
behind file and why?
Q 231. How can we create Tree control in asp.net?
Programming
Q 232. Write a program in C# for checking a given number is PRIME

or not.
Q 233. Write a program to find the angle between the hours and
minutes in a clock
Q 234. Write a C# program to find the Factorial of n
Q 235. How do I upload a file from my ASP.NET page?
Ans :- In order to perform file upload in your ASP.NET page, you will
need to use two classes: the System.Web.UI.HtmlControls.HtmlInputFile
class and the System.Web.HttpPostedFile class. The HtmlInputFile class
represents and HTML input control that the user will use on the client
side to select a file to upload. The HttpPostedFile class represents the
uploaded file and is obtained from the PostedFile property of the
HtmlInputFile class. In order to use the HtmlInputFile control, you need
to add the enctype attribute to your form tag as follows:
<form id="upload" method="post" runat="server"
enctype="multipart/form-data">
115
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Also, remember that the /data directory is the only directory with Write
permissions enabled for the anonymous user. Therefore, you will need to
make sure that the your code uploads the file to the /data directory or one
of its subdirectories.
Below is a simple example of how to upload a file via an ASP.NET page in
C# and VB.NET.
C#
<%@ Import Namespace="System" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.Web" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.Web.UI.HtmlControls" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.IO" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.Drawing" %>
<html>
<head>
<title>upload_cs</title>
</head>
<script language="C#" runat="server">
public void UploadFile(object sender, EventArgs e)
{
if (loFile.PostedFile != null)
{
try
{
string strFileName, strFileNamePath, strFileFolder;
strFileFolder = Context.Server.MapPath(@"data\");
strFileName = loFile.PostedFile.FileName;
strFileName = Path.GetFileName(strFileName);
strFileNamePath = strFileFolder + strFileName;
loFile.PostedFile.SaveAs(strFileNamePath);
lblFileName.Text = strFileName;
lblFileLength.Text = loFile.PostedFile.ContentLength.ToString();
lblFileType.Text = loFile.PostedFile.ContentType;
pnStatus.Visible = true;
}
catch (Exception x)
{
Label lblError = new Label();
lblError.ForeColor = Color.Red;
lblError.Text = "Exception occurred: " + x.Message;
lblError.Visible = true;
116
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
this.Controls.Add(lblError);
}
}
}
</script>
<body>
<form id="upload_cs" method="post" runat="server"
enctype="multipart/form-data">
<P>
<INPUT type="file" id="loFile" runat="server">
</P>
<P>
<asp:Button id="btnUpload" runat="server" Text=" Upload "
OnClick="UploadFile"></asp:Button></P>
<P>
<asp:Panel id="pnStatus" runat="server" Visible="False">
<asp:Label id="lblFileName" Font-Bold="True"
Runat="server"></asp:Label> uploaded<BR>
<asp:Label id="lblFileLength" Runat="server"></asp:Label> bytes<BR>
<asp:Label id="lblFileType" Runat="server"></asp:Label>
</asp:Panel></P>
</form>
</body>
</html>
Q 236. How do I send an email message from my ASP.NET page?
Ans :- You can use the System.Web.Mail.MailMessage and the

System.Web.Mail.SmtpMail class to send email in your ASPX pages.
Below is a simple example of using this class to send mail in C# and
VB.NET. In order to send mail through our mail server, you would want
to make sure to set the static SmtpServer property of the SmtpMail class
to mail-fwd.
C#
<%@ Import Namespace="System" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.Web" %>
<%@ Import Namespace="System.Web.Mail" %>
<HTML>
<HEAD>
117
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
<title>Mail Test</title>
</HEAD>
<script language="C#" runat="server">
private void Page_Load(Object sender, EventArgs e)
{
try
{
MailMessage mailObj = new MailMessage();
mailObj.From = "sales@joeswidgets.com";
mailObj.To = "ringleader@forexample-domain.com";
mailObj.Subject = "Your Widget Order";
mailObj.Body = "Your order was processed.";
mailObj.BodyFormat = MailFormat.Text;
SmtpMail.SmtpServer = "mail-fwd";
SmtpMail.Send(mailObj);
Response.Write("Mail sent successfully");
}
catch (Exception x)
{
Response.Write("Your message was not sent: " + x.Message);
}
}
</script>
<body>
<form id="mail_test" method="post" runat="server">
</form>
</body>
</HTML>
Q 237. Write a program to create a user control with name and

surname as data members and login as method and also the code to
call it. (Hint use event delegates) Practical Example of Passing an
Events to delegates ?
Q 238. How can you read 3rd line from a text file?
Q 239. Can I do things in IL that I can't do in C#?
118
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Yes. A couple of simple examples are that you can throw exceptions
that are not derived from System.Exception, and you can have non-zero-
based arrays.
1. DOT NET
1.1 What is .NET?
Ans :- .NET is a “revolutionary new platform, built on open Internet
protocols and standards, with tools and services that meld computing
and communications in new ways”.
A more practical definition would be that .NET is a new environment
for developing and running software applications, featuring ease of
development of web-based services, rich standard run-time services
available to components written in a variety of programming
languages, and inter-language and inter-machine interoperability.
1.2 Does .NET only apply to people building web-sites?

Ans :- No. If you write any Windows software (using ATL/COM,
MFC, VB, or even raw Win32), .NET may offer a viable alternative
(or addition) to the way you do things currently. Of course, if you do
develop web sites, then .NET has lots to interest you – not least
ASP.NET.
119
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
1.3 What platforms does the .NET Framework run on?
Ans :- The runtime supports Windows XP, Windows 2000, NT4 SP6a
and Windows ME/98. Windows 95 is not supported. Some parts of the
framework do not work on all platforms – for example, ASP.NET is
only supported on Windows XP and Windows 2000. Windows 98/ME
cannot be used for development.
IIS is not supported on Windows XP Home Edition, and so cannot be
used to host ASP.NET. However, the ASP.NET Web Matrix web
server does run on XP Home.
The Mono project is attempting to implement the .NET framework
on Linux.
1.4 What languages does the .NET Framework support?

Asn :- MS provides compilers for C#, C++, VB and Jscript. Other
vendors have announced that they intend to develop .NET compilers
for languages such as COBOL, Eiffel, Perl, Smalltalk and Python.
1.5 Will the .NET Framework go through a !tandardization

process?
Asn :- From http://msdn.microsoft.com/net/ecma/: “On December 13,
2001, the ECMA General Assembly ratified the C# and common
language infrastructure (CLI) specifications into international
standards. The ECMA standards will be known as ECMA-334 (C#)
and ECMA-335 (the CLI).”
2. Basic terminology
2.1 What is the CLR?
Ans:- CLR = Common Language Runtime. The CLR is a set of
standard resources that (in theory) any .NET program can take
advantage of, regardless of programming language.
• Object-oriented programming model (inheritance, polymorphism,
exception handling, garbage collection)
• Security model
• Type system
• All .NET base classes
• Many .NET framework classes
120
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
• Development, debugging, and profiling tools
• Execution and code management
• IL-to-native translators and optimizers
What this means is that in the .NET world, different programming
languages will be more equal in capability than they have ever been
before, although clearly not all languages will support all CLR
services.
2.2 What is the CTS?

Ans :- CTS = Common Type System. This is the range of types that
the .NET runtime understands, and therefore that .NET applications
can use. However note that not all .NET languages will support all
the types in the CTS. The CTS is a superset of the CLS.
2.3 What is the CLS?

Ans :- CLS = Common Language Specification. This is a subset of the
CTS which all .NET languages are expected to support. The idea is
that any program which uses CLS-compliant types can interoperate
with any .NET program written in any language.
In theory this allows very tight interop between different .NET
languages – for example allowing a C# class to inherit from a VB
class.
2.4 What is IL?

Ans:- IL = Intermediate Language. Also known as MSIL (Microsoft
Intermediate Language) or CIL (Common Intermediate Language).
All .NET source code (of any language) is compiled to IL. The IL is
then converted to machine code at the point where the software is
installed, or at run-time by a Just-In-Time (JIT) compiler.
2.5 What is C#?

Ans:- C# is a new language designed by Microsoft to work with the
.NET framework. “C# is a simple, modern, object oriented, and type-
safe programming language derived from C and C++. C# (pronounced
“C sharp”) is firmly planted in the C and C++ family tree of
languages, and will immediately be familiar to C and C++
programmers. C# aims to combine the high productivity of Visual
Basic and the raw power of C++.”
121
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Substitute ‘Java’ for ‘C#’ in the quote above, and you’ll see that the
statement still works pretty well ☺.
2.6 What does ‘managed’ mean in the .NET context?

Ans :- The term ‘managed’ is the cause of much confusion. It is used
in various places within .NET, meaning slightly different things.
Managed code: The .NET framework provides several core run-time
services to the programs that run within it – for example exception
handling and security. For these services to work, the code must
provide a minimum level of information to the runtime. Such code is
called managed code. All C# and Visual Basic.NET code is managed
by default. VS7 C++ code is not managed by default, but the compiler
can produce managed code by specifying a command-line switch
(/com+).
Managed data: This is data that is allocated and de-allocated by the
.NET runtime’s garbage collector. C# and VB.NET data is always
managed. VS7 C++ data is unmanaged by default, even when using
the /com+ switch, but it can be marked as managed using the __gc
keyword.
Managed classes: This is usually referred to in the context of
Managed Extensions (ME) for C++. When using ME C++, a class can
be marked with the __gc keyword. As the name suggests, this means
that the memory for instances of the class is managed by the garbage
collector, but it also means more than that. The class becomes a fully
paid-up member of the .NET community with the benefits and
restrictions that brings. An example of a benefit is proper interop
with classes written in other languages – for example, a managed
C++ class can inherit from a VB class. An example of a restriction is
that a managed class can only inherit from one base class.
2.7 What is reflection?

Ans :- All .NET compilers produce metadata about the types defined
in the modules they produce. This metadata is packaged along with
the module (modules in turn are packaged together in assemblies),
and can be accessed by a mechanism called reflection. The
System.Reflection namespace contains classes that can be used to
interrogate the types for a module/assembly.
ITypeLib/ITypeInfo to access type library data in COM, and it is used
122
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
for similar purposes - e.g. determining data type sizes for marshaling
data across context/process/machine boundaries.
System.Type.InvokeMember), or even create types dynamically at
run-time (see System.Reflection.Emit.TypeBuilder).
3. Assemblies
3.1 What is an assembly?
Ans :- An assembly is sometimes described as a logical .EXE or .DLL,
and can be an application (with a main entry point) or a library. An
assembly consists of one or more files (dlls, exes, html files etc), and
represents a group of resources, type definitions, and
implementations of those types. An assembly may also contain
references to other assemblies. These resources, types and references
are described in a block of data called a manifest. The manifest is
part of the assembly, thus making the assembly self-describing.
An important aspect of assemblies is that they are part of the
identity of a type. The identity of a type is the assembly that houses
it combined with the type name. This means, for example, that if
assembly A exports a type called T, and assembly B exports a type
called T, the .NET runtime sees these as two completely different
types. Furthermore, don’t get confused between assemblies and
namespaces – namespaces are merely a hierarchical way of
!rganize!g type names. To the runtime, type names are type
names, regardless of whether namespaces are used to !rganize the
names. It’s the assembly plus the type name (regardless of whether
the type name belongs to a namespace) that uniquely identifies a
type to the runtime.
Assemblies are also important in .NET with respect to security –
many of the security restrictions are enforced at the assembly
boundary.
Finally, assemblies are the unit of versioning in .NET.
3.2 How can I produce an assembly?

Ans :- The simplest way to produce an assembly is directly from a
.NET compiler. For example, the following C# program:
Public class CTest
{
123
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Public CTest ()
{
System.Console.WriteLine ("Hello from CTest");
}
}
Can be compiled into a library assembly (dll) like this:
csc /t:library ctest.cs
You can then view the contents of the assembly by running the "IL
Disassembler" tool that comes with the .NET SDK.
Alternatively you can compile your source into modules, and then
combine the modules into an assembly using the assembly linker
(al.exe). For the C# compiler, the /target:module switch is used to
generate a module instead of an assembly.
3.3 What is the difference between a private assembly and a shared

assembly?
Ans :- Location and visibility: A private assembly is normally used by
a single application, and is stored in the application’s directory, or a
sub-directory beneath. A shared assembly is normally stored in the
global assembly cache, which is a repository of assemblies
maintained by the .NET runtime. Shared assemblies are usually
libraries of code which many applications will find useful, e.g. the
.NET framework classes.
• Versioning: The runtime enforces versioning constraints only on

shared assemblies, not on private assemblies.
3.4 How do assemblies find each other?

Ans :- By searching directory paths. There are several factors, which
can affect the path (such as the AppDomain host, and application
configuration files), but for private assemblies the search path is
normally the application’s directory and its sub-directories. For
shared assemblies, the search path is normally same as the private
assembly path plus the shared assembly cache.
3.5 How does assembly versioning work?

Ans :- Each assembly has a version number called the compatibility
version. Also each reference to an assembly (from another assembly)
includes both the name and version of the referenced assembly.
124
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The version number has four numeric parts (e.g. 5.5.2.33).
Assemblies with either of the first two parts different are normally
viewed as incompatible. If the first two parts are the same, but the
third is different, the assemblies are deemed as 'maybe compatible'.
If only the fourth part is different, the assemblies are deemed
compatible. However, this is just the default guideline - it is the
version policy that decides to what extent these rules are enforced.
The version policy can be specified via the application configuration
file.
Remember: versioning is only applied to shared assemblies, not
private assemblies.
4. Application Domains
4.1 What is an Application Domain?
Ans :- An AppDomain can be thought of as a lightweight process.
Multiple AppDomains can exist inside a Win32 process. The primary
purpose of the AppDomain is to isolate an application from other
applications.
Win32 processes provide isolation by having distinct memory address
spaces. This is effective, but it is expensive and doesn’t scale well.
The .NET runtime enforces AppDomain isolation by keeping control
over the use of memory – all memory in the AppDomain is managed
by the .NET runtime, so the runtime can ensure that AppDomains do
not access each other’s memory.
4.2 How does an AppDomain get created?

Ans :- AppDomains are usually created by hosts. Examples of hosts
are the Windows Shell, ASP.NET and IE. When you run a .NET
application from the command-line, the host is the Shell. The Shell
creates a new AppDomain for every application.
AppDomains can also be explicitly created by .NET applications.
Here is a C# sample which creates an AppDomain, creates an
instance of an object inside it, and then executes one of the object's
methods. Note that you must name the executable
'appdomaintest.exe' for this code to work as-is.
using System;
125
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
using System.Runtime.Remoting;
public class CAppDomainInfo : MarshalByRefObject

{
public string GetAppDomainInfo()
{
return "AppDomain = " +
AppDomain.CurrentDomain.FriendlyName;
}
public class App

{
public static int Main()
{
AppDomain ad = AppDomain.CreateDomain(
"Andy's new domain", null, null );
ObjectHandle oh = ad.CreateInstance(
"appdomaintest", "CAppDomainInfo" );
CAppDomainInfo adInfo =
(CAppDomainInfo)(oh.Unwrap());
string info = adInfo.GetAppDomainInfo();
Console.WriteLine( "AppDomain info: " + info );

return 0;
}
}
5. Garbage Collection
5.1 What is garbage collection?
Ans :- Garbage collection is a system whereby a run-time component
takes responsibility for managing the lifetime of objects and the heap
memory that they occupy. This concept is not new to .NET – Java
and many other languages/runtimes have used garbage collection for
some time.
126
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5.2 Is it true that objects don’t always get destroyed immediately
when the last reference goes away?
Ans :- Yes. The garbage collector offers no guarantees about the time
when an object will be destroyed and its memory reclaimed.
5.3 Why doesn’t the .NET runtime offer deterministic destruction?

Ans :- Because of the garbage collection algorithm. The .NET garbage
collector works by periodically running through a list of all the
objects that are currently being referenced by an application. All the
objects that it doesn’t find during this search are ready to be
destroyed and the memory reclaimed. The implication of this
algorithm is that the runtime doesn’t get notified immediately when
the final reference on an object goes away – it only finds out during
the next sweep of the heap.
Futhermore, this type of algorithm works best by performing the
garbage collection sweep as rarely as possible. Normally heap
exhaustion is the trigger for a collection sweep.
5.4 Is the lack of deterministic destruction in .NET a problem?

Ans :- It's certainly an issue that affects component design. If you
have objects that maintain expensive or scarce resources (e.g.
database locks), you need to provide some way for the client to tell
the object to release the resource when it is done. Microsoft
recommend that you provide a method called Dispose() for this
purpose. However, this causes problems for distributed objects - in a
distributed system who calls the Dispose() method? Some form of
reference-counting or ownership-management mechanism is needed
to handle distributed objects - unfortunately the runtime offers no
help with this.
5.5 Does non-deterministic destruction affect the usage of COM

objects from managed code?
Ans :- Yes. When using a COM object from managed code, you are
effectively relying on the garbage collector to call the final release on
your object. If your COM object holds onto an expensive resource
which is only cleaned-up after the final release, you may need to
provide a new interface on your object which supports an explicit
Dispose() method.
127
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5.6 I’ve heard that Finalize methods should be avoided. Should I
implement Finalize on my class?
Ans :- An object with a Finalize method is more work for the garbage
collector than an object without one. Also there are no guarantees
about the order in which objects are Finalized, so there are issues
surrounding access to other objects from the Finalize method.
Finally, there is no guarantee that a Finalize method will get called
on an object, so it should never be relied upon to do clean-up of an
object’s resources.
Microsoft recommend the following pattern:
public class CTest : Idisposable
{
public void Dispose()
{
... // Cleanup activities
GC.SuppressFinalize(this);
}
~Ctest() // C# syntax hiding the Finalize() method

{
Dispose();
}
}
In the normal case the client calls Dispose(), the object’s resources
are freed, and the garbage collector is relieved of its Finalizing duties
by the call to SuppressFinalize(). In the worst case, i.e. the client
forgets to call Dispose(), there is a reasonable chance that the object’s
resources will eventually get freed by the garbage collector calling
Finalize(). Given the limitations of the garbage collection algorithm
this seems like a pretty reasonable approach.
5.7 Do I have any control over the garbage collection algorithm?

Ans :- A little. For example, the System.GC class exposes a Collect
method – this forces the garbage collector to collect all unreferenced
objects immediately.
128
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5.8 How can I find out what the garbage collector is doing?
Ans :- Lots of interesting statistics are exported from the .NET
runtime via the '.NET CLR xxx' performance counters. Use
Performance Monitor to view them.
6. Serialization
6.1 What is serialization?
Ans :- Serialization is the process of converting an object into a
stream of bytes. Deserialization is the opposite process of creating an
object from a stream of bytes. Serialization/Deserialization is mostly
used to transport objects (e.g. during remoting), or to persist objects
(e.g. to a file or database).
6.2 Does the .NET Framework have in-built support for

serialization?
Ans :- There are two separate mechanisms provided by the .NET
class library - XmlSerializer and SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter.
Microsoft uses XmlSerializer for Web Services, and uses
SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter for remoting. Both are available for
use in your own code.
6.3 I want to serialize instances of my class. Should I use

XmlSerializer, SoapFormatter or BinaryFormatter?
Ans :- It depends. XmlSerializer has severe limitations such as the
requirement that the target class has a parameterless constructor,
and only public read/write properties and fields can be serialized.
However, on the plus side, XmlSerializer has good support for
customising the XML document that is produced or consumed.
XmlSerializer's features mean that it is most suitable for cross-
platform work, or for constructing objects from existing XML
documents.
SoapFormatter and BinaryFormatter have fewer limitations than
XmlSerializer. They can serialize private fields, for example.
However they both require that the target class be marked with the
[Serializable] attribute, so like XmlSerializer the class needs to be
written with serialization in mind. Also there are some quirks to
watch out for - for example on deserialization the constructor of the
new object is not invoked.
129
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The choice between SoapFormatter and BinaryFormatter depends on
the application. BinaryFormatter makes sense where both
serialization and deserialization will be performed on the .NET
platform and where performance is important. SoapFormatter
generally makes more sense in all other cases, for ease of debugging
if nothing else.
6.4 Can I customise the serialization process?

Ans :- Yes. XmlSerializer supports a range of attributes that can be
used to configure serialization for a particular class. For example, a
field or property can be marked with the [XmlIgnore] attribute to
exclude it from serialization. Another example is the [XmlElement]
attribute, which can be used to specify the XML element name to be
used for a particular property or field.
Serialization via SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter can also be
controlled to some extent by attributes. For example, the
[NonSerialized] attribute is the equivalent of XmlSerializer’s
[XmlIgnore] attribute. Ultimate control of the serialization process
can be !chieved by implementing the the Iserializable interface on
the class whose instances are to be serialized.
6.5 Why is XmlSerializer so slow?

Ans :- There is a once-per-process-per-type overhead with
XmlSerializer. So the first time you serialize or deserialize an object
of a given type in an application, there is a significant delay. This
normally doesn't matter, but it may mean, for example, that
XmlSerializer is a poor choice for loading configuration settings
during startup of a GUI application.
6.6 Why do I get errors when I try to serialize a Hashtable?

Ans :- XmlSerializer will refuse to serialize instances of any class
that implements IDictionary, e.g. Hashtable. SoapFormatter and
BinaryFormatter do not have this restriction.
6.7 XmlSerializer is throwing a generic "There was an error

reflecting MyClass" error. How do I find out what the problem is?
Ans :- Look at the InnerException property of the exception that is
thrown to get a more specific error message.
7. Attributes
130
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
7.1 What are attributes?
Ans :- There are at least two types of .NET attribute. The first type I
will refer to as a metadata attribute – it allows some data to be
attached to a class or method. This data becomes part of the
metadata for the class, and (like other class metadata) can be
accessed via reflection. An example of a metadata attribute is
[serializable], which can be attached to a class and means that
instances of the class can be serialized.
[serializable] public class Ctest {}
The other type of attribute is a context attribute. Context attributes
use a similar syntax to metadata attributes but they are
fundamentally different. Context attributes provide an interception
mechanism whereby instance activation and method calls can be pre-
and/or post-processed.
7.2 Can I create my own metadata attributes?

Ans :- Yes. Simply derive a class from System.Attribute and mark it
with the AttributeUsage attribute. For example:
[AttributeUsage(AttributeTargets.Class)]
public class InspiredByAttribute : System.Attribute
{
public string InspiredBy;
public InspiredByAttribute( string inspiredBy )

{
InspiredBy = inspiredBy;
}
}
[InspiredBy("Andy Mc's brilliant .NET FAQ")]

class CTest
{
}
class CApp
{
{
131
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
object[] atts =
typeof(CTest).GetCustomAttributes(true);
foreach( object att in atts )

if( att is InspiredByAttribute )
Console.WriteLine( "Class CTest
was inspired by {0}", ((InspiredByAttribute)att).InspiredBy );
}
}
8. Code Access Security

8.1 What is Code Access Security (CAS)?
Ans :- CAS is the part of the .NET security model that determines
whether or not a piece of code is allowed to run, and what resources
it can use when it is running. For example, it is CAS that will
prevent a .NET web applet from formatting your hard disk.
8.2 How does CAS work?

Ans :- The CAS security policy revolves around two key concepts –
code groups and permissions. Each .NET assembly is a member of a
particular code group, and each code group is granted the
permissions specified in a named permission set.
For example, using the default security policy, a control downloaded
from a web site belongs to the ‘Zone – Internet’ code group, which
adheres to the permissions defined by the ‘Internet’ named
permission set. (Naturally the ‘Internet’ named permission set
represents a very restrictive range of permissions.)
8.3 Who defines the CAS code groups?

Ans :- Microsoft defines some default ones, but you can modify these
and even create your own. To see the code groups defined on your
system, run 'caspol -lg' from the command-line. On my system it
looks like this:
132
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Level = Machine
Code Groups:

1.6. StrongName -
002400000480000094000000060200000024000052534131000400000
3
000000CFCB3291AA715FE99D40D49040336F9056D7886FED46775
BC7BB5430BA4444FEF8348EBD06
F962F39776AE4DC3B7B04A7FE6F49F25F740423EBF2C0B89698D
8D08AC48D69CED0FC8F83B465E08
07AC11EC1DCC7D054E807A43336DDE408A5393A48556123272CE
EEE72F1660B71927D38561AABF5C
AC1DF1734633C602F8F2D5: Everything
Note the hierarchy of code groups - the top of the hierarchy is the
most general ('All code'), which is then sub-divided into several
groups, each of which in turn can be sub-divided. Also note that
(somewhat counter-intuitively) a sub-group can be associated with a
more permissive permission set than its parent.
8.4 How do I define my own code group?

Ans :- Use caspol. For example, suppose you trust code from
www.mydomain.com and you want it have full access to your system,
but you want to keep the default restrictions for all other internet
sites. To achieve this, you would add a new code group as a sub-group
of the 'Zone - Internet' group, like this:
Now if you run caspol -lg you will see that the new group has been
added as group 1.3.1:
...
...
133
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Note that the numeric label (1.3.1) is just a caspol invention to make
the code groups easy to manipulate from the command-line. The
underlying runtime never sees it.
8.5 How do I change the permission set for a code group?

Ans :- Use caspol. If you are the machine administrator, you can
operate at the ‘machine’ level – which means not only that the
changes you make become the default for the machine, but also that
users cannot change the permissions to be more permissive. If you
are a normal (non-admin) user you can still modify the permissions,
but only to make them more restrictive. For example, to allow
intranet code to do what it likes you might do this:
caspol –cg 1.2 FullTrust
Note that because this is more permissive than the default policy (on
a standard system), you should only do this at the machine level –
doing it at the user level will have no effect.
8.6 Can I create my own permission set?

Ans :- Yes. Use caspol -ap, specifying an XML file containing the
permissions in the permission set. When you have created the
sample, add it to the range of available permission sets like this:
caspol -ap samplepermset.xml
Then, to apply the permission set to a code group, do something like
this:
caspol -cg 1.3 SamplePermSet
(By default, 1.3 is the 'Internet' code group)
8.7 I'm having some trouble with CAS. How can I diagnose my
problem?
Ans :- Caspol has a couple of options that might help. First, you can
ask caspol to tell you what code group an assembly belongs to, using
caspol –rsg. Similarly, you can ask what permissions are being
applied to a particular assembly using caspol –rsp.
8.8 I can’t be bothered with all this CAS stuff. Can I turn it off?
Ans :- Yes, as long as you are an administrator. Just run:
caspol -s off
9. Intermediate Language (IL)

134
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
9.1 Can I look at the IL for an assembly?
Ans :- Yes. MS supply a tool called Ildasm which can be used to view
the metadata and IL for an assembly.
9.2 Can source code be reverse-engineered from IL?

Ans :- Yes, it is often relatively straightforward to regenerate high-
level source (e.g. C#) from IL.
9.3 How can I stop my code being reverse-engineered from IL?

Ans :- There is currently no simple way to stop code being reverse-
engineered from IL. In future it is likely that IL obfuscation tools will
become available, either from MS or from third parties. These tools
work by 'optimising' the IL in such a way that reverse-engineering
becomes much more difficult.
Of course if you are writing web services then reverse-engineering is
not a problem as clients do not have access to your IL.
9.4 Can I write IL programs directly?

Ans :- Yes. Simple example
.assembly MyAssembly {}
.class MyApp {
.method static void Main() {
.entrypoint
ldstr “Hello, IL!”
call void System.Console::WriteLine(class System.Object)
ret
}
}
Just put this into a file called hello.il, and then run ilasm hello.il. An
exe assembly will be generated.
9.5 Can I do things in IL that I can’t do in C#?

Ans :- Yes. A couple of simple examples are that you can throw
exceptions that are not derived from System.Exception, and you can
have non-zero-based arrays.
10. Implications for COM
135
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
10.1 Is COM dead?
Ans :- This subject causes a lot of controversy.
COM is many things, and it's different things to different people. But
to me, COM is fundamentally about how little blobs of code find other
little blobs of code, and how they communicate with each other when
they find each other. COM specifies precisely how this location and
communication takes place. In a 'pure' .NET world, consisting
entirely of .NET objects, little blobs of code still find each other and
talk to each other, but they don't use COM to do so. They use a model
which is similar to COM in some ways - for example, type
information is stored in a tabular form packaged with the
component, which is quite similar to packaging a type library with a
COM component. But it's not COM.
So, does this matter? Well, I don't really care about most of the COM
stuff going away - I don't care that finding components doesn't
involve a trip to the registry, or that I don't use IDL to define my
interfaces. But there is one thing that I wouldn't like to go away - I
wouldn't like to lose the idea of interface-based development. COM's
greatest strength, in my opinion, is its insistence on a cast-iron
separation between interface and implementation. Unfortunately,
the .NET framework seems to make no such insistence - it lets you do
interface-based development, but it doesn't insist. Some people would
argue that having a choice can never be a bad thing, and maybe
they're right, but I can't help feeling that maybe it's a backward step.
10.2 Is DCOM dead?

Ans :- Pretty much, for .NET developers. The .NET Framework has a
new remoting model which is not based on DCOM. Of course DCOM
will still be used in interop scenarios.
10.3 Is MTS/COM+ dead?

Ans :- No. The approach for the first .NET release is to provide access
to the existing COM+ services (through an interop layer) rather than
replace the services with native .NET ones. Various tools and
attributes are provided to try to make this as painless as possible.
The PDC release of the .NET SDK includes interop support for core
services (JIT activation, transactions) but not some of the higher
level services (e.g. COM+ Events, Queued components).
136
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Over time it is expected that interop will become more seamless –
this may mean that some services become a core part of the CLR,
and/or it may mean that some services will be rewritten as managed
code which runs on top of the CLR.
10.4 Can I use COM components from .NET programs?

Ans :- Yes. COM components are accessed from the .NET runtime via
a Runtime Callable Wrapper (RCW). This wrapper turns the COM
interfaces exposed by the COM component into .NET-compatible
interfaces. For oleautomation interfaces, the RCW can be generated
automatically from a type library. For non-oleautomation interfaces,
it may be necessary to develop a custom RCW which manually maps
the types exposed by the COM interface to .NET-compatible types.
When you’ve built the COM component, you should get a typelibrary.
Run the TLBIMP utility on the typelibary, like this:
tlbimp cppcomserver.tlb
If successful, you will get a message like this:
Typelib imported successfully to CPPCOMSERVERLib.dll
You now need a .NET client – let’s use C#. Create a .cs file containing
the following code:
using System;
using CPPCOMSERVERLib;
public class MainApp

{
static public void Main()
{
CppName cppname = new CppName();
cppname.SetName( “bob” );
Console.WriteLine( “Name is “ +
cppname.GetName() );
}
}
Note that we are using the type library name as a namespace, and
the COM class name as the class. Alternatively we could have used
CPPCOMSERVERLib.CppName for the class name and gone
without the using CPPCOMSERVERLib statement.
Compile the C# code like this:
csc /r:cppcomserverlib.dll csharpcomclient.cs
137
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Note that the compiler is being told to reference the DLL we
previously generated from the typelibrary using TLBIMP.
You should now be able to run csharpcomclient.exe, and get the
following output on the console:
Name is bob
10.5 Can I use .NET components from COM programs?

Ans :- Yes. .NET components are accessed from COM via a COM
Callable Wrapper (CCW). This is similar to a RCW (see previous
question), but works in the opposite direction. Again, if the wrapper
cannot be automatically generated by the .NET development tools, or
if the automatic behaviour is not desirable, a custom CCW can be
developed. Also, for COM to ‘see’ the .NET component, the .NET
component must be registered in the registry.
Here’s a simple example. Create a C# file called testcomserver.cs and
put the following in it:
using System;
namespace AndyMc
{
public class CSharpCOMServer
{
public CSharpCOMServer() {}
public void SetName( string name ) { m_name =
name; }
public string GetName() { return m_name; }
private string m_name;
}
}
Then compile the .cs file as follows:
csc /target:library testcomserver.cs
You should get a dll, which you register like this:
regasm testcomserver.dll /tlb:testcomserver.tlb /codebase
Now you need to create a client to test your .NET COM component.
VBScript will do – put the following in a file called comclient.vbs:
Dim dotNetObj
Set dotNetObj = CreateObject(“AndyMc.CSharpCOMServer”)
dotNetObj.SetName (“bob”)
MsgBox “Name is “ & dotNetObj.GetName()
138
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
and run the script like this:
wscript comclient.vbs
And hey presto you should get a message box displayed with the text
“Name is bob”.
10.6 Is ATL redundant in the .NET world?

Ans :- Yes, if you are writing applications that live inside the .NET
framework. Of course many developers may wish to continue using
ATL to write C++ COM components that live outside the framework,
but if you are inside you will almost certainly want to use C#. Raw
C++ (and therefore ATL which is based on it) doesn't have much of a
place in the .NET world - it's just too near the metal and provides too
much flexibility for the runtime to be able to manage it.
11. Miscellaneous
11.1 How does .NET remoting work?
Ans :- .NET remoting involves sending messages along channels.
Two of the standard channels are HTTP and TCP. TCP is intended
for LANs only – HTTP can be used for LANs or WANs (internet).
Support is provided for multiple message serializarion formats.
Examples are SOAP (XML-based) and binary. By default, the HTTP
channel uses SOAP (via the .NET runtime Serialization SOAP
Formatter), and the TCP channel uses binary (via the .NET runtime
Serialization Binary Formatter). But either channel can use either
serialization format.
There are a number of styles of remote access:
• SingleCall. Each incoming request from a client is serviced by a
new object. The object is thrown away when the request has
finished. This (essentially stateless) model can be made stateful
in the ASP.NET environment by using the ASP.NET state service
to store application or session state.
• Singleton. All incoming requests from clients are processed by a

single server object.
139
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
• Client-activated object. This is the old stateful (D)COM model
whereby the client receives a reference to the remote object and
holds that reference (thus keeping the remote object alive) until it
is finished with it.
Distributed garbage collection of objects is managed by a system
called ‘leased based lifetime’. Each object has a lease time, and when
that time expires the object is disconnected from the .NET runtime
remoting infrastructure. Objects have a default renew time – the
lease is renewed when a successful call is made from the client to the
object. The client can also explicitly renew the lease.
11.2 How can I get at the Win32 API from a .NET program?
Ans :- Use P/Invoke. This uses similar technology to COM Interop,
but is used to access static DLL entry points instead of COM objects.
Here is an example of C# calling the Win32 MessageBox function:
using System;
using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
class MainApp
{
[DllImport("user32.dll", EntryPoint="MessageBox",
SetLastError=true, CharSet=CharSet.Auto)]
public static extern int MessageBox(int hWnd, String
strMessage, String strCaption, uint uiType);

{
MessageBox( 0, "Hello, this is PInvoke in
operation!", ".NET", 0 );
}
}
12. Class Library

12.1 File I/O
12.1.1 How do I read from a text file?

Ans:- First, use a System.IO.FileStream object to open the file:
140
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
FileStream fs = new FileStream( @"c:\test.txt", FileMode.Open,
FileAccess.Read );
FileStream inherits from Stream, so you can wrap the FileStream
object with a StreamReader object. This provides a nice interface for
processing the stream line by line:
StreamReader sr = new StreamReader( fs );
string curLine;
while( (curLine = sr.ReadLine()) != null )
Console.WriteLine( curLine );
Finally close the StreamReader object:
sr.Close();
Note that this will automatically call Close() on the underlying
Stream object, so an explicit fs.Close() is not required.
12.1.2 How do I write to a text file?

Ans :- Similar to the read example, except use StreamWriter instead
of StreamReader.
12.1.3 How do I read/write binary files?

Ans :- Similar to text files, except wrap the FileStream object with a
BinaryReader/Writer object instead of a StreamReader/Writer object.
12.1.4 How do I delete a file?

Ans :- Use the static Delete() method on the System.IO.File object:
File.Delete( @”c:\test.txt” );
12.2 Text Processing
12.2.1 Are regular expressions supported?

Ans :- Yes. Use the System.Text.RegularExpressions.Regex class. For
example, the following code updates the title in an HTML file:
FileStream fs = new FileStream( "test.htm", FileMode.Open,
FileAccess.Read );
StreamReader sr = new StreamReader( fs );
Regex r = new Regex( "<TITLE>(.*)</TITLE>" );

string s;
while( (s = sr.ReadLine()) != null )
{
141
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
if( r.IsMatch( s ) )
s = r.Replace( s, "<TITLE>New and improved
${1}</TITLE>" );
Console.WriteLine( s );
}
12.3 Internet
12.3.1 How do I download a web page?

Ans :- First use the System.Net.WebRequestFactory class to acquire
a
WebRequest object:
WebRequest request = WebRequest.Create( “http://localhost” );
Then ask for the response from the request:
WebResponse response = request.GetResponse();
The GetResponse method blocks until the download is complete.
Then you can access the response stream like this:
Stream s = response.GetResponseStream();
// Output the downloaded stream to the console

StreamReader sr = new StreamReader( s );
string line;
while( (line = sr.ReadLine()) != null )
Console.WriteLine( line );
Note that WebRequest and WebReponse objects can be downcast to
HttpWebRequest and HttpWebReponse objects respectively, to access
http-specific functionality.
12.3.2 How do I use a proxy?

Ans :- Two approaches – to affect all web requests do this:
System.Net.GlobalProxySelection.Select = new WebProxy(
“proxyname”, 80 );
Alternatively, to set the proxy for a specific web request, do this:
HttpWebRequest request = (HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create(
“http://localhost” );
request.Proxy = new WebProxy( “proxyname”, 80 );
12.4 XML
142
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
12.4.1 Is DOM supported?
Ans :- Yes. Take this example XML document:
<PEOPLE>
<PERSON>Fred</PERSON>
<PERSON>Bill</PERSON>
</PEOPLE>
This document can be parsed as follows:
XmlDocument doc = new XmlDocument();
doc.Load( “test.xml” );
XmlNode root = doc.DocumentElement;
foreach( XmlNode personElement in root.ChildNodes )

Console.WriteLine(
personElement.FirstChild.Value.ToString() );
The output is:
Fred
Bill
12.4.2 Is SAX supported?

Ans :- No. Instead, a new XmlReader/XmlWriter API is offered. Like
SAX it is stream-based but it uses a ‘pull’ model rather than SAX’s
‘push’ model. Here’s an example:
XmlTextReader reader = new XmlTextReader( “test.xml” );
while( reader.Read() )
{
if( reader.NodeType == XmlNodeType.Element &&
reader.Name == “PERSON” )
{
reader.Read(); // Skip to the child text
Console.WriteLine( reader.Value );
}
}
12.4.3 Is XPath supported?

Ans :- Yes, via the XPathXXX classes:
XPathDocument xpdoc = new XpathDocument(“test.xml”);
XpathNavigator nav = xpdoc.CreateNavigator();
143
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
XpathExpression expr =
nav.Compile(“descendant::PEOPLE/PERSON”);
XpathNodeIterator iterator = nav.Select(expr);

while (iterator.MoveNext())
Console.WriteLine(iterator.Current);
12.5 Threading
12.5.1 Is multi-threading supported?

Ans :- Yes, there is extensive support for multi-threading. New
threads can be spawned, and there is a system-provided threadpool
which applications can use.
12.5.2 How do I spawn a thread?

Ans :- Create an instance of a System.Threading.Thread object,
passing it an instance of a ThreadStart delegate that will be executed
on the new thread. For example:
class MyThread
{
public MyThread( string initData )
{
m_data = initData;
m_thread = new Thread( new
ThreadStart(ThreadMain) );
m_thread.Start();
}
// ThreadMain() is executed on the new thread.

private void ThreadMain()
{
Console.WriteLine( m_data );
}
public void WaitUntilFinished()

{
m_thread.Join();
}
private Thread m_thread;

144
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
private string m_data;
}
In this case creating an instance of the MyThread class is sufficient
to spawn the thread and execute the MyThread.ThreadMain()
method:
MyThread t = new MyThread( "Hello, world." );
t.WaitUntilFinished();
12.5.3 How do I stop a thread?

Ans :- There are several options. First, you can use your own
communication mechanism to tell the ThreadStart method to finish.
Alternatively the Thread class has in-built support for instructing
the thread to stop. The two principle methods are Thread.Interrupt()
and Thread.Abort(). The former will cause a
ThreadInterruptedException to be thrown on the thread when it next
goes into a WaitJoinSleep state. In other words, Thread.Interrupt is
a polite way of asking the thread to stop when it is no longer doing
any useful work. In contrast, Thread.Abort() throws a
ThreadAbortException regardless of what the thread is doing.
Furthermore, the ThreadAbortException cannot normally be caught
(though the ThreadStart’s finally method will be executed).
Thread.Abort() is a heavy-handed mechanism which should not
normally be required.
12.5.4 How do I use the thread pool?

Ans :- By passing an instance of a WaitCallback delegate to the
ThreadPool.QueueUserWorkItem() method:
class Capp
{
static void Main()
{
string s = “Hello, World”;
ThreadPool.QueueUserWorkItem( new
WaitCallback( DoWork ), s );
Thread.Sleep( 1000 ); // Give time for work

item to be executed
}
// DoWork is executed on a thread from the thread pool.

145
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Static void DoWork( object state )
{
Console.WriteLine( state );
}
}
12.5.5 How do I know when my thread pool work item has completed?
Ans :- There is no way to query the thread pool for this information.
You must put code into the WaitCallback method to signal that it has
completed. Events are useful for this.
12.5.6 How do I prevent concurrent access to my data?

Ans :- Each object has a concurrency lock (critical section) associated
with it. The System.Threading.Monitor.Enter/Exit methods are used
to acquire and release this lock. For example, instances of the
following class only allow one thread at a time to enter method f():
class C
{
public void f()
{
try
{
Monitor.Enter(this);
...
}
finally
{
Monitor.Exit(this);
}
}
}
C# has a 'lock' keyword which provides a convenient shorthand for
the code above:
class C
{
public void f()
{
lock(this)
{
...
146
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
}
}
Note that calling Monitor.Enter(myObject) does NOT mean that all
access to myObject is serialized. It means that the synchronisation
lock associated with myObject has been acquired, and no other
thread can acquire that lock until Monitor.Exit(o) is called. In other
words, this class is functionally equivalent to the classes above:
class C
{
public void f()
{
lock( m_object )
{
...
}
}
private m_object = new object();

}
12.6 Tracing
12.6.1 Is there built-in support for tracing/logging?

Ans :- Yes, in the System.Diagnostics namespace. There are two
main classes that deal with tracing – Debug and Trace. They both
work in a similar way – the difference is that tracing from the Debug
class only works in builds that have the DEBUG symbol defined,
whereas tracing from the Trace class only works in builds that have
the TRACE symbol defined. Typically this means that you should use
System.Diagnostics.Trace.WriteLine for tracing that you want to
work in debug and release builds, and
System.Diagnostics.Debug.WriteLine for tracing that you want to
work only in debug builds.
12.6.2 Can I redirect tracing to a file?

Ans :- Yes. The Debug and Trace classes both have a Listeners
property, which is a collection of sinks that receive the tracing that
you send via Debug.WriteLine and Trace.WriteLine respectively. By
147
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
default the Listeners collection contains a single sink, which is an
instance of the DefaultTraceListener class. This sends output to the
Win32 OutputDebugString() function and also the
System.Diagnostics.Debugger.Log() method. This is useful when
debugging, but if you’re trying to trace a problem at a customer site,
redirecting the output to a file is more appropriate. Fortunately, the
TextWriterTraceListener class is provided for this purpose.
Here’s how to use the TextWriterTraceListener class to redirect
Trace output to a file:
Trace.Listeners.Clear();
FileStream fs = new FileStream( @”c:\log.txt”, FileMode.Create,
FileAccess.Write );
Trace.Listeners.Add( new TextWriterTraceListener( fs ) );
Trace.WriteLine( @”This will be !ustomi to c:\log.txt!” );

Trace.Flush();
Note the use of Trace.Listeners.Clear() to remove the default
listener. If you don’t do this, the output will go to the file and
OutputDebugString(). Typically this is not what you want, because
OutputDebugString() imposes a big performance hit.
12.6.3 Can I !ustomize the trace output?

Ans :- Yes. You can write your own TraceListener-derived class, and
direct all output through it. Here's a simple example, which derives
from TextWriterTraceListener (and therefore has in-built support for
writing to files, as shown above) and adds timing information and the
thread ID for each trace line:
class MyListener : TextWriterTraceListener
{
public MyListener( Stream s ) : base(s)
{
}
public override void WriteLine( string s )

{
Writer.WriteLine( "{0:D8} [{1:D4}] {2}",
Environment.TickCount -
m_startTickCount,
AppDomain.GetCurrentThreadId(),
s );
148
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
protected int m_startTickCount = Environment.TickCount;

}
(Note that this implementation is not complete - the
TraceListener.Write method is not overridden for example.)
The beauty of this approach is that when an instance of MyListener
is added to the Trace.Listeners collection, all calls to
Trace.WriteLine() go through MyListener, including calls made by
referenced assemblies that know nothing about the MyListener class.
What platforms support .NET?

Right now the only operating system with a full implementation of .NET (that I
know about, anyway) is Microsoft Windows. The .NET Framework redistributable is
available for Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. The .NET
Framework SDK is available for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
The Mono Project is an ongoing open-source implementation of .NET for Linux and
Windows that is currently still in development. The dotGNU project is another open-
source .NET implementation. The Rotor project is a Microsoft shared source CLI
implementation targeting Windows and FreeBSD.
149
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
C# FAQ’S
1. Introduction
1.1 What is C#?

Ans :- C# is a programming language designed by Microsoft. It is
loosely based on C/C++, and bears a striking similarity to Java in
many ways. Describe C# as follows:
"C# is a simple, modern, object oriented, and type-safe programming
language derived from C and C++. C# (pronounced 'C sharp') is
firmly planted in the C and C++ family tree of languages, and will
immediately be familiar to C and C++ programmers. C# aims to
combine the high productivity of Visual Basic and the raw power of
C++."
2. Basic types
2.1 What standard types does C# supply?

Ans :- C# supports a very similar range of basic types to C++,
including int, long, float, double, char, string, arrays, structs and
classes. However, don't assume too much. The names may be
150
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
familiar, but some of the details are different. For example, a long is
64 bits in C#, whereas in C++ the size of a long depends on the
platform (typically 32 bits on a 32-bit platform, 64 bits on a 64-bit
platform). Also classes and structs are almost the same in C++ - this
is not true for C#.
2.2 Is it true that all C# types derive from a common base class?
Ans :- Yes and no. All types can be treated as if they derive from
object (System.Object), but in order to treat an instance of a value
type (e.g. int, float) as object-derived, the instance must be converted
to a reference type using a process called ‘boxing’. In theory a
developer can forget about this and let the run-time worry about
when the conversion is necessary, but in reality this implicit
conversion can have side-effects that may trip up the unwary.
2.3 So this means I can pass an instance of a value type to a method

that takes an object as a parameter?
Ans :- Yes. For example:
class Capplication
{
{
int x = 25;
string s = “fred”;
DisplayMe( x );
DisplayMe( s );
}
static void DisplayMe( object o )

{
System.Console.WriteLine( “You are {0}”, o );
}
}
This would display:
You are 25
You are fred
151
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
2.4 What are the fundamental differences between value types and
reference types?
Ans :- C# divides types into two categories - value types and
reference types. Most of the basic intrinsic types (e.g. int, char) are
value types. Structs are also value types. Reference types include
classes, interfaces, arrays and strings. The basic idea is
straightforward - an instance of a value type represents the actual
data (stored on the stack), whereas an instance of a reference type
represents a pointer or reference to the data (stored on the heap).
int x1 = 3; // x1 is a value on the stack
int x2 = new int();
x2 = 3; // x2 is also a value on the stack!
2.5 Okay, so an int is a value type, and a class is a reference type.

How can int be derived from object?
It isn't, really. When an int is being used as an int, it is a value (on
the stack). However, when it is being used as an object, it is a
reference to an integer value on the heap. In other words, when you
treat an int as an object, the runtime automatically converts the int
value to an object reference. This process is called boxing. The
conversion involves copying the contents of the int from the stack to
the heap, and creating an object instance which refers to it. Unboxing
is the reverse process - the object is converted back to a stack-based
value.
int x = 3; // new int value 3 on the stack
object objx = x; // new int on heap, set to value 3 - still have x=3 on
stack
int y = (int)objx; // new value 3 on stack, still got x=3 on stack and
objx=3 on heap
3. Classes and structs
3.1 Structs are largely redundant in C++. Why does C# have them?
Ans :- In C++, a struct and a class are pretty much the same thing.
The only difference is the default visibility level (public for structs,
private for classes). However, In C# structs and classes are very
different. In C#, structs are value types (stored on the stack),
whereas classes are reference types (stored on the heap). Also structs
cannot inherit from structs or classes, though they can implement
interfaces. Structs cannot have destructors.
152
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
3.2 Does C# support multiple inheritance (MI)?
Ans :- C# supports multiple inheritance of interfaces, but not of
classes.
3.7 What is a static constructor?

Ans :- A constructor for a class, rather than instances of a class. The
static constructor is called when the class is loaded.
3.8 Are all methods virtual in C#?

No. Methods are non-virtual by default, but can be marked as
virtual.
3.9 How do I declare a pure virtual function in C#?

Ans :- Use the abstract modifier on the method. The class must also
be marked as abstract (naturally). Note that abstract methods
cannot have an implementation.
4. Exceptions
4.1 Can I use exceptions in C#?

Ans :- Yes, in fact exceptions are the recommended error-handling
mechanism in C# (and in .NET in general). Most of the .NET
framework classes use exceptions to signal errors.
4.2 What types of object can I throw as exceptions?

Ans :- Only instances of the System.Exception classes, or classes
derived from System.Exception.
4.3 Can I define my own exceptions?

Ans :- Yes, as long as you follow the rule that exceptions derive from
System.Exception. More specifically, recommend that user-defined
exceptions inherit from System.ApplicationException (which is
derived from System.Exception).
4.5 Does the System.Exception class have any cool features?

Ans :- Yes – the feature which stands out is the StackTrace property.
This provides a call stack which records where the exception was
thrown from. For example, the following code:
using System;
153
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
class Capp
{
{
try
{
f();
}
catch( Exception e )
{
Console.WriteLine( “System.Exception
stack trace = \n{0}”, e.StackTrace );
}
}
static void f()

{
throw new Exception( “f went pear-shaped” );
}
}
produces this output:
System.Exception stack trace =
at Capp.f()
at Capp.Main()
Note, however, that this stack trace was produced from a debug
build. A release build may !ptimize away some of the method calls
which could mean that the call stack isn’t quite what you expect.
4.6 When should I throw an exception?

Ans :- Exceptions should be thrown only when an ‘unexpected’ error
occurs. How do you decide if an error is expected or unexpected? This
is a judgement call, but a straightforward example of an expected
error is failing to read from a file because the seek pointer is at the
end of the file, whereas an example of an unexpected error is failing
to allocate memory from the heap.
4.7 Does C# have a ‘throws’ clause?

Ans :- C# does not require (or even allow) the developer to specify the
exceptions that a method can throw.
154
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5. Run-time type information
5.1 How can I check the type of an object at runtime?

You can use the is keyword. For example:
using System;
class CApp
{
{
string s = "fred";
long i = 10;
Console.WriteLine( "{0} is {1}an integer", s,

(IsInteger(s) ? "" : "not ") );
Console.WriteLine( "{0} is {1}an integer", i,
(IsInteger(i) ? "" : "not ") );
}
static bool IsInteger( object obj )

{
if( obj is int || obj is long )
return true;
else
return false;
}
}
produces the output:
fred is not an integer
10 is an integer
5.2 Can I get the name of a type at runtime?

Ans :- Yes, use the GetType method of the object class (which all
types inherit from). For example:
using System;
class CTest
{
class CApp
155
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
{
{
long i = 10;
CTest ctest = new CTest();
DisplayTypeInfo( ctest );
DisplayTypeInfo( i );
}
static void DisplayTypeInfo( object obj )

{
Console.WriteLine( "Type name = {0}, full
type name = {1}", obj.GetType(), obj.GetType().FullName );
}
}
}
produces the following output:
Type name = CTest, full type name = CTest
Type name = Int64, full type name = System.Int64
6. Advanced language features
6.1 What are delegates?

Ans :- A delegate is a class derived from System.Delegate. However
the language has a special syntax for declaring delegates which
means that they don’t look like classes. A delegate represents a
method with a particular signature. An instance of a delegate
represents a method with a particular signature on a particular
object (or class in the case of a static method). For example:
using System;
delegate void Stereotype();
class Camerican
{
public void BePatriotic()
{
Console.WriteLine( “… <gulp> … God bless
America.”);
}
156
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
class Cbrit
{
public void BeXenophobic()
{
Console.WriteLine( “Bloody foreigners … “ );
}
}
class Capplication
{
public static void RevealYourStereotype( Stereotype[]
stereotypes )
{
foreach( Stereotype s in stereotypes )
s();
}

{
Camerican chuck = new Camerican();
Cbrit !dward = new Cbrit();
// Create our list of sterotypes.

Stereotype[] stereotypes = new Stereotype[2];
stereotypes[0] = new Stereotype( chuck.BePatriotic
);
stereotypes[1] = new Stereotype(
!dward.BeXenophobic );
// Reveal yourselves!
RevealYourStereotype(stereotypes );
}
}
This produces the following result:
… <gulp>… God bless America.
Bloody foreigners …
157
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
6.2 Are delegates just like interfaces with a single method?
Ans :- Conceptually delegates can be used in a similar way to an
interface with a single method. The main practical difference is that
with an interface the method name is fixed, whereas with a delegate
only the signature is fixed - the method name can be different, as
shown in the example above.
7. Miscellaneous
8.1 String comparisons using == seem to be case-sensitive? How do I

do a case-insensitive string comparison?
Ans :- Use the String.Compare function. Its third parameter is a
!oolean which specifies whether case should be ignored or not.
“fred” == “Fred” // false
System.String.Compare( “fred”, “Fred”, true ) // true
8.2 I’ve seen some string literals which use the @ symbol, and some
which don’t. What’s that all about?
Ans :- The @ symbol before a string literal means that escape
sequences are ignored. This is particularly useful for file names, e.g.
string !ilename = “c:\\temp\\test.txt”
versus:
string !ilename = @”c:\temp\test.txt”
8.3 Does C# support a variable number of arguments?

Ans :- Yes, using the params keyword. The arguments are specified
as a list of arguments of a specific type, e.g. int. For ultimate
flexibility, the type can be object. The standard example of a method
which uses this approach is System.Console.WriteLine().
8.4 How can I process command-line arguments?

Ans :- Like this:
158
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
using System;
class Capp
{
public static void Main( string[] args )
{
Console.WriteLine( “You passed the following
arguments:” );
foreach( string arg in args )
Console.WriteLine( arg );
}
}
8.5 Does C# do array bounds checking?

Ans :- Yes. An IndexOutOfRange exception is used to signal an error.
8.6 How can I make sure my C# classes will interoperate with other
.NET languages?
Ans :- Make sure your C# code conforms to the Common Language
Subset (CLS). To help with this, add the
[assembly:CLSCompliant(true)] global attribute to your C# source
files. The compiler will emit an error if you use a C# feature which is
not CLS-compliant.
159
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.NET Windows Forms
Q 1. Write a simple Windows Forms Message Box statement.

Ans: - System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show
("Hello, Windows Forms");

Q 2. Can you write a class without specifying namespace? Which namespace
does it belong to by default??
Ans:- Yes, you can, then the class belongs to global namespace which has no
name. For commercial products, naturally, you wouldn’t want global namespace.
Q 3. You are designing a GUI application with a window and several widgets
on it. The user then resizes the app window and sees a lot of grey space,
while the widgets stay in place. What’s the problem?
Ans :- One should use anchoring for correct resizing. Otherwise the default
property of a widget on a form is top-left, so it stays at the same location when
resized.
Q 4. How can you save the desired properties of Windows Forms application?
Ans :- .config files in .NET are supported through the API to allow storing and
retrieving information. They are nothing more than simple XML files, sort of like
what .ini files were before for Win32 apps.
160
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 5. So how do you retrieve the customized properties of a .NET application
from XML .config file?
Ans: - Initialize an instance of AppSettingsReader class. Call the GetValue

method of AppSettingsReader class, passing in the name of the property and the
type expected. Assign the result to the appropriate variable.
Q 6. Can you automate this process?

Ans :- In Visual Studio yes, use Dynamic Properties for automatic .config
creation, storage and retrieval.
Q 7. My progress bar freezes up and dialog window shows blank, when an

intensive background process takes over?
Ans :- Yes, you should’ve multi-threaded your GUI, with taskbar and main form
being one thread, and the background process being the other
Q 8. What’s the safest way to deploy a Windows Forms app?

Ans:- Web deployment: the user always downloads the latest version of the code;
the program runs within security sandbox, properly written app will not require
additional security privileges.
Q 9. Why is it not a good idea to insert code into InitializeComponent method

when working with Visual Studio?
Ans :- The designer will likely throw it away; most of the code inside
InitializeComponent is auto-generated.
Q 10. What’s the difference between WindowsDefaultLocation and

WindowsDefaultBounds?
Ans:- WindowsDefaultLocation tells the form to start up at a location selected by

OS, but with internally specified size. WindowsDefaultBounds delegates both
size and starting position choices to the OS.
Q 11. What’s the difference between Move and LocationChanged? Resize and
SizeChanged?
161
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:- Both methods do the same, Move and Resize are the names adopted from
VB to ease migration to C#.
Q 12. How would you create a non-rectangular window, let’s say an ellipse?
Ans :- Create a rectangular form, set the TransparencyKey property to the same
value as BackColor, which will effectively make the background of the form
transparent. Then set the FormBorderStyle to FormBorderStyle.None, which
will remove the contour and contents of the form.
Q 13. How do you create a separator in the Menu Designer?

Ans:- A hyphen ‘-’ would do it. Also, an ampersand ‘&\’ would underline the next
letter.
Q 14. How’s anchoring different from docking?

Ans:- Anchoring treats the component as having the absolute size and adjusts
its location relative to the parent form. Docking treats the component location as
absolute and disregards the component size. So if a status bar must always be at
the bottom no matter what, use docking. If a button should be on the top right,
but change its position with the form being resized, use anchoring.
162
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.NET Remoting
Q 1. What’s a Windows process?
Ans :- It’s an application that’s running and had been allocated memory.
Q 2. What’s typical about a Windows process in regards to memory allocation?
Ans :- Each process is allocated its own block of available RAM space, no process
can access another process’ code or data. If the process crashes, it dies alone
without taking the entire OS or a bunch of other applications down.
Q 3. Why do you call it a process? What’s different between process and

application in .NET, not common computer usage, terminology?
Ans :- A process is an instance of a running application. An application is an

executable on the hard drive or network. There can be numerous processes
launched of the same application (5 copies of Word running), but 1 process can
run just 1 application.
Q 4. What distributed process frameworks outside .NET do you know?
Ans:- Distributed Computing Environment/Remote Procedure Calls (DEC/RPC),

Microsoft Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM), Common Object
Request Broker Architecture (CORBA), and Java Remote Method Invocation
(RMI).
Q 5. What are possible implementations of distributed applications in .NET?
163
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- .NET Remoting and ASP.NET Web Services. If we talk about the
Framework Class Library, noteworthy classes are in System.Runtime.Remoting
and System.Web.Services.
Q 6. When would you use .NET Remoting and when Web services?
Ans:- Use remoting for more efficient exchange of information when you control
both ends of the application. Use Web services for open-protocol-based
information exchange when you are just a client or a server with the other end
belonging to someone else.
Q 7. What’s a proxy of the server object in .NET Remoting?
Ans:- It’s a fake copy of the server object that resides on the client side and
behaves as if it was the server. It handles the communication between real
server object and the client object. This process is also known as marshaling.
Q 8. What are remotable objects in .NET Remoting?
Ans :- Remotable objects are the objects that can be marshaled across the
application domains. You can marshal by value, where a deep copy of the object
is created and then passed to the receiver. You can also marshal by reference,
where just a reference to an existing object is passed.
Q 9. What are channels in .NET Remoting?
Ans:- Channels represent the objects that transfer the other serialized objects
from one application domain to another and from one computer to another, as
well as one process to another on the same box. A channel must exist before an
object can be transferred.
Q 10. What security measures exist for .NET Remoting in

System.Runtime.Remoting?
Ans :- None. Security should be taken care of at the application level.

Cryptography and other security techniques can be applied at application or
server level.
Q 11. What is a formatter?
Ans :- A formatter is an object that is responsible for encoding and serializing

data into messages on one end, and deserializing and decoding messages into
data on the other end.
164
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 12. Choosing between HTTP and TCP for protocols and Binary and SOAP
for formatters, what are the trade-offs?
Ans: - Binary over TCP is the most effiecient, SOAP over HTTP is the most
interoperable.
Q 13. What’s SingleCall activation mode used for?
Ans :- If the server object is instantiated for responding to just one single
request, the request should be made in SingleCall mode.
Q 14. What’s Singleton activation mode?
Ans :- A single object is instantiated regardless of the number of clients

accessing it. Lifetime of this object is determined by lifetime lease.
Q 15. How do you define the lease of the object?
Ans:- By implementing ILease interface when writing the class code.
Q 16. Can you configure a .NET Remoting object via XML file?
Ans:- Yes, via machine.config and application level .config file (or web.config in
ASP.NET). Application-level XML settings take precedence over machine.config.
Q 17.How can you automatically generate interface for the remotable object in
.NET with Microsoft tools?
Ans:- Use the Soapsuds tool.
165
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Interview Questions
ASP.NET
Q 1. Describe the role of inetinfo.exe, aspnet_isapi.dll andaspnet_wp.exe in

the page loading process?
Ans :- . inetinfo.exe is theMicrosoft IIS server running, handling ASP.NET

requests among other things.When an ASP.NET request is received (usually a
file with .aspx extension),the ISAPI filter aspnet_isapi.dll takes care of it by
passing the request tothe actual worker process aspnet_wp.exe.
Q 2. What’s the difference between Response.Write()

andResponse.Output.Write()?
Ans :- The latter one allows you to write formattedoutput.
Q 3. What methods are fired during the page load?
Ans :- Init() - when the pageis instantiated, Load() - when the page is loaded
into server memory,PreRender() - the brief moment before the page is
displayed to the user asHTML, Unload() - when page finishes loading.
Q 4. Where does the Web page belong in the .NET Framework class hierarchy?
Ans:- System.Web.UI.Page
Q 5. Where do you store the information about the user’s locale?
Ans :- System.Web.UI.Page.Culture
166
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 6. What’s the difference between Codebehind="MyCode.aspx.cs"
andSrc="MyCode.aspx.cs"?
Ans:- CodeBehind is relevant to Visual Studio.NET only.
Q 7. What’s a bubbled event?
Ans:- When you have a complex control, like DataGrid, writing an event
processing routine for each object (cell, button, row, etc.) is quite tedious. The
controls can bubble up their eventhandlers, allowing the main DataGrid event
handler to take care of its constituents.
Q 8. Suppose you want a certain ASP.NET function executed on MouseOver

overa certain button. Where do you add an event handler?
Ans:- It’s the Attributesproperty, the Add function inside that property. So
btnSubmit.Attributes.Add("onMouseOver","someClientCode();")
Q 9. What data type does the RangeValidator control support?
Ans:- Integer,String and Date.
Q 10. Explain the differences between Server-side and Client-side code?
Ans:- Server-side code runs on the server. Client-side code runs in the clients’
browser.
Q 11. What type of code (server or client) is found in a Code-Behind class?
Ans :- Server-side code.
Q 12. Should validation (did the user enter a real date) occur server-side or
client-side? Why?
Ans:- Client-side. This reduces an additional request to the server to validate

the users input.
Q 13. What does the "EnableViewState" property do? Why would I want it on or
off?
Ans :- It enables the viewstate on the page. It allows the page to save the users
input on a form.
167
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 14. What is the difference between Server.Transfer and Response.Redirect?
Why would I choose one over the other?
Ans :- Server.Transfer is used to post a form to another page. Response.Redirect

is used to redirect the user to another page or site.
Q 15. Can you explain the difference between an ADO.NET Dataset and an
ADO Recordset?
Ans :- A DataSet can represent an entire relational database in memory,

complete with tables, relations, and views.
• A DataSet is designed to work without any continuing connection

to the original data source.
• Data in a DataSet is bulk-loaded, rather than being loaded on

demand.
• There's no concept of cursor types in a DataSet.
• DataSets have no current record pointer You can use For Each
loops to move through the data.
• You can store many edits in a DataSet, and write them to the
original data source in a single operation.
• Though the DataSet is universal, other objects in ADO.NET come

in different versions for different data sources.
Q 16. Can you give an example of what might be best suited to place in the
Application_Start and Session_Start subroutines?
Ans :- This is where you can set the specific variables for the Application and
Session objects.
Q 17. If I’m developing an application that must accommodate multiple security

levels though secure login and my ASP.NET web application is spanned
across three web-servers (using round-robin load balancing) what would be
the best approach to maintain login-in state for the users?
168
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:- Maintain the login state security through a database.
Q 18. Can you explain what inheritance is and an example of when you might
use it?
Ans :- When you want to inherit (use the functionality of) another class. Base
Class Employee. A Manager class could be derived from the Employee base class.
Q 19. Whats an assembly?
Ans :- Assemblies are the building blocks of the .NET framework. Overview of
assemblies from MSDN
Q 20. Describe the difference between inline and code behind?
Ans :- Inline code written along side the html in a page. Code-behind is code
written in a separate file and referenced by the .aspx page.
Q 21. Explain what a diffgram is, and a good use for one?
Ans:- The DiffGram is one of the two XML formats that you can use to render
DataSet object contents to XML. For reading database data to an XML file to be
sent to a Web Service.
Q 22. Whats MSIL, and why should my developers need an appreciation of it if

at all?
Ans:- MSIL is the Microsoft Intermediate Language. All .NET compatible

languages will get converted to MSIL.
Q 23. Which method do you invoke on the DataAdapter control to load your
generated dataset with data?
Ans:- The .Fill() method
Q 24. Can you edit data in the Repeater control?
Ans :- No, it just reads the information from its data source
Q 25. Which template must you provide, in order to display data in a Repeater
control?
169
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- ItemTemplate
Q 26. How can you provide an alternating color scheme in a Repeater control?
Ans:- Use the AlternatingItemTemplate
Q 27. What property must you set, and what method must you call in your code,
in order to bind the data from some data source to the Repeater control?
Ans:- You must set the DataSource property and call the DataBind method.
Ans:- The Page class.
Q 29. Name two properties common in every validation control?
And:- ControlToValidate property and Text property.
Q 30. What tags do you need to add within the asp:datagrid tags to bind
columns manually?
Ans:- Set AutoGenerateColumns Property to false on the datagrid tag
Q 31. What tag do you use to add a hyperlink column to the DataGrid?
Ans :- <asp:HyperLinkColumn>
Q 32. What is the transport protocol you use to call a Web service?
Ans:- SOAP is the preferred protocol.
Q 33. True or False: A Web service can only be written in .NET?
Ans:- False
Q 34. What does WSDL stand for?
Ans:- (Web Services Description Language)
Q 35. Where on the Internet would you look for Web services?
Ans:- (http://www.uddi.org)
170
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 36. Which property on a Combo Box do you set with a column name, prior to
setting the DataSource, to display data in the combo box?
Ans:- DataTextField property
Q 37. Which control would you use if you needed to make sure the values in two
different controls matched?
Ans:- CompareValidator Control
Q 38. True or False: To test a Web service you must create a windows
application or Web application to consume this service?
Ans:- False, the webservice comes with a test page and it provides HTTP-GET
method to test.
Q 39. How many classes can a single .NET DLL contain?
Ans:- It can contain many classes.
171
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ASP.NET ,C#, VB.NET and COM Full of microsoft

Technology
Q 1 .What is view state and use of it?
Ans :- The current property settings of an ASP.NET page and those of any ASP.NET
server controls contained within the page. ASP.NET can detect when a form is
requested for the first time versus when the form is posted (sent to the server),
which allows you to program accordingly.
Q 2. What are user controls and custom controls?
Ans :- Custom controls: A control authored by a user or a third-party software

vendor that does not belong to the .NET Framework class library. This is a generic
term that includes user controls. A custom server control is used in Web Forms
(ASP.NET pages). A custom client control is used in Windows Forms applications.
User Controls: In ASP.NET: A user-authored server control that enables an

ASP.NET page to be re-used as a server control. An ASP.NET user control is
authored declaratively and persisted as a text file with an .ascx extension. The
ASP.NET page framework compiles a user control on the fly to a class that derives
from the System.Web.UI.UserControl class.
Q 3. What are the validation controls?
172
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- A set of server controls included with ASP.NET that test user input in HTML
and Web server controls for programmer-defined requirements. Validation controls
perform input checking in server code. If the user is working with a browser that
supports DHTML, the validation controls can also perform validation using client
script.
Q 4. What's the difference between Response.Write() andResponse.Output.Write()?
Ans :- The latter one allows you to write formattedoutput.
Q 5. What methods are fired during the page load? Init()
Ans :- When the page is instantiated, Load() - when the page is loaded into server
memory,PreRender () - the brief moment before the page is displayed to the user as
HTML, Unload() - when page finishes loading.
Q.5 Where does the Web page belong in the .NET Framework class hierarchy?
Ans :- System.Web.UI.Page
Q 6. Where do you store the information about the user's locale?
Ans :- System.Web.UI.Page.Culture
Q 7. What's the difference between Codebehind="MyCode.aspx.cs" and

Src="MyCode.aspx.cs"?
Ans :- CodeBehind is relevant to Visual Studio.NET only.
Q 8. What's a bubbled event?
Ans :- When you have a complex control, likeDataGrid, writing an event processing
routine for each object (cell, button,row, etc.) is quite tedious. The controls can
bubble up their eventhandlers, allowing the main DataGrid event handler to take
care of its constituents.
Suppose you want a certain ASP.NET function executed on MouseOver over a
173
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
certain button.
Q 9.Where do you add an event handler?
Ans :- It's the Attributesproperty, the Add function inside that property.
e.g. btnSubmit.Attributes.Add("onMouseOver","someClientCode();")
Q 10. What data type does the RangeValidator control support?
Ans :- Integer,String and Date.
Q 11. What are the different types of caching?
Ans :- Caching is a technique widely used in computing to increase performance by

keeping frequently accessed or expensive data in memory. In context of web
application, caching is used to retain the pages or data across HTTP requests and
reuse them without the expense of recreating them.ASP.NET has 3 kinds of caching
strategiesOutput CachingFragment CachingData
CachingOutput Caching: Caches the dynamic output generated by a request. Some

times it is useful to cache the output of a website even for a minute, which will
result in a better performance. For caching the whole page the page should have
OutputCache directive.<%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="state" %>
Fragment Caching: Caches the portion of the page generated by the request. Some
times it is not practical to cache the entire page, in such cases we can cache a portion
of page<%@ OutputCache Duration="120"
VaryByParam="CategoryID;SelectedID"%>
Data Caching: Caches the objects programmatically. For data caching asp.net
provides a cache object for eg: cache["States"] = dsStates;
Q 12. What do you mean by authentication and authorization?
Ans :- Authentication is the process of validating a user on the credentials

(username and password) and authorization performs after authentication. After
Authentication a user will be verified for performing the various tasks, It access is
limited it is known as authorization.
Q 13. What are different types of directives in .NET?
174
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- @Page: Defines page-specific attributes used by the ASP.NET page parser and
compiler. Can be included only in .aspx files <%@ Page AspCompat="TRUE"
language="C#" %>
@Control:Defines control-specific attributes used by the ASP.NET page parser and
compiler. Can be included only in .ascx files. <%@ Control Language="VB"
EnableViewState="false" %>
@Import: Explicitly imports a namespace into a page or user control. The Import
directive cannot have more than one namespace attribute. To import multiple
namespaces, use multiple @Import directives. <% @ Import
Namespace="System.web" %>
@Implements: Indicates that the current page or user control implements the
specified .NET framework interface.<%@ Implements
Interface="System.Web.UI.IPostBackEventHandler" %>
@Register: Associates aliases with namespaces and class names for concise notation
in custom server control syntax.<%@ Register Tagprefix="Acme"
Tagname="AdRotator" Src="AdRotator.ascx" %>
@Assembly: Links an assembly to the current page during compilation, making all
the assembly's classes and interfaces available for use on the page. <%@
Assembly Name="MyAssembly" %><%@ Assembly Src="MySource.vb" %>
@OutputCache: Declaratively controls the output caching policies of an ASP.NET
page or a user control contained in a page<%@ OutputCache
Duration="#ofseconds" Location="Any | Client | Downstream | Server | None"
Shared="True | False" VaryByControl="controlname" VaryByCustom="browser |
customstring" VaryByHeader="headers" VaryByParam="parametername" %>
@Reference: Declaratively indicates that another user control or page source file
should be dynamically compiled and linked against the page in which this
directive is declared.
Q 14. How do I debug an ASP.NET application that wasn't written with Visual
Studio.NET and that doesn't use code-behind?
Ans :- Start the DbgClr debugger that comes with the .NET Framework SDK, open
the file containing the code you want to debug, and set your breakpoints. Start
the ASP.NET application. Go back to DbgClr, choose Debug Processes from the Tools
menu, and select aspnet_wp.exe from the list of processes. (If aspnet_wp.exe
doesn't appear in the list,check the "Show system processes" box.) Click the
Attach button to attach to aspnet_wp.exe and begin debugging.
Be sure to enable debugging in the ASPX file before debugging it with DbgClr. You
can enable tell ASP.NET to build debug executables by placing a
175
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
<%@ Page Debug="true" %> statement at the top of an ASPX file or a
<COMPILATION debug="true" />statement in a Web.config file.
Q 15. Can a user browsing my Web site read my Web.config or Global.asax files?
Ans :- No. The <HTTPHANDLERS>section of Machine.config, which holds the

master configuration settings for ASP.NET, contains entries that map ASAX files,
CONFIG files, and selected other file types to an HTTP handler named
HttpForbiddenHandler, which fails attempts to retrieve the associated file. You can
modify it by editing Machine.config or including an section in a local Web.config file.
Q 16. What's the difference between Page.RegisterClientScriptBlock and

Page.RegisterStartupScript?
Ans :- RegisterClientScriptBlock is for returning blocks of client-side script

containing functions. RegisterStartupScript is for returning blocks of client-script
not packaged in functions-in other words, code that's to execute when the page is
loaded. The latter positions script blocks near the end of the document so elements
on the page that the script interacts are loaded before the script runs.<%@ Reference
Control="MyControl.ascx" %>
Q 17. Is it necessary to lock application state before accessing it?
Ans:- Only if you're performing a multistep update and want the update to be
treated as an atomic operation. Here's an example:
Application.Lock ();
Application["ItemsSold"] = (int) Application["ItemsSold"] + 1;
Application["ItemsLeft"] = (int) Application["ItemsLeft"] - 1;
Application.UnLock ();
By locking application state before updating it and unlocking it afterwards, you
ensure that another request being processed on another thread doesn't read
application state at exactly the wrong time and see an inconsistent view of it. If I
update session state, should I lock it, too? Are concurrent accesses by multiple
requests executing on multiple threads a concern with session state?
Concurrent accesses aren't an issue with session state, for two reasons. One, it's
unlikely that two requests from the same user will overlap. Two, if they do overlap,
ASP.NET locks down session state during request processing so that two threads
can't touch it at once. Session state is locked down when the HttpApplication
176
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
instance that's processing the request fires an AcquireRequestState event and
unlocked when it fires a ReleaseRequestState event.
Do ASP.NET forms authentication cookies provide any protection against replay

attacks? Do they, for example, include the client's IP address or anything else that
would distinguish the real client from an attacker?
No. If an authentication cookie is stolen, it can be used by an attacker. It's up to you
to prevent this from happening by using an encrypted communications channel
(HTTPS). Authentication cookies issued as session cookies, do, however,include a
time-out valid that limits their lifetime. So a stolen session cookie can only be
used in replay attacks as long as the ticket inside the cookie is valid. The default
time-out interval is 30 minutes.You can change that by modifying the timeout
attribute accompanying the <forms> element in Machine.config or a local Web.config
file. Persistent authentication cookies do not time-out and therefore are a more
serious security threat if stolen.
Q 18. How do I send e-mail from an ASP.NET application?
Ans :-
MailMessage message = new MailMessage ();
message.From = <email>;
message.To = <email>;
message.Subject = "Scheduled Power Outage";
message.Body = "Our servers will be down tonight.";
SmtpMail.SmtpServer = "localhost";
SmtpMail.Send (message);
MailMessage and SmtpMail are classes defined in the .NET Framework Class
Library's System.Web.Mail namespace. Due to a security change made to ASP.NET
just before it shipped, you need to set SmtpMail's SmtpServer property to
"localhost" even though "localhost" is the default. In addition, you must use the IIS
configuration applet to enable localhost (127.0.0.1) to relay messages through the
local SMTP service.
Q 19. What are VSDISCO files?
Ans :- VSDISCO files are DISCO files that support dynamic discovery of Web
services. If you place the following VSDISCO file in a directory on your Web server,
for example, it returns references to all ASMX and DISCO files in the host
directory and any subdirectories not noted in <exclude> elements:
177
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<dynamicDiscovery
xmlns="urn:schemas-dynamicdiscovery:disco.2000-03-17">
<exclude path="_vti_cnf" />
<exclude path="_vti_pvt" />
<exclude path="_vti_log" />
<exclude path="_vti_script" />
<exclude path="_vti_txt" />
</dynamicDiscovery>
Q 20. How does dynamic discovery work?
Ans :- ASP.NET maps the file name extension VSDISCO to an HTTP handler that
scans the host directory and subdirectories for ASMX and DISCO files and returns
a dynamically generated DISCO document. A client who requests a VSDISCO file
gets back what appears to be a static DISCO document.
Note that VSDISCO files are disabled in the release version of ASP.NET. You can
reenable them by uncommenting the line in the <httpHandlers> section of
Machine.config that maps *.vsdisco to
System.Web.Services.Discovery.DiscoveryRequestHandler and granting the
ASPNET user account permission to read the IIS metabase. However, Microsoft is
actively discouraging the use of VSDISCO files because they could represent a
threat to Web server security.
Q 21. Is it possible to prevent a browser from caching an ASPX page?
Ans :- Just call SetNoStore on the HttpCachePolicy object exposed through the
Response object's Cache property, as demonstrated here:
<%@ Page Language="C#" %>

<html>
<body>
<%
Response.Cache.SetNoStore ();
Response.Write (DateTime.Now.ToLongTimeString ());
%>
</body>
</html>
178
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
SetNoStore works by returning a Cache-Control: private, no-store header in the
HTTP response. In this example, it prevents caching of a Web page that shows the
current time.
Q 22. What does AspCompat="true" mean and when should I use it?
Ans :- AspCompat is an aid in migrating ASP pages to ASPX pages. It defaults to

false but should be set to true in any ASPX file that creates apartment-threaded
COM objects--that is, COM objects registered ThreadingModel=Apartment. That
includes all COM objects written with Visual Basic 6.0. AspCompat should also be
set to true (regardless of threading model) if the page creates COM objects that
access intrinsic ASP objects such as Request and Response. The following directive
sets AspCompat to true:
<%@ Page AspCompat="true" %>
Setting AspCompat to true does two things. First, it makes intrinsic ASP objects
available to the COM components by placing unmanaged wrappers around the
equivalent ASP.NET objects. Second, it improves the performance of calls that the
page places to apartment- threaded COM objects by ensuring that the page
(actually, the thread that processes the request for the page) and the COM objects it
creates share an apartment. AspCompat="true" forces ASP.NET request threads
into single-threaded apartments (STAs). If those threads create COM objects
marked ThreadingModel=Apartment, then the objects are created in the same STAs
as the threads that created them. Without AspCompat="true," request threads run
in a multithreaded apartment (MTA) and each call to an STA-based COM object
incurs a performance hit when it's marshaled across apartment boundaries.
Do not set AspCompat to true if your page uses no COM objects or if it uses COM
objects that don't access ASP intrinsic objects and that are registered
ThreadingModel=Free or ThreadingModel=Both.
Ans :- Server side scripting means that all the script will be executed by the server
and interpreted as needed. ASP doesn't have some of the functionality like sockets,
uploading, etc. For these you have to make a custom components usually in VB or
VC++. Client side scripting means that the script will be executed immediately in
the browser such as form field validation, clock, email validation, etc. Client side
scripting is usually done in VBScript or JavaScript. Download time, browser
179
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
compatibility, and visible code - since JavaScript and VBScript code is included in
the HTML page, then anyone can see the code by viewing the page source. Also a
possible security hazards for the client computer.
Ans :- C#
Q 25. Should validation (did the user enter a real date) occur server-side or client-
side? Why?
Ans :- Client-side validation because there is no need to request a server side date
when you could obtain a date from the client machine.
Q 26. What are ASP.NET Web Forms? How is this technology different than what is
available though ASP?
Ans :- Web Forms are the heart and soul of ASP.NET. Web Forms are the User
Interface (UI) elements that give your Web applications their look and feel. Web
Forms are similar to Windows Forms in that they provide properties, methods, and
events for the controls that are placed onto them. However, these UI elements
render themselves in the appropriate markup language required by the request,
e.g. HTML. If you use Microsoft Visual Studio .NET, you will also get the familiar
drag-and-drop interface used to create your UI for your Web application.
Q 27. What is the difference between Server.Transfer and Response.Redirect? Why

would I choose one over the other?
Ans :- In earlier versions of IIS, if we wanted to send a user to a new Web page, the
only option we had was Response.Redirect. While this method does accomplish our
goal, it has several important drawbacks. The biggest problem is that this method
causes each page to be treated as a separate transaction. Besides making it difficult
to maintain your transactional integrity, Response.Redirect introduces some
additional headaches. First, it prevents good encapsulation of code. Second, you lose
access to all of the properties in the Request object. Sure, there are workarounds,
but they're difficult. Finally, Response.Redirect necessitates a round trip to the
client, which, on high-volume sites, causes scalability problems.
As you might suspect, Server.Transfer fixes all of these problems. It does this by
performing the transfer on the server without requiring a roundtrip to the client.
180
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 28. How can you provide an alternating color scheme in a Repeater control?
Ans :- AlternatingItemTemplate Like the ItemTemplate element, but rendered for

every other row (alternating items) in the Repeater control. You can specify a
different appearance for the AlternatingItemTemplate element by setting its style
properties.
Q 29 Which template must you provide, in order to display data in a Repeater

control?
Ans: -ItemTemplate
Q 30. What event handlers can I include in Global.asax?
Ans :- Application_Start,Application_End, Application_AcquireRequestState,

Application_AuthenticateRequest, Application_AuthorizeRequest,
Application_BeginRequest, Application_Disposed, Application_EndRequest,
Application_Error, Application_PostRequestHandlerExecute,
Application_PreRequestHandlerExecute,
Application_PreSendRequestContent, Application_PreSendRequestHeaders,
Application_ReleaseRequestState, Application_ResolveRequestCache,
Application_UpdateRequestCache, Session_Start,Session_End
You can optionally include "On" in any of method names. For example, you can name
a BeginRequest event handler.Application_BeginRequest or
Application_OnBeginRequest.You can also include event handlers in Global.asax for
events fired by custom HTTP modules.Note that not all of the event handlers make
sense for Web Services (they're designed for ASP.NET applications in general,
whereas .NET XML Web Services are specialized instances of an ASP.NET app). For
example, the Application_AuthenticateRequest and Application_AuthorizeRequest
events are designed to be used with ASP.NET Forms authentication.
Q 31. What is different b/w webconfig.xml & Machineconfig.xml
Ans :- Web.config & machine.config both are configuration files.Web.config contains

settings specific to an application where as machine.config contains settings to a
computer. The Configuration system first searches settings in machine.config file &
then looks in application configuration files.Web.config, can appear in multiple
directories on an ASP.NET Web application server. Each Web.config file applies
181
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
configuration settings to its own directory and all child directories below it. There is
only Machine.config file on a web server.
If I'm developing an application that must accomodate multiple security levels

though secure login and my ASP.NET web appplication is spanned across three web-
servers (using round-robbin load balancing) what would be the best approach to
maintain login-in state for the users?
Use the state server or store the state in the database. This can be easily done
through simple setting change in the web.config.
<SESSIONSTATE
StateConnectionString="tcpip=127.0.0.1:42424"
sqlConnectionString="data source=127.0.0.1; user id=sa; password="
cookieless="false"
timeout="30"
/>
You can specify mode as “stateserver” or “sqlserver”.
Where would you use an iHTTPModule, and what are the limitations of any
approach you might take in implementing one
"One of ASP.NET's most useful features is the extensibility of the HTTP pipeline,
the path that data takes between client and server. You can use them to extend your
ASP.NET applications by adding pre- and post-processing to each HTTP request
coming into your application. For example, if you wanted custom authentication
facilities for your application, the best technique would be to intercept the request
when it comes in and process the request in a custom HTTP module.
Q 32.How do you turn off cookies for one page in your site?
Ans :- Since no Page Level directive is present, I am afraid that cant be done.
Ans:- Permanent cookies are available until a specified expiration date, and are
stored on the hard disk.So Set the 'Expires' property any value greater than
DataTime.MinValue with respect to the current datetime. If u want the cookie which
never expires set its Expires property equal to DateTime.maxValue.
Q 34 Which method do you use to redirect the user to another page without
performing a round trip to the client?
182
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Server.Transfer and Server.Execute
Q 35 . What property do you have to set to tell the grid which page to go to when
using the Pager object?
Ans :- CurrentPageIndex
Q 36. Should validation (did the user enter a real date) occur server-side or client-
side? Why?
Ans :- It should occur both at client-side and Server side.By using expression
validator control with the specified expression ie.. the regular expression provides
the facility of only validatating the date specified is in the correct format or not. But
for checking the date where it is the real data or not should be done at the server
side, by getting the system date ranges and checking the date whether it is in
between that range or not.
Q 37. What does the "EnableViewState" property do? Why would I want it on or off?
Ans :- Enable ViewState turns on the automatic state management feature that
enables server controls to re-populate their values on a round trip without requiring
you to write any code. This feature is not free however, since the state of a control is
passed to and from the server in a hidden form field. You should be aware of when
ViewState is helping you and when it is not. For example, if you are binding a
control to data on every round trip, then you do not need the control to maintain it's
view state, since you will wipe out any re-populated data in any case. ViewState is
enabled for all server controls by default. To disable it, set the EnableViewState
property of the control to false.
Q 38. What is the difference between Server.Transfer and Response.Redirect? Why

would I choose one over the other?
Ans :- Server.Transfer() : client is shown as it is on the requesting page only, but the
all the content is of the requested page. Data can be persist accros the pages using
183
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Context.Item collection, which is one of the best way to transfer data from one page
to another keeping the page state alive.
Response.Dedirect() :client know the physical location (page name and query string
as well). Context.Items loses the persisitance when nevigate to destination page. In
earlier versions of IIS, if we wanted to send a user to a new Web page, the only
option we had was Response.Redirect. While this method does accomplish our goal,
it has several important drawbacks. The biggest problem is that this method causes
each page to be treated as a separate transaction. Besides making it difficult to
maintain your transactional integrity, Response.Redirect introduces some additional
headaches. First, it prevents good encapsulation of code. Second, you lose access to
all of the properties in the Request object. Sure, there are workarounds, but they're
difficult. Finally, Response.Redirect necessitates a round trip to the client, which, on
high-volume sites, causes scalability problems. As you might suspect,
Server.Transfer fixes all of these problems. It does this by performing the transfer
on the server without requiring a roundtrip to the client.
Q 39. Can you give an example of when it would be appropriate to use a web service
as opposed to a non-serviced .NET component?
Ans :- Communicating through a Firewall When building a distributed application

with 100s/1000s of users spread over multiple locations, there is always the problem
of communicating between client and server because of firewalls and proxy servers.
Exposing your middle tier components as Web Services and invoking the directly
from a Windows UI is a very valid option.
• Application Integration When integrating applications written in various

languages and running on disparate systems. Or even applications running
on the same platform that have been written by separate vendors.
• Business-to-Business Integration This is an enabler for B2B intergtation

which allows one to expose vital business processes to authorized supplier
and customers. An example would be exposing electronic ordering and
invoicing, allowing customers to send you purchase orders and suppliers to
send you invoices electronically.
• Software Reuse This takes place at multiple levels. Code Reuse at the Source
code level or binary componet-based resuse. The limiting factor here is that
you can reuse the code but not the data behind it. Webservice overcome this
limitation. A scenario could be when you are building an app that aggregates
184
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
the functionality of serveral other Applicatons. Each of these functions could
be performed by individual apps, but there is value in perhaps combining the
the multiple apps to present a unifiend view in a Portal or Intranet.
• When not to use Web Services: Single machine Applicatons When the apps
are running on the same machine and need to communicate with each other
use a native API. You also have the options of using component technologies
such as COM or .NET Componets as there is very little overhead.
• Homogeneous Applications on a LAN If you have Win32 or Winforms apps

that want to communicate to their server counterpart. It is much more
efficient to use DCOM in the case of Win32 apps and .NET Remoting in the
case of .NET Apps
Q 40. Can you give an example of what might be best suited to place in the
Application_Start and Session_Start subroutines?
Ans :- The Application_Start event is guaranteed to occur only once throughout the
lifetime of the application. It's a good place to initialize global variables. For
example, you might want to retrieve a list of products from a database table and
place the list in application state or the Cache object. SessionStateModule exposes
both Session_Start and Session_End events.
Q 41. What are the advantages and disadvantages of viewstate?
Ans:- The primary advantages of the ViewState feature in ASP.NET are:
1. Simplicity. There is no need to write possibly complex code to store form data
between page submissions.
2. Flexibility. It is possible to enable, configure, and disable ViewState on a control-
by-control basis, choosing to persist the values of some fields but not others.
There are, however a few disadvantages that are worth pointing out:
1. Does not track across pages. ViewState information does not automatically
transfer from page to page. With the session
approach, values can be stored in the session and accessed from other pages. This is
not possible with ViewState, so storing
data into the session must be done explicitly.
185
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
2. ViewState is not suitable for transferring data for back-end systems. That is, data
still has to be transferred to the back
end using some form of data object.
Q 42. Describe session handling in a webfarm, how does it work and what are the
limits?
ASP.NET Session supports storing of session data in 3 ways, i] in In-Process ( in the
same memory that ASP.NET uses) , ii] out-of-process using Windows NT Service )in
separate memory from ASP.NET ) or iii] in SQL Server (persistent storage). Both
the Windows Service and SQL Server solution support a webfarm scenario where all
the web-servers can be configured to share common session state store.
1. Windows Service :
We can start this service by Start | Control Panel | Administrative Tools | Services
| . In that we service names ASP.NET State Service. We can start or stop service by
manually or configure to start automatically. Then we have to configure our
web.config file
<CONFIGURATION><configuration>
<system.web>
<SessionState
mode = “StateServer”
stateConnectionString = “tcpip=127.0.0.1:42424”
stateNetworkTimeout = “10”
sqlConnectionString=”data source = 127.0.0.1; uid=sa;pwd=”
cookieless =”Flase”
timeout= “20” />
</system.web>
</configuration> </SYSTEM.WEB>
</CONFIGURATION>
Here ASP.Net Session is directed to use Windows Service for state management on
local server (address : 127.0.0.1 is TCP/IP loop-back address). The default port is
42424. we can configure to any port but for that we have to manually edit the
registry.
Follow these simple steps
- In a webfarm make sure you have the same config file in all your web servers.
186
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
- Also make sure your objects are serializable.
- For session state to be maintained across different web servers in the webfarm, the
application path of the web-site in the IIS Metabase should be identical in all the
web-servers in the webfarm.
Q 43. Which template must you provide, in order to display data in a Repeater
control?
Ans : -You have to use the ItemTemplate to Display data. Syntax is as follows,
< ItemTemplate >
< div class =”rItem” >
< img src=”images/<%# Container.DataItem(“ImageURL”)%>” hspace=”10” />
< b > <% # Container.DataItem(“Title”)%>
< /div >
< ItemTemplate >
Q 44.How can you provide an alternating color scheme in a Repeater control?
Ans :- Using the AlternatintItemTemplate
Q 45. What property must you set, and what method must you call in your code, in
order to bind the data from some data source to the Repeater control?
Ans :- Set the DataMember property to the name of the table to bind to. (If this
property is not set, by default the first table in the dataset is used.)
DataBind method, use this method to bind data from a source to a server control.
This method is commonly used after retrieving a data set through a database query.
Q 46. What method do you use to explicitly kill a user s session?
Ans :- You can dump (Kill) the session yourself by calling the method
Session.Abandon.
ASP.NET automatically deletes a user's Session object, dumping its contents, after it
has been idle for a configurable timeout interval. This interval, in minutes, is set in
the <SESSIONSTATE>section of the web.config file. The default is 20 minutes.
187
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 47. How do you turn off cookies for one page in your site?
Ans :- Use Cookie.Discard property, Gets or sets the discard flag set by the server.
When true, this property instructs the client application not to save the Cookie on
the user's hard disk when a session ends.
Q 48. Which two properties are on every validation control?
Ans :- We have two common properties for every validation controls

1. Control to Validate,
2. Error Message.
Q 49. What tags do you need to add within the asp:datagrid tags to bind columns
manually?
Ans:- < asp:DataGrid id="dgCart" AutoGenerateColumns="False" CellPadding="4"

Width="448px" runat="server" >
< Columns >
< asp:ButtonColumn HeaderText="SELECT" Text="SELECT"
CommandName="select" >< /asp:ButtonColumn >
< asp:BoundColumn DataField="ProductId" HeaderText="Product ID" ><
/asp:BoundColumn >
< asp:BoundColumn DataField="ProductName" HeaderText="Product Name" ><
/asp:BoundColumn >
< asp:BoundColumn DataField="UnitPrice" HeaderText="UnitPrice" ><
/asp:BoundColumn >
< /Columns >
< /asp:DataGrid >
Ans :- Permanent cookies are the ones that are most useful. Permanent cookies are
available until a specified expiration date, and are stored on the hard disk. The
location of cookies differs with each browser, but this doesn’t matter, as this is all
handled by your browser and the server. If you want to create a permanent cookie
called Name with a value of Nigel, which expires in one month, you’d use the
following code
188
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Response.Cookies ("Name") = "Nigel"
Response.Cookies ("Name"). Expires = DateAdd ("m", 1, Now ())
Q 51. What tag do you use to add a hyperlink column to the DataGrid?
Ans :- < asp:HyperLinkColumn > </ asp:HyperLinkColumn>
Q 52. Which method do you use to redirect the user to another page without
performing a round trip to the client?
Ans :- Server.transfer
Q 52. What is the transport protocol you use to call a Web service SOAP ?
Ans :- HTTP Protocol
Q 53. Explain role based security ?
Ans :- Role Based Security lets you identify groups of users to allow or deny based on
their role in the organization.In Windows NT and Windows XP, roles map to names
used to identify user groups. Windows defines several built-in groups, including
Administrators, Users, and Guests.To allow or deny access to certain groups of
users, add the <ROLES>element to the authorization list in your Web application's
Web.config file.e.g.
<AUTHORIZATION>< authorization >
< allow roles="Domain Name\Administrators" / > < !-- Allow Administrators in
domain. -- >
< deny users="*" / > < !-- Deny anyone else. -- >
< /authorization >
Q 54. How do you register JavaScript for webcontrols ?
Ans :- You can register javascript for controls using <CONTROL -

name>Attribtues.Add(scriptname,scripttext) method.
189
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 55. When do you set "<IDENTITY impersonate="true" />" ?
Ans :- Identity is a webconfig declaration under System.web, which helps to control

the application Identity of the web applicaton. Which can be at any
level(Machine,Site,application,subdirectory,or page), attribute impersonate with
"true" as value specifies that client impersonation is used.
Q 56. What are different templates available in Repeater,DataList and Datagrid ?
Ans ;- Templates enable one to apply complicated formatting to each of the items
displayed by a control.Repeater control supports five types of
templates.HeaderTemplate controls how the header of the repeater control is
formatted.ItemTemplate controls the formatting of each item
displayed.AlternatingItemTemplate controls how alternate items are formatted and
the SeparatorTemplate displays a separator between each item
displyed.FooterTemplate is used for controlling how the footer of the repeater
control is formatted.The DataList and Datagrid supports two templates in addition
to the above five.SelectedItem Template controls how a selected item is formatted
and EditItemTemplate controls how an item selected for editing is formatted.
Q 57. What is ViewState ? and how it is managed ?
Ans ;- ASP.NET ViewState is a new kind of state service that developers can use to
track UI state on a per-user basis. Internally it uses an an old Web programming
trick-roundtripping state in a hidden form field and bakes it right into the page-
processing framework.It needs less code to write and maintain state in your Web-
based forms.
Q 58. What is web.config file ?
Ans :- Web.config file is the configuration file for the Asp.net web application. There
is one web.config file for one asp.net application which configures
the particular application. Web.config file is written in XML with specific tags
having specific meanings.It includes databa which includes
connections,Session States,Error Handling,Security etc.
For example :
< configuration >

< appSettings >
190
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
< add key="ConnectionString"
value="server=localhost;uid=sa;pwd=;database=MyDB" / >
< /appSettings >
< /configuration >
Q 59. What is advantage of viewstate and what are benefits?
Ans :- When a form is submitted in classic ASP, all form values are cleared. Suppose
you have submitted a form with a lot of information and the server comes back with
an error. You will have to go back to the form and correct the information. You click
the back button, and what happens.......ALL form values are CLEARED, and you
will have to start all over again! The site did not maintain your ViewState.With
ASP .NET, the form reappears in the browser window together with all form
values.This is because ASP .NET maintains your ViewState. The ViewState
indicates the status of the page when submitted to the server.
Q 60. What tags do you need to add within the asp:datagrid tags to bind columns
manually?
Ans :- Set AutoGenerateColumns Property to false on the datagrid tag and then use
Column tag and an ASP:databound tag
< asp:DataGrid runat="server" id="ManualColumnBinding"

AutoGenerateColumns="False" >
< Columns >
< asp:BoundColumn HeaderText="Column1" DataField="Column1"/ >
< asp:BoundColumn HeaderText="Column2" DataField="Column2"/ >
< /Columns >
< /asp:DataGrid >
<asp:DataGrid id=ManualColumnBinding runat="server"
AutoGenerateColumns="False">
<COLUMNS> <asp:BoundColumn HeaderText="Column2"
DataField="Column2"></asp:BoundColumn>
</asp:DataGrid>
Q 61. Which property on a Combo Box do you set with a column name, prior to
setting the DataSource, to display data in the combo box?
191
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- DataTextField and DataValueField
Q 62. Which control would you use if you needed to make sure the values in two
different controls matched?
Ans :- CompareValidator is used to ensure that two fields are identical.
Q 63. What is validationsummary server control?where it is used?.
Ans :- The ValidationSummary control allows you to summarize the error messages
from all validation controls on a Web page in a single location. The summary can be
displayed as a list, a bulleted list, or a single paragraph, based on the value of the
DisplayMode property. The error message displayed in the ValidationSummary
control for each validation control on the page is specified by the ErrorMessage
property of each validation control. If the ErrorMessage property of the validation
control is not set, no error message is displayed in the ValidationSummary control
for that validation control. You can also specify a custom title in the heading section
of the ValidationSummary control by setting the HeaderText property.
You can control whether the ValidationSummary control is displayed or hidden by
setting the ShowSummary property. The summary can also be displayed in a
message box by setting the ShowMessageBox property to true.
Q 64. What is the sequence of operation takes place when a page is loaded?
Ans :- BeginTranaction - only if the request is transacted

Init - every time a page is processed
LoadViewState - Only on postback
ProcessPostData1 - Only on postback
Load - every time
ProcessData2 - Only on Postback
RaiseChangedEvent - Only on Postback
RaisePostBackEvent - Only on Postback
PreRender - everytime
BuildTraceTree - only if tracing is enabled
SaveViewState - every time
Render - Everytime
End Transaction - only if the request is transacted
Trace.EndRequest - only when tracing is enabled
UnloadRecursive - Every request
192
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 65. Difference between asp and asp.net?.
Ans :- "ASP (Active Server Pages) and ASP.NET are both server side technologies
for building web sites and web applications, ASP.NET is Managed compiled code -
asp is interpreted. and ASP.net is fully Object oriented. ASP.NET has been entirely
re-architected to provide a highly productive programming experience based on the
.NET Framework, and a robust infrastructure for building reliable and scalable web
applications."
Q 66. Name the validation control available in asp.net?.
Ans :-RequiredField, RangeValidator,RegularExpression,Custom validator,compare

Validator
Q67. What are the various ways of securing a web site that could prevent from
hacking etc .. ?
Ans :- 1) Authentication/Authorization
2) Encryption/Decryption
3) Maintaining web servers outside the corporate firewall. etc.,
Q 68. What is the difference between in-proc and out-of-proc?
Ans :- An inproc is one which runs in the same process area as that of the client
giving tha advantage of speed but the disadvantage of stability becoz if it crashes it
takes the client application also with it.Outproc is one which works outside the
clients memory thus giving stability to the client, but we have to compromise a bit
on speed.
Q 69. When you’re running a component within ASP.NET, what process is it

running within on Windows XP? Windows 2000? Windows 2003?
Ans :- On Windows 2003 (IIS 6.0) running in native mode, the component is running
within the w3wp.exe process associated with the application pool which has been
configured for the web application containing the component.
193
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
On Windows 2003 in IIS 5.0 emulation mode, 2000, or XP, it's running within the
IIS helper process whose name I do not remember, it being quite a while since I last
used IIS 5.0.
Q 70. What does aspnet_regiis -i do ?
Ans :- Aspnet_regiis.exe is The ASP.NET IIS Registration tool allows an

administrator or installation program to easily update the script maps for an
ASP.NET application to point to the ASP.NET ISAPI version associated with the
tool. The tool can also be used to display the status of all installed versions of ASP.
NET, register the ASP.NET version coupled with the tool, create client-script
directories, and perform other configuration operations.
When multiple versions of the .NET Framework are executing side-by-side on a

single computer, the ASP.NET ISAPI version mapped to an ASP.NET application
determines which version of the common language runtime is used for the
application.
The tool can be launched with a set of optional parameters. Option "i" Installs the
version of ASP.NET associated with Aspnet_regiis.exe and updates the script maps
at the IIS metabase root and below. Note that only applications that are currently
mapped to an earlier version of ASP.NET are affected
Q 71. What is a PostBack?
Ans : - The process in which a Web page sends data back to the same page on the
server.
Q 72. What is ViewState? How is it encoded? Is it encrypted? Who uses ViewState?
Ans:- ViewState is the mechanism ASP.NET uses to keep track of server control
state values that don't otherwise post back as part of the HTTP form. ViewState
Maintains the UI State of a Page
ViewState is base64-encoded.
It is not encrypted but it can be encrypted by setting EnableViewStatMAC="true" &
setting the machineKey validation type to 3DES. If you want to NOT maintain the
ViewState, include the directive < %@ Page EnableViewState="false" % > at the top
of an .aspx page or add the attribute EnableViewState="false" to any control.
194
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 73. What is the < machinekey > element and what two ASP.NET technologies is it
used for?
Ans :- Configures keys to use for encryption and decryption of forms authentication
cookie data and view state data, and for verification of out-of-process session state
identification.There fore 2 ASP.Net technique in which it is used are
Encryption/Decryption & Verification
Q 74. What three Session State providers are available in ASP.NET 1.1? What are
the pros and cons of each?
Ans :- ASP.NET provides three distinct ways to store session data for your
application: in-process session state, out-of-process session state as a Windows
service, and out-of-process session state in a SQL Server database. Each has it
advantages.
1.In-process session-state mode

Limitations:
* When using the in-process session-state mode, session-state data is lost if
aspnet_wp.exe or the application domain restarts.
* If you enable Web garden mode in the < processModel > element of the
application's Web.config file, do not use in-process session-state mode. Otherwise,
random data loss can occur.
Advantage:
* in-process session state is by far the fastest solution. If you are storing only small
amounts of volatile data in session state, it is recommended that you use the in-
process provider.
2. The State Server simply stores session state in memory when in out-of-proc mode.
In this mode the worker process talks directly to the State Server
3. SQL mode, session states are stored in a SQL Server database and the worker
process talks directly to SQL. The ASP.NET worker processes are then able to take
advantage of this simple storage service by serializing and saving (using .NET
serialization services) all objects within a client's Session collection at the end of
each Web request
Both these out-of-process solutions are useful primarily if you scale your application
across multiple processors or multiple computers, or where data cannot be lost if a
server or process is restarted.
195
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 75. What is the difference between HTTP-Post and HTTP-Get?
Ans :- As their names imply, both HTTP GET and HTTP POST use HTTP as their
underlying protocol. Both of these methods encode request parameters as
name/value pairs in the HTTP request.
The GET method creates a query string and appends it to the script's URL on the
server that handles the request.
The POST method creates a name/value pairs that are passed in the body of the
HTTP request message.
Q 76. Name and describe some HTTP Status Codes and what they express to the
requesting client.
Ans :- When users try to access content on a server that is running Internet
Information Services (IIS) through HTTP or File Transfer Protocol (FTP), IIS
returns a numeric code that indicates the status of the request. This status code is
recorded in the IIS log, and it may also be displayed in the Web browser or FTP
client. The status code can indicate whether a particular request is successful or
unsuccessful and can also reveal the exact reason why a request is unsuccessful.
There are 5 groups ranging from 1xx - 5xx of http status codes exists.
101 - Switching protocols.
200 - OK. The client request has succeeded
302 - Object moved.
400 - Bad request.
500.13 - Web server is too busy.
Q 77. Explain < @OutputCache% > and the usage of VaryByParam, VaryByHeader?
Ans :- OutputCache is used to control the caching policies of an ASP.NET page or

user control. To cache a page @OutputCache directive should be defined as follows <
%@ OutputCache Duration="100" VaryByParam="none" % >
VaryByParam: A semicolon-separated list of strings used to vary the output cache.

By default, these strings correspond to a query string value sent with GET method
attributes, or a parameter sent using the POST method. When this attribute is set to
multiple parameters, the output cache contains a different version of the requested
document for each specified parameter. Possible values include none, *, and any
valid query string or POST parameter name.
196
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
VaryByHeader: A semicolon-separated list of HTTP headers used to vary the output
cache. When this attribute is set to multiple headers, the output cache contains a
different version of the requested document for each specified header.
Q 78. What is the difference between repeater over datalist and datagrid?
Ans :- The Repeater class is not derived from the WebControl class, like the
DataGrid and DataList. Therefore, the Repeater lacks the stylistic properties
common to both the DataGrid and DataList. What this boils down to is that if you
want to format the data displayed in the Repeater, you must do so in the HTML
markup.
The Repeater control provides the maximum amount of flexibility over the HTML
produced. Whereas the DataGrid wraps the DataSource contents in an HTML <
table >, and the DataList wraps the contents in either an HTML < table > or < span
> tags (depending on the DataList's RepeatLayout property), the Repeater adds
absolutely no HTML content other than what you explicitly specify in the templates.
While using Repeater control, If we wanted to display the employee names in a bold
font we'd have to alter the "ItemTemplate" to include an HTML bold tag, Whereas
with the DataGrid or DataList, we could have made the text appear in a bold font by
setting the control's ItemStyle-Font-Bold property to True.
The Repeater's lack of stylistic properties can drastically add to the development
time metric. For example, imagine that you decide to use the Repeater to display
data that needs to be bold, centered, and displayed in a particular font-face with a
particular background color. While all this can be specified using a few HTML tags,
these tags will quickly clutter the Repeater's templates. Such clutter makes it much
harder to change the look at a later date. Along with its increased development time,
the Repeater also lacks any built-in functionality to assist in supporting paging,
editing, or editing of data. Due to this lack of feature-support, the Repeater scores
poorly on the usability scale.
However, The Repeater's performance is slightly better than that of the DataList's,
and is more noticeably better than that of the DataGrid's. Following figure shows
the number of requests per second the Repeater could handle versus the DataGrid
and DataList
Q 79. Can we handle the error and redirect to some pages using web.config?
Yes, we can do this, but to handle errors, we must know the error codes; only then
we can take the user to a proper error message page, else it may confuse the user.
CustomErrors Configuration section in web.config file:
The default configuration is:
197
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
< customErrors mode="RemoteOnly" defaultRedirect="Customerror.aspx" >
< error statusCode="404" redirect="Notfound.aspx" / >
< /customErrors >
If mode is set to Off, custom error messages will be disabled. Users will receive
detailed exception error messages.
If mode is set to On, custom error messages will be enabled.
If mode is set to RemoteOnly, then users will receive custom errors, but users
accessing the site locally will receive detailed error messages.
Add an < error > tag for each error you want to handle. The error tag will redirect
the user to the Notfound.aspx page when the site returns the 404 (Page not found)
error.
[Example]
There is a page MainForm.aspx
Private Sub Page_Load(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs) Handles MyBase.Load
'Put user code to initialize the page here
Dim str As System.Text.StringBuilder
str.Append("hi") ' Error Line as str is not instantiated
Response.Write(str.ToString)
End Sub
[Web.Config]
< customErrors mode="On" defaultRedirect="Error.aspx"/ >

' a simple redirect will take the user to Error.aspx [user defined] error file.
< customErrors mode="RemoteOnly" defaultRedirect="Customerror.aspx" >

< error statusCode="404" redirect="Notfound.aspx" / >
< /customErrors >
'This will take the user to NotFound.aspx defined in IIS.
Q 80. How do you implement Paging in .Net?
Ans :- The DataGrid provides the means to display a group of records from the data
source (for example, the first 10), and then navigate to the "page" containing the
next 10 records, and so on through the data.
198
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Using Ado.Net we can explicit control over the number of records returned from the
data source, as well as how much data is to be cached locally in the DataSet.
1.Using DataAdapter.fill method give the value of 'Maxrecords' parameter
(Note: - Don't use it because query will return all records but fill the dataset based
on value of 'maxrecords' parameter).
2.For SQL server database, combines a WHERE clause and a ORDER BY clause
with TOP predicate.
3.If Data does not change often just cache records locally in DataSet and just take
some records from the DataSet to display.
Q 81. What is the difference between Server.Transfer and Response.Redirect?
Ans :- Server.Transfer() : client is shown as it is on the requesting page only, but the
all the content is of the requested page. Data can be persist across the pages using
Context.Item collection, which is one of the best way to transfer data from one page
to another keeping the page state alive.
Response.Dedirect() :client knows the physical location (page name and query string
as well). Context.Items loses the persistence when navigate to destination page. In
earlier versions of IIS, if we wanted to send a user to a new Web page, the only
option we had was Response.Redirect. While this method does accomplish our goal,
it has several important drawbacks. The biggest problem is that this method causes
each page to be treated as a separate transaction. Besides making it difficult to
maintain your transactional integrity, Response.Redirect introduces some additional
headaches. First, it prevents good encapsulation of code. Second, you lose access to
all of the properties in the Request object. Sure, there are workarounds, but they're
difficult. Finally, Response.Redirect necessitates a round trip to the client, which, on
high-volume sites, causes scalability problems. As you might suspect,
Server.Transfer fixes all of these problems. It does this by performing the transfer
on the server without requiring a roundtrip to the client.
Response.Redirect sends a response to the client browser instructing it to request
the second page. This requires a round-trip to the client, and the client initiates the
Request for the second page. Server.Transfer transfers the process to the second
page without making a round-trip to the client. It also transfers the HttpContext to
the second page, enabling the second page access to all the values in the
HttpContext of the first page.
Q 82. Can you create an app domain?
Ans :- Yes, We can create user app domain by calling on of the following overload
static methods of the System.AppDomain class
199
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
1. Public static AppDomain CreateDomain(String friendlyName)
2. Public static AppDomain CreateDomain(String friendlyName, Evidence
securityInfo)
securityInfo, AppDomainSetup info)
securityInfo, String appBasePath, String appRelativeSearchPath, bool
shadowCopyFiles)
Q 83. What are the various security methods which IIS Provides apart from .NET ?
Ans :- The various security methods which IIS provides are
a) Authentication Modes
b) IP Address and Domain Name Restriction
c) DNS Lookups DNS Lookups
d) The Network ID and Subnet Mask
e) SSL
Q 84. What is Web Gardening? How would using it affect a design?
Ans :- The Web Garden Model

The Web garden model is configurable through the section of the machine.config file.
Notice that the section is the only configuration section that cannot be placed in an
application-specific web.config file. This means that the Web garden mode applies to
all applications running on the machine. However, by using the node in the
machine.config source, you can adapt machine-wide settings on a per-application
basis.
Two attributes in the section affect the Web garden model. They are webGarden and
cpuMask. The webGarden attribute takes a Boolean value that indicates whether or
not multiple worker processes (one per each affinitized CPU) have to be used. The
attribute is set to false by default. The cpuMask attribute stores a DWORD value
whose binary representation provides a bit mask for the CPUs that are eligible to
run the ASP.NET worker process. The default value is -1 (0xFFFFFF), which means
that all available CPUs can be used. The contents of the cpuMask attribute is
ignored when the webGarden attribute is false. The cpuMask attribute also sets an
upper bound to the number of copies of aspnet_wp.exe that are running.
200
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Web gardening enables multiple worker processes to run at the same time. However,
you should note that all processes will have their own copy of application state, in-
process session state, ASP.NET cache, static data, and all that is needed to run
applications. When the Web garden mode is enabled, the ASP.NET ISAPI launches
as many worker processes as there are CPUs, each a full clone of the next (and each
affinitized with the corresponding CPU). To balance the workload, incoming
requests are partitioned among running processes in a round-robin manner. Worker
processes get recycled as in the single processor case. Note that ASP.NET inherits
any CPU usage restriction from the operating system and doesn't include any
custom semantics for doing this.
All in all, the Web garden model is not necessarily a big win for all applications. The
more stateful applications are, the more they risk to pay in terms of real
performance. Working data is stored in blocks of shared memory so that any changes
entered by a process are immediately visible to others. However, for the time it takes
to service a request, working data is copied in the context of the process. Each
worker process, therefore, will handle its own copy of working data, and the more
stateful the application, the higher the cost in performance. In this context, careful
and savvy application benchmarking is an absolute must.
Changes made to the section of the configuration file are effective only after IIS is
restarted. In IIS 6, Web gardening parameters are stored in the IIS metabase; the
webGarden and cpuMask attributes are ignored.
Q 85. What is view state?.where it stored?.can we disable it?
Ans :- The web is state-less protocol, so the page gets instantiated, executed,
rendered and then disposed on every round trip to the server. The developers code to
add "statefulness" to the page by using Server-side storage for the state or posting
the page to itself. When require to persist and read the data in control on webform,
developer had to read the values and store them in hidden variable (in the form),
which were then used to restore the values. With advent of .NET framework,
ASP.NET came up with ViewState mechanism, which tracks the data values of
server controls on ASP.NET webform. In effect,ViewState can be viewed as "hidden
variable managed by ASP.NET framework!". When ASP.NET page is executed, data
values from all server controls on page are collected and encoded as single string,
which then assigned to page's hidden atrribute "< input type=hidden >", that is part
of page sent to the client.
201
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
ViewState value is temporarily saved in the client's browser.ViewState can be
disabled for a single control, for an entire page orfor an entire web application. The
syntax is:
Disable ViewState for control (Datagrid in this example)

< asp:datagrid EnableViewState="false" ... / >
Disable ViewState for a page, using Page directive

< %@ Page EnableViewState="False" ... % >
Disable ViewState for application through entry in web.config

< Pages EnableViewState="false" ... / >
202
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Dot Net Framework FAQ’s
Q 1. When was .NET announced?
Ans :- Bill Gates delivered a keynote at Forum 2000, held June 22, 2000, outlining
the .NET 'vision'. The July 2000 PDC had a number of sessions on .NET technology,
and delegates were given CDs containing a pre-release version of the .NET
framework/SDK and Visual Studio.NET.
Q 2. When was the first version of .NET released?
Ans :- The final version of the 1.0 SDK and runtime was made publicly available
around 6pm PST on 15-Jan-2002. At the same time, the final version of Visual
Studio.NET was made available to MSDN subscribers.
Q 3. What platforms does the .NET Framework run on?
Ans :- The runtime supports Windows XP, Windows 2000, NT4 SP6a and Windows
ME/98. Windows 95 is not supported. Some parts of the framework do not work on
all platforms - for example, ASP.NET is only supported on Windows XP and
Windows 2000. Windows 98/ME cannot be used for development.
IIS is not supported on Windows XP Home Edition, and so cannot be used to host
ASP.NET. However, the ASP.NET Web Matrix
web server does run on XP Home.
The Mono project is attempting to implement the .NET framework on Linux.
Q. 4 What is the CLR?
203
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans : CLR = Common Language Runtime. The CLR is a set of standard resources
that (in theory) any .NET program can take advantage of, regardless of
programming language. Robert Schmidt (Microsoft) lists the following CLR
resources in his MSDN PDC# article:
Object-oriented programming model (inheritance, polymorphism, exception
handling, garbage collection)
Security model
Type system
All .NET base classes
Many .NET framework classes
Development, debugging, and profiling tools
Execution and code management
IL-to-native translators and optimizers
What this means is that in the .NET world, different programming languages will be
more equal in capability than they have ever been before, although clearly not all
languages will support all CLR services.
Q 5. What is the CTS?
Ans :- CTS = Common Type System. This is the range of types that the .NET
runtime understands, and therefore that .NET applications can use. However note
that not all .NET languages will support all the types in the CTS. The CTS is a
superset of the CLS.
Q 6. What is the CLS?
Ans : -CLS = Common Language Specification. This is a subset of the CTS which all
.NET languages are expected to support. The idea is that any program which uses
CLS-compliant types can interoperate with any .NET program written in any
language.
In theory this allows very tight interop between different .NET languages - for
example allowing a C# class to inherit from a VB class.
Q 7. What is IL?
Ans :- IL = Intermediate Language. Also known as MSIL (Microsoft Intermediate

Language) or CIL (Common Intermediate Language). All .NET source code (of any
language) is compiled to IL. The IL is then converted to machine code at the point
where the software is installed, or at run-time by a Just-In-Time (JIT) compiler.
204
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 8. What does 'managed' mean in the .NET context?
Ans :- The term 'managed' is the cause of much confusion. It is used in various
places within .NET, meaning slightly different things.Managed code: The .NET
framework provides several core run-time services to the programs that run within
it - for example
exception handling and security. For these services to work, the code must provide a
minimum level of information to the runtime.
Such code is called managed code. All C# and Visual Basic.NET code is managed by
default. VS7 C++ code is not managed by default, but the compiler can produce
managed code by specifying a command-line switch (/com+).
Managed data: This is data that is allocated and de-allocated by the .NET runtime's
garbage collector. C# and VB.NET data is always managed. VS7 C++ data is
unmanaged by default, even when using the /com+ switch, but it can be marked as
managed using the __gc keyword.Managed classes: This is usually referred to in the
context of Managed Extensions (ME) for C++. When using ME C++, a class can be
marked with the __gc keyword. As the name suggests, this means that the memory
for instances of the class is managed by the garbage collector, but it also means more
than that. The class becomes a fully paid-up member of the .NET community with
the benefits and restrictions that brings. An example of a benefit is proper interop
with classes written in other languages - for example, a managed C++ class can
inherit from a VB class. An example of a restriction is that a managed class can only
inherit from one base class.
Q 9. What is reflection?
Ans :- All .NET compilers produce metadata about the types defined in the modules
they produce. This metadata is packaged along with the module (modules in turn
are packaged together in assemblies), and can be accessed by a mechanism called
reflection. The System.Reflection namespace contains classes that can be used to
interrogate the types for a module/assembly.
ITypeLib/ITypeInfo to access type library data in COM, and it is used for similar
purposes - e.g. determining data type sizes for marshaling data across
context/process/machine boundaries.
System.Type.InvokeMember ) , or even create types dynamically at run-time (see
System.Reflection.Emit.TypeBuilder).
Q 10 . What is the difference between Finalize and Dispose (Garbage collection) ?

205
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Class instances often encapsulate control over resources that are not managed
by the runtime, such as window handles (HWND), database connections, and so on.
Therefore, you should provide both an explicit and an implicit way to free those
resources. Provide implicit control by implementing the protected Finalize Method
on an object (destructor syntax in C# and the Managed Extensions for C++). The
garbage collector calls this method at some point after there are no longer any valid
references to the object. In some cases, you might want to provide programmers
using an object with the ability to explicitly release these external resources before
the garbage collector frees the object. If an external resource is scarce or expensive,
better performance can be achieved if the programmer explicitly releases resources
when they are no longer being used. To provide explicit control, implement the
Dispose method provided by the IDisposable Interface. The consumer of the object
should call this method when it is done using the object.
Dispose can be called even if other references to the object are alive. Note that even
when you provide explicit control by way of Dispose, you should provide implicit
cleanup using the Finalize method. Finalize provides a backup to prevent resources
from
permanently leaking if the programmer fails to call Dispose.
Q 11. What is Partial Assembly References?
Ans :- Full Assembly reference: A full assembly reference includes the assembly's
text name, version, culture, and public key token (if the assembly has a strong
name). A full assembly reference is required if you reference any assembly that is
part of the common
language runtime or any assembly located in the global assembly cache.
Partial Assembly reference: We can dynamically reference an assembly by providing

only partial information, such as specifying only the assembly name. When you
specify a partial assembly reference, the runtime looks for the assembly only in the
application
directory.
We can make partial references to an assembly in your code one of the following
ways:
-> Use a method such as System.Reflection.Assembly.Load and specify only a partial
reference. The runtime checks for the assembly in the application directory.
-> Use the System.Reflection.Assembly.LoadWithPartialName method and specify
only a partial reference. The runtime checks for the assembly in the application
directory and in the global assembly cache
206
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 12. Changes to which portion of version number indicates an incompatible
change?
Ans :- Major or minor. Changes to the major or minor portion of the version number
indicate an incompatible change. Under this convention then, version 2.0.0.0 would
be considered incompatible with version 1.0.0.0. Examples of an incompatible
change would be a change to the types of some method parameters or the removal of
a type or method altogether. Build. The Build number is typically used to
distinguish between daily builds or smaller compatible releases. Revision. Changes
to the revision number are typically reserved for an incremental build needed to fix
a particular bug. You'll sometimes hear this referred to as the "emergency bug fix"
number in that the revision is what is often changed when a fix to a specific bug is
shipped to a customer.
Q 13. What is side-by-side execution? Can two application one using private
assembly and other using Shared assembly be stated as a side-by-side executables?
Ans :- Side-by-side execution is the ability to run multiple versions of an application

or component on the same computer. You can have multiple versions of the common
language runtime, and multiple versions of applications and components that use a
version of the runtime, on the same computer at the same time. Since versioning is
only applied to shared assemblies, and not to private assemblies, two application one
using private assembly and one using shared assembly cannot be stated as side-by-
side
executables.
Q 14. Why string are called Immutable data Type ?
Ans : -The memory representation of string is an Array of Characters, So on re-

assigning the new array of Char is formed & the start address is changed . Thus
keeping the Old string in Memory for Garbage Collector to be disposed.
Q 15. What does assert() method do?
Ans :- In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a parameter, and

shows the error dialog if the condition is false. The program proceeds without any
interruption if the condition is true.
207
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 16. What's the difference between the Debug class and Trace class?
Ans :- Documentation looks the same. Use Debug class for debug builds, use Trace
class for both debug and release builds.
Ans :- The tracing dumps can be quite verbose. For applications that are constantly
running you run the risk of overloading the machine and the hard drive. Five levels
range from None to Verbose, allowing you to fine-tune the tracing activities.
Ans :- To the Console or a text file depending on the parameter passed to the
constructor.
Q 19. How do assemblies find each other?

Ans ;- By searching directory paths. There are several factors which can affect the
path (such as the AppDomain host, and application configuration files), but for
private assemblies the search path is normally the application's directory and its
sub-directories. For shared assemblies, the search path is normally same as the
private assembly path plus the shared assembly cache.
Q 20. How does assembly versioning work?
Ans :- Each assembly has a version number called the compatibility version. Also
each reference to an assembly (from another assembly) includes both the name and
version of the referenced assembly.The version number has four numeric parts (e.g.
5.5.2.33). Assemblies with either of the first two parts different are normally viewed
as incompatible. If the first two parts are the same, but the third is different, the
assemblies are deemed as 'maybe compatible'. If only the fourth part is different, the
assemblies are deemed compatible. However, this is just the default guideline - it is
the version policy that decides to what extent these rules are enforced. The version
policy can be specified via the application configuration file.
Q 21. What is garbage collection?
Ans :- Garbage collection is a system whereby a run-time component takes

responsibility for managing the lifetime of objects and the heap memory that they
208
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
occupy. This concept is not new to .NET - Java and many other languages/runtimes
have used garbage collection for some time.
Q 22. Why doesn't the .NET runtime offer deterministic destruction?
Ans ;- Because of the garbage collection algorithm. The .NET garbage collector
works by periodically running through a list of all the objects that are currently
being referenced by an application. All the objects that it doesn't find during this
search are ready to be destroyed and the memory reclaimed. The implication of this
algorithm is that the runtime doesn't get notified immediately when the final
reference on an object goes away - it only finds out during the next sweep of the
heap.
Futhermore, this type of algorithm works best by performing the garbage collection
sweep as rarely as possible. Normally heap exhaustion is the trigger for a collection
sweep.
Q 23. Is the lack of deterministic destruction in .NET a problem?
Ans :- It's certainly an issue that affects component design. If you have objects that
maintain expensive or scarce resources (e.g. database locks), you need to provide
some way for the client to tell the object to release the resource when it is done.
Microsoft recommend that you provide a method called Dispose() for this purpose.
However, this causes problems for distributed objects - in a distributed system who
calls the Dispose() method? Some form of reference-counting or ownership-
management mechanism is needed to handle distributed objects - unfortunately the
runtime offers no help with this.
Q 24. What is serialization?
Ans :-Serialization is the process of converting an object into a stream of bytes.

Deserialization is the opposite process of creating an object from a stream of bytes.
Serialization / Deserialization is mostly used to transport objects (e.g. during
remoting), or to persist
objects (e.g. to a file or database).
Q 25. In the .NET Framework have in-built support for serialization?
Ans : - There are two separate mechanisms provided by the .NET class library -
XmlSerializer and SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter. Microsoft uses XmlSerializer
209
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
for Web Services, and uses SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter for remoting. Both are
available for use in your own code.
Q 26. Can I customise the serialization process?
Ans :- Yes. XmlSerializer supports a range of attributes that can be used to configure
serialization for a particular class. For example, a field or property can be marked
with the [XmlIgnore] attribute to exclude it from serialization. Another example is
the [XmlElement]
attribute, which can be used to specify the XML element name to be used for a
particular property or field.
Serialization via SoapFormatter/BinaryFormatter can also be controlled to some
extent by attributes. For example, the [NonSerialized] attribute is the equivalent of
XmlSerializer's [XmlIgnore] attribute. Ultimate control of the serialization process
can be acheived by implementing the the ISerializable interface on the class whose
instances are to be serialized.
Q 27. Why is XmlSerializer so slow?
Ans :- There is a once-per-process-per-type overhead with XmlSerializer. So the first

time you serialize or deserialize an object of a given type in an application, there is a
significant delay. This normally doesn't matter, but it may mean, for example, that
XmlSerializer is a poor choice for loading configuration settings during startup of a
GUI application.
Q 28. Why do I get errors when I try to serialize a Hashtable?
Ans :- XmlSerializer will refuse to serialize instances of any class that implements
IDictionary, e.g. Hashtable. SoapFormatter and BinaryFormatter do not have this
restriction.
Q 29. What are attributes?
Ans :- There are at least two types of .NET attribute. The first type I will refer to as
a metadata attribute - it allows some data to be attached to a class or method. This
data becomes part of the metadata for the class, and (like other class metadata) can
be accessed via reflection.
The other type of attribute is a context attribute. Context attributes use a similar
syntax to metadata attributes but they are fundamentally different. Context
210
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
attributes provide an interception mechanism whereby instance activation and
method calls can be
pre- and/or post-processed.
Q 30. How does CAS work?
Ans :- The CAS security policy revolves around two key concepts - code groups and
permissions. Each .NET assembly is a member of a particular code group, and each
code group is granted the permissions specified in a named permission set.
For example, using the default security policy, a control downloaded from a web site
belongs to the 'Zone - Internet' code group, which adheres to the permissions defined
by the 'Internet' named permission set. (Naturally the 'Internet' named permission
set represents a very restrictive range of permissions.)
Q 31. Who defines the CAS code groups?
Ans :- Microsoft defines some default ones, but you can modify these and even create
your own. To see the code groups defined on your system, run 'caspol -lg' from the
command-line. On my system it looks like this:
Level = Machine
Code Groups:
1.6. StrongName -
0024000004800000940000000602000000240000525341310004000003
000000CFCB3291AA715FE99D40D49040336F9056D7886FED46775BC7BB5430BA
4444FEF8348EBD06
F962F39776AE4DC3B7B04A7FE6F49F25F740423EBF2C0B89698D8D08AC48D69
CED0FC8F83B465E08
07AC11EC1DCC7D054E807A43336DDE408A5393A48556123272CEEEE72F1660B
71927D38561AABF5C
AC1DF1734633C602F8F2D5:
Note the hierarchy of code groups - the top of the hierarchy is the most general ('All
code'), which is then sub-divided into several
211
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
groups, each of which in turn can be sub-divided. Also note that (somewhat counter-
intuitively) a sub-group can be associated with a more permissive permission set
than its parent.
Q 32.How do I define my own code group?
Ans :- Use caspol. For example, suppose you trust code from www.mydomain.com
and you want it have full access to your system, but you want to keep the default
restrictions for all other internet sites. To achieve this, you would add a new code
group as a sub-group of the
'Zone - Internet' group, like this:
Now if you run caspol -lg you will see that the new group has been added as group
1.3.1:

Note that the numeric label (1.3.1) is just a caspol invention to make the code groups
easy to manipulate from the command-line. The underlying runtime never sees it.
Q 33.How do I change the permission set for a code group?
Ans :- Use caspol. If you are the machine administrator, you can operate at the
'machine' level - which means not only that the changes you make become the
default for the machine, but also that users cannot change the permissions to be
more permissive. If you are a normal (non-admin) user you can still modify the
permissions, but only to make them more restrictive. For example, to allow intranet
code to do what it likes you might do this:
caspol -cg 1.2 FullTrust
Note that because this is more permissive than the default policy (on a standard
system), you should only do this at the machine level - doing it at the user level will
have no effect.
Q 34. I can't be bothered with all this CAS stuff. Can I turn it off?
Ans :- Yes, as long as you are an administrator. Just run: caspol -s off
Q 35.Can I look at the IL for an assembly?
212
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans ;- Yes. MS supply a tool called Ildasm which can be used to view the metadata
and IL for an assembly.
Q 36.Can source code be reverse-engineered from IL?
Ans :- Yes, it is often relatively straightforward to regenerate high-level source (e.g.

C#) from IL.
Q 37. How can I stop my code being reverse-engineered from IL?
Ans :- There is currently no simple way to stop code being reverse-engineered from
IL. In future it is likely that IL obfuscation tools will become available, either from
MS or from third parties. These tools work by 'optimising' the IL in such a way that
reverse-engineering becomes much more difficult.
Of course if you are writing web services then reverse-engineering is not a problem
as clients do not have access to your IL.
Q 38. Is there built-in support for tracing/logging?
Ans :- Yes, in the System.Diagnostics namespace. There are two main classes that
deal with tracing - Debug and Trace. They both work in a similar way - the
difference is that tracing from the Debug class only works in builds that have the
DEBUG symbol defined, whereas tracing from the Trace class only works in builds
that have the TRACE symbol defined. Typically this means that you should use
System.Diagnostics.Trace.WriteLine for tracing that you want to work in debug and
release builds, and System.Diagnostics.Debug.WriteLine for tracing that you want
to work only in debug builds.
Q 39. Can I redirect tracing to a file?
Ans :- Yes. The Debug and Trace classes both have a Listeners property, which is a
collection of sinks that receive the tracing that you send via Debug.WriteLine and
Trace.WriteLine respectively. By default the Listeners collection contains a single
sink, which is an
instance of the DefaultTraceListener class. This sends output to the Win32
OutputDebugString() function and also the System.Diagnostics.Debugger.Log()
method. This is useful when debugging, but if you're trying to trace a problem at a
customer site, redirecting the output to a file is more appropriate. Fortunately, the
TextWriterTraceListener class is provided for this purpose.
213
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 40. What are the contents of assembly?
Ans :- In general, a static assembly can consist of four elements:

The assembly manifest, which contains assembly metadata.
Type metadata.
Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) code that implements the types.
A set of resources.
Q 41. What is GC (Garbage Collection) and how it works?
Ans :- One of the good features of the CLR is Garbage Collection, which runs in the
background collecting unused object references, freeing us from having to ensure we
always destroy them. In reality the time difference between you releasing the object
instance and it being garbage collected is likely to be very small, since the GC is
always running.
[The process of transitively tracing through all pointers to actively used objects in
order to locate all objects that can be referenced, and then arranging to reuse any
heap memory that was not found during this trace. The common language runtime
garbage collector also compacts the memory that is in use to reduce the working
space needed for the heap.]
Heap:
A portion of memory reserved for a program to use for the temporary storage of data
structures whose existence or size cannot be determined until the program is
running.
Q 42. Differnce between Managed code and unmanaged code ?
Ans :-
Managed Code:
Code that runs under a "contract of cooperation" with the common language
runtime. Managed code must supply the metadata necessary for the runtime to
provide services such as memory management, cross-language integration, code
access security, and
automatic lifetime control of objects. All code based on Microsoft intermediate
language (MSIL) executes as managed code.
Un-Managed Code:
214
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Code that is created without regard for the conventions and requirements of the
common language runtime. Unmanaged code executes in the common language
runtime environment with minimal services (for example, no garbage collection,
limited debugging, and so on).
Q 43. What is MSIL, IL, CTS and, CLR ?
Ans ;- MSIL: (Microsoft intermediate language)

When compiling to managed code, the compiler translates your source code into
Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL), which is a CPU-independent set of
instructions that can be efficiently converted to native code. MSIL includes
instructions for loading, storing, initializing, and calling methods on objects, as well
as instructions for arithmetic and logical operations, control flow, direct memory
access, exception handling, and other operations. Before code can be executed, MSIL
must be converted to CPU-specific code, usually by a just-in-time (JIT) compiler.
Because the common language runtime supplies one or more JIT compilers for each
computer architecture it supports, the same set of MSIL can be JIT-compiled and
executed on any supported architecture.
When a compiler produces MSIL, it also produces metadata. Metadata describes the
types in your code, including the definition of
each type, the signatures of each type's members, the members that your code
references, and other data that the runtime uses at
execution time. The MSIL and metadata are contained in a portable executable (PE)
file that is based on and extends the published
Microsoft PE and Common Object File Format (COFF) used historically for
executable content. This file format, which accommodates
MSIL or native code as well as metadata, enables the operating system to recognize
common language runtime images. The
presence of metadata in the file along with the MSIL enables your code to describe
itself, which means that there is no need for type libraries or Interface Definition
Language (IDL). The runtime locates and extracts the metadata from the file as
needed during
execution.
IL: (Intermediate Language)

A language used as the output of a number of compilers and as the input to a just-in-
time (JIT) compiler. The common language
runtime includes a JIT compiler for converting MSIL to native code.
215
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
CTS: (Common Type System)
The specification that determines how the common language runtime defines, uses,
and manages types
CLR: (Common Language Runtime)

The engine at the core of managed code execution. The runtime supplies managed
code with services such as cross-language
integration, code access security, object lifetime management, and debugging and
profiling support.
Q 44. What is Reference type and value type ?
Ans :- Reference Type:

Reference types are allocated on the managed CLR heap, just like object types.
A data type that is stored as a reference to the value's location. The value of a
reference type is the location of the sequence of bits
that represent the type's data. Reference types can be self-describing types, pointer
types, or interface types
Value Type:
Value types are allocated on the stack just like primitive types in VBScript, VB6 and
C/C++. Value types are not instantiated using new go out of scope when the function
they are defined within returns.
Value types in the CLR are defined as types that derive from system.valueType.
A data type that fully describes a value by specifying the sequence of bits that
constitutes the value's representation. Type information for a value type instance is
not stored with the instance at run time, but it is available in metadata. Value type
instances can be treated as objects using boxing.
Q 45.What is Boxing and unboxing ?
Ans :- Boxing:
The conversion of a value type instance to an object, which implies that the instance
will carry full type information at run time and will be allocated in the heap. The
Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) instruction set's box instruction converts a
value type to an object by making a copy of the value type and embedding it in a
newly allocated object.
216
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Un-Boxing:
The conversion of an object instance to a value type.
Q 46. What is JIT and how is works ?
Ans :- An acronym for "just-in-time," a phrase that describes an action that is taken
only when it becomes necessary, such as just-in-time compilation or just-in-time
object activation
Q 47.What is portable executable (PE) ?
Ans ;- The file format used for executable programs and for files to be linked
together to form executable programs
Q 48. What is strong name?
Ans :- A name that consists of an assembly's identity—its simple text name, version
number, and culture information (if provided)—strengthened by a public key and a
digital signature generated over the assembly. Because the assembly manifest
contains file hashes for all the files that constitute the assembly implementation, it
is sufficient to generate the digital signature over just the one file in the assembly
that contains the assembly manifest. Assemblies with the same strong name are
expected to be identical
Q 49. What is global assembly cache?
Ans :- A machine-wide code cache that stores assemblies specifically installed to be

shared by many applications on the computer. Applications deployed in the global
assembly cache must have a strong name.
Q 50. What is difference between constants, readonly and, static ?
Ans ;- Constants: The value can’t be changed

Read-only: The value will be initialized only once from the constructor of the class.
Static: Value can be initialized once.
Q 51. What is difference between shared and public?
Ans :- An assembly that can be referenced by more than one application. An

217
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
assembly must be explicitly built to be shared by giving it a cryptographically strong
name.
Q 52. What is namespace used for loading assemblies at run time and name the
methods?
Ans:- System.Reflection
Q 53. What are the types of authentication in .net?
Ans :- We have three types of authentication:

1. Form authentication
2. Windows authentication
3. Passport
This has to be declared in web.config file.
Q 54. What is the difference between a Struct and a Class ?
Ans :- The struct type is suitable for representing lightweight objects such as Point,
Rectangle, and Color. Although it is possible to represent a point as a class, a struct
is more efficient in some scenarios. For example, if you declare an array of 1000
Point objects,
you will allocate additional memory for referencing each object. In this case, the
struct is less expensive.
When you create a struct object using the new operator, it gets created and the
appropriate constructor is called. Unlike classes, structs can be instantiated without
using the new operator. If you do not use new, the fields will remain unassigned and
the object cannot be used until all of the fields are initialized. It is an error to declare
a default (parameterless) constructor for a struct. A default constructor is always
provided to initialize the struct members to their default values.
It is an error to initialize an instance field in a struct.
There is no inheritance for structs as there is for classes. A struct cannot inherit
from another struct or class, and it cannot be the base of a class. Structs, however,
inherit from the base class Object. A struct can implement interfaces, and it does
that exactly as classes do.
A struct is a value type, while a class is a reference type.
Q 55. How big is the datatype int in .NET?
Ans ;- 32 bits.
218
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 56. How big is the char?
Ans:- 6 bits (Unicode).
Q 57. How do you initiate a string without escaping each backslash?
Ans :- Put an @ sign in front of the double-quoted string.
Q 58. What's the access level of the visibility type internal?
Ans :- Current application.
Q 59. Explain encapsulation ?
Ans:- The implementation is hidden, the interface is exposed.
Q 60. What data type should you use if you want an 8-bit value that's signed?
Ans :- sbyte.
Q 61. Speaking of Boolean data types, what's different between C# and C/C++?
Ans :-There's no conversion between 0 and false, as well as any other number and
true, like in C/C++ .
Q 62. Where are the value-type variables allocated in the computer RAM?
Ans :- Stack.
Q 63.Where do the reference-type variables go in the RAM?
Ans :- The references go on the stack, while the objects themselves go on the heap.
Q 64. What is the difference between the value-type variables and reference-type
variables in terms of garbage collection?
Ans:- The value-type variables are not garbage-collected, they just fall off the stack
when they fall out of scope, the reference-type objects
219
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
are picked up by GC when their references go null.
Q 65. How do you convert a string into an integer in .NET?
Ans :- Int32.Parse(string)
Q 66. How do you box a primitive data type variable?
Ans :- Assign it to the object, pass an object.
Q 67. Why do you need to box a primitive variable?
Ans :- To pass it by reference.
Q 68. What's the difference between Java and .NET garbage collectors?
Ans :- Sun left the implementation of a specific garbage collector up to the JRE
developer, so their performance varies widely, depending on whose JRE you're
using. Microsoft standardized on their garbage collection.
Q 69. How do you enforce garbage collection in .NET?
Ans:- System.GC.Collect();
Q 70. What's different about namespace declaration when comparing that to

package
Ans :- declaration in Java?

No semicolon.
Q 71. What's the difference between const and readonly?
Ans :- You can initialize readonly variables to some runtime values. Let's say your
program uses current date and time as one of the values that won't change. This
way you declare public readonly string DateT = new DateTime().ToString().
Q 72. What happens when you encounter a continue statement inside the for loop?
220
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- The code for the rest of the loop is ignored, the control is transferred back to
the beginning of the loop.
Q 73. What's the advantage of using System.Text.StringBuilder over System.String?
Ans :- StringBuilder is more efficient in the cases, where a lot of manipulation is

done to the text. Strings are immutable, so each time it's being operated on, a new
instance is created.
Q 74. Can you store multiple data types in System.Array?
Ans :- No.
Q 75. What's the difference between the System.Array.CopyTo() and

System.Array.Clone()?
Ans :- The first one performs a deep copy of the array, the second one is shallow.
Ans :- By calling Sort() and then Reverse() methods.
Q 77. What's the .NET datatype that allows the retrieval of data by a unique key?
Ans :- HashTable.
Q 78. What's class SortedList underneath?
Ans ;- A sorted HashTable.
Ans :- Yes.
221
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- No, once the proper catch code fires off, the control is transferred to the finally
block (if there are any), and then whatever follows the finally block.
Ans:- Well, if at that point you know that an error has occurred, then why not write
the proper code to handle that error instead of passing a new Exception object to the
catch block? Throwing your own exceptions signifies some design flaws in the
project.
Q 82. What's a delegate?
Ans :- A delegate object encapsulates a reference to a method. In C++ they were

Q 83. What's a multicast delegate?
Ans:- It's a delegate that points to and eventually fires off several methods.
Q 84. How's the DLL Hell problem solved in .NET?
Ans :- Assembly versioning allows the application to specify not only the library it
needs to run (which was available under Win32), but also the version of the
assembly.
Ans :- An MSI installer, a CAB archive, and XCOPY command.
Q 86. What's a satellite assembly?
Ans :- When you write a multilingual or multi-cultural application in .NET, and

localized assemblies that modify the core application are called satellite assemblies.
Ans :--System.Globalization, System.Resources.
222
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 88. What does assert() do?
Ans:- In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a parameter, and

shows the error dialog if the condition is false. The program proceeds without any
interruption if the condition is true.
Q 89. What's the difference between the Debug class and Trace class?
Ans :- Documentation looks the same. Use Debug class for debug builds, use Trace
class for both debug and release builds.
Ans :- The tracing dumps can be quite verbose and for some applications that are
constantly running you run the risk of overloading the machine and the hard drive
there. Five levels range from None to Verbose, allowing to fine-tune the tracing
activities.
Ans :- To the Console or a text file depending on the parameter passed to the
constructor.
Ans:- System.Globalization, System.Resources.
Q 93.What are three test cases you should go through in unit testing?
Ans :- Positive test cases (correct data, correct output), negative test cases (broken or
missing data, proper handling), exception test
cases (exceptions are thrown and caught properly).
Ans :- Yes, if you are debugging via Visual Studio.NET, just go to Immediate
window.
223
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 95 .What's the implicit name of the parameter that gets passed into the class' set
method?
Ans :- Value, and it's datatype depends on whatever variable we're changing.
Ans :- Place a colon and then the name of the base class. Notice that it's double colon
in C++.
Q 97. Does C# support multiple inheritance?
Ans :- No, use interfaces instead.
Ans :- Derived Classes.
Q 99. What's the top .NET class that everything is derived from?
Ans :- System.Object.
Q 100. How's method overriding different from overloading?
Ans:- When overriding, you change the method behavior for a derived class.
Overloading simply involves having a method with the same name within the class.
Q 101. What does the keyword virtual mean in the method definition?
Ans :- The method can be over-ridden.
Q 102. Can you declare the override method static while the original method is non-
static?
Ans :- No, you can't, the signature of the virtual method must remain the same, only
the keyword virtual is changed to keyword override.

224
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- No, moreover, you cannot access private methods in inherited classes, have to
be protected in the base class to allow any sort of access.
Q 104. Can you prevent your class from being inherited and becoming a base class
for some other classes?
Ans :- Yes, that's what keyword sealed in the class definition is for. The developer
trying to derive from your class will get a message: cannot inherit from Sealed class
WhateverBaseClassName. It's the same concept as final class in Java.
Q 105. Can you allow class to be inherited, but prevent the method from being over-
ridden?
Ans :- Yes, just leave the class public and make the method sealed.
Q 106. Why can't you specify the accessibility modifier for methods inside the
interface?
Ans :- They all must be public. Therefore, to prevent you from getting the false
impression that you have any freedom of choice, you are not allowed to specify any
accessibility, it's public by default.
Q 107. Can you inherit multiple interfaces?

Ans :- Yes, why not.
Ans :- It's up to you to implement the method inside your own class, so
implementation is left entirely up to you. This might cause a problem on a higher-
level scale if similarly named methods from different interfaces expect different
data, but as far as compiler cares you're
okay.
Q 109. What's the difference between an interface and abstract class?
Ans :- In the interface all methods must be abstract, in the abstract class some
methods can be concrete. In the interface no accessibility modifiers are allowed,
which is ok in abstract classes.
225
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 110. How can you overload a method?
Ans :- Different parameter data types, different number of parameters, different

order of parameters.
Q 111. If a base class has a bunch of overloaded constructors, and an inherited class
has another bunch of overloaded constructors, can you enforce a call from an
inherited constructor to an arbitrary base constructor?
Ans:- Yes, just place a colon, and then keyword base (parameter list to invoke the
appropriate constructor) in the overloaded constructor definition inside the inherited
class.
Q 112. What's the difference between System.String and System.StringBuilder

classes?
Ans :- System.String is immutable, System.StringBuilder was designed with the

purpose of having a mutable string where a variety of operations can be performed.
Q 113. Does C# support multiple-inheritance?
Ans:- No, use interfaces instead.
Ans :- The derived class.
Ans :- Yes, but they are not accessible. Although they are not visible or accessible
via the class interface, they are inherited.
Q 115. Describe the accessibility modifier "protected internal".
Ans :- It is available to derived classes and classes within the same Assembly (and
naturally from the base class it's declared in).
Q 116. What's the top .NET class that everything is derived from?
226
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- System.Object.
Q 117. What's the advantage of using System.Text.StringBuilder over

System.String?
Ans :- StringBuilder is more efficient in cases where there is a large amount of

string manipulation. Strings are immutable, so each time it's being operated on, a
new instance is created.
Q 118. Can you store multiple data types in System.Array?
Ans :- No.
Q 119. What's the .NET class that allows the retrieval of a data element using a
unique
key?
Ans:- HashTable.
Q 120. Will the finally block get executed if an exception has not occurred?
Ans :- Yes.
Q 121. What's an abstract class?
Ans :- A class that cannot be instantiated. An abstract class is a class that must be
inherited and have the methods overridden. An abstract class is essentially a
blueprint for a class without any implementation.
Q 122. When do you absolutely have to declare a class as abstract?
Ans :-
1. When at least one of the methods in the class is abstract.
2. When the class itself is inherited from an abstract class, but not all base
abstract methods have been overridden.
Q 123. What's an interface?
227
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- It's an abstract class with public abstract methods all of which must be
Q 124. Why can't you specify the accessibility modifier for methods inside the
interface?
Ans :- They all must be public. Therefore, to prevent you from getting the false
impression that you have any freedom of choice,
you are not allowed to specify any accessibility, it's public by default.
Q 125.What's the difference between an interface and abstract class?
Ans :- In an Interface class, all methods must be abstract. In an abstract class some
methods can be concrete. In an interface class, no accessibility modifiers are
allowed, which is ok in an abstract class.
Q 126. How is method overriding different from method overloading?
Ans :- When overriding a method, you change the behavior of the method for the
derived class. Overloading a method simply involves
having another method with the same name within the class.
Q127. Can you declare an override method to be static if the original method is non-
static?
Ans :- No. The signature of the virtual method must remain the same, only the
keyword virtual is changed to keyword override.
Ans :- No. Private methods are not accessible outside the class.
Q 129. Can you write a class without specifying namespace? Which namespace does
it belong to by default?
Ans :- Yes, you can, then the class belongs to global namespace which has no name.
For commercial products, naturally, you wouldn't want global namespace.
228
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- A formatter is an object that is responsible for encoding and serializing data
into messages on one end, and deserializing and decoding messages into data on the
other end.
Q 131. Different b/w .NET & J2EE ?
Ans: - Differences between J2EE and the .NET Platform
Vendor Neutrality
The .NET platform is not vendor neutral, it is tied to the Microsoft operating
systems. But neither are any of the J2EE implementations
Many companies buy into J2EE believing that it will give them vendor neutrality.
And, in fact, this is a stated goal of Sun's vision:
A wide variety of J2EE product configurations and implementations, all of which
meet the requirements of this specification, are possible. A portable J2EE
application will function correctly when successfully deployed in any of these
products. (ref : Java 2 Platform Enterprise Edition Specification, v1.3, page 2-7
available at http://java.sun.com/j2ee/)
Overall Maturity
Given that the .NET platform has a three year lead over J2EE, it should be no
surprise to learn that the .NET platform is far more mature than the J2EE
platform. Whereas we have high volume highly reliable web sites using .NET
technologies (NASDAQ and Dell being among many examples)
Interoperability and Web Services
The .NET platform eCollaboration model is, as I have discussed at length, based on
the UDDI and SOAP standards. These standards are widely supported by more than
100 companies. Microsoft, along with IBM and Ariba, are the leaders in this area.
Sun is a member of the UDDI consortium and recognizes the importance of the
UDDI standards. In a recent press release, Sun's George Paolini, Vice President for
the Java Community Development, says:
"Sun has always worked to help establish and support open, standards-based
technologies that facilitate the growth of network-based applications, and we see
229
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
UDDI as an important project to establish a registry framework for business-to-
business e-commerce
But while Sun publicly says it believes in the UDDI standards, in reality, Sun has
done nothing whatsoever to incorporate any of the UDDI standards into J2EE.
Scalability
Typical Comparision w.r.t Systems and their costs
J2EE
Company System Total Sys. Cost

Bull Escala T610 c/s 16,785 $1,980,179
IBM RS/6000 Enterprise Server F80 16,785 $2,026,681
Bull Escala EPC810 c/s 33,375 $3,037,499
IBM RS/6000 Enterprise Server M80 33,375 $3,097,055
Bull Escala EPC2450 110,403 $9,563,263
IBM IBM eServer pSeries 680 Model 7017-S85 110,403 $9,560,594
.NET platform systems
Company System Total Sys. Cost

Dell PowerEdge 4400 16,263 $273,487
Compaq ProLiant ML-570-6/700-3P 20,207 $201,717
Dell PowerEdge 6400 30,231 $334,626
IBM Netfinity 7600 c/s 32,377 $443,463
Compaq ProLiant 8500-X550-64P 161,720 $3,534,272
Compaq ProLiant 8500-700-192P 505,303 $10,003,826
Framework Support
The .NET platform includes such an eCommerce framework called Commerce

Server. At this point, there is no equivalent vendor-neutral framework in the J2EE
230
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
space. With J2EE, you should assume that you will be building your new
eCommerce solution from scratch
Moreover, no matter what [J2EE] vendor you choose, if you expect a component
framework that will allow you to quickly field complete e-business applications, you
are in for a frustrating experience
Language
In the language arena, the choice is about as simple as it gets. J2EE supports Java,
and only Java. It will not support any other language in the foreseeable future. The
.NET platform supports every language except Java (although it does support a
language that is syntactically and functionally equivalent to Java, C#). In fact, given
the importance of the .NET platform as a language independent vehicle, it is likely
that any language that comes out in the near future will include support for the
.NET platform.
Some companies are under the impression that J2EE supports other languages.
Although both IBM's WebSphere and BEA's WebLogic support other languages,
neither does it through their J2EE technology. There are only two official ways in
the J2EE platform to access other languages, one through the Java Native Interface
and the other through CORBA interoperability. Sun recommends the later
approach. As Sun's Distinguished Scientist and Java Architect Rick Cattell said in a
recent interview.
Portability
The reason that operating system portability is a possibility with J2EE is not so
much because of any inherent portability of J2EE, as it is that most of the J2EE
vendors support multiple operating systems. Therefore as long as one sticks with a
given J2EE vendor and a given database vendor, moving from one operating system
to another should be possible. This is probably the single most important benefit in
favor of J2EE over the .NET platform, which is limited to the Windows operating
system. It is worth noting, however, that Microsoft has submitted the specifications
for C# and a subset of the .NET Framework (called the common language
infrastructure) to ECMA, the group that standardizes JavaScript.
J2EE offers an acceptable solution to ISVs when the product must be marketed to
non-Windows customers, particularly when the J2EE platform itself can be bundled
with the ISV's product as an integrated offering.
231
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
If the primary customer base for the ISV is Windows customers, then the .NET
platform should be chosen. It will provide much better performance at a much lower
cost.
Client device independence
The major difference being that with Java, it is the presentation tier programmer
that determines the ultimate HTML that will be delivered to the client, and with
.NET, it is a Visual Studio.NET control.
This Java approach has three problems. First, it requires a lot of code on the
presentation tier, since every possible thin client system requires a different code
path. Second, it is very difficult to test the code with every possible thin client
system. Third, it is very difficult to add new thin clients to an existing application,
since to do so involves searching through, and modifying a tremendous amount of
presentation tier logic.
The .NET Framework approach is to write device independent code that interacts
with visual controls. It is the control, not the programmer, that is responsible for
determining what HTML to deliver, based on the capabilities of the client device.. In
the .NET Framework model, one can forget that such a thing as HTML even exists!
Contd ....
Conclusion
Sun's J2EE vision is based on a family of specifications that can be implemented by

many vendors. It is open in the sense that any company can license and implement
the technology, but closed in the sense that it is controlled by a single vendor, and a
self contained architectural island with very limited ability to interact outside of
itself. One of J2EE's major disadvantages is that the choice of the platform dictates
the use of a single programming language, and a programming language that is not
well suited for most businesses. One of J2EE's major advantages is that most of the
J2EE vendors do offer operating system portability.
Microsoft's .NET platform vision is a family of products rather than specifications,

with specifications used primarily to define points of interoperability. The major
disadvantage of this approach is that if is limited to the Windows platform, so
applications written for the .NET platform can only be run on .NET platforms. Their
are several important advantages to the .NET platform:
232
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
* The cost of developing applications is much lower, since standard business
languages can be used and device independent presentation tier logic can be written.
* The cost of running applications is much lower, since commodity hardware

platforms (at 1/5 the cost of their Unix counterparts) can be used.
* The ability to scale up is much greater, with the proved ability to support at least
ten times the number of clients any J2EE platform has shown itself able to support.
* Interoperability is much stronger, with industry standard eCollaboration built into

the platform.
Q 132. What are the Main Features of .NET platform?
Ans :- Features of .NET Platform are :-
Common Language Runtime

Explains the features and benefits of the common language runtime, a run-time
environment that manages the execution of code and provides services that simplify
the development process.
Assemblies
Defines the concept of assemblies, which are collections of types and resources that
form logical units of functionality. Assemblies are the fundamental units of
deployment, version control, reuse, activation scoping, and security permissions.
Application Domains
Explains how to use application domains to provide isolation between applications.
Runtime Hosts
Describes the runtime hosts supported by the .NET Framework, including
ASP.NET, Internet Explorer, and shell executables.
Common Type System

Identifies the types supported by the common language runtime.
Metadata and Self-Describing Components

Explains how the .NET Framework simplifies component interoperation by allowing
compilers to emit additional declarative information, or metadata, into all modules
and assemblies.
233
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Cross-Language Interoperability
Explains how managed objects created in different programming languages can
interact with one another.
.NET Framework Security

Describes mechanisms for protecting resources and code from unauthorized code and
unauthorized users.
.NET Framework Class Library

Introduces the library of types provided by the .NET Framework, which expedites
and optimizes the development process and gives you access to system functionality.
Q 133. What is the use of JIT ?
Ans :- JIT (Just - In - Time) is a compiler which converts MSIL code to Native Code
(ie.. CPU-specific code that runs on the same computer architecture).
Because the common language runtime supplies a JIT compiler for each supported
CPU architecture, developers can write a set of MSIL that can be JIT-compiled and
run on computers with different architectures. However, your managed code will run
only on a specific operating system if it calls platform-specific native APIs, or a
platform-specific class library.
JIT compilation takes into account the fact that some code might never get called
during execution. Rather than using time and memory to convert all the MSIL in a
portable executable (PE) file to native code, it converts the MSIL as needed during
execution and stores the resulting native code so that it is accessible for subsequent
calls. The loader creates and attaches a stub to each of a type's methods when the
type is loaded. On the initial call to the method, the stub passes control to the JIT
compiler, which converts the MSIL for that method into native code and modifies the
stub to direct execution to the location of the native code. Subsequent calls of the
JIT-compiled method proceed directly to the native code that was previously
generated, reducing the time it takes to JIT-compile and run the code.
Q 134. What meant of assembly & global assembly cache (gac) & Meta data.
Ans :- Assembly :-- An assembly is the primary building block of a .NET based
application. It is a collection of functionality that is built, versioned, and deployed as
a single implementation unit (as one or more files). All managed types and resources
are marked either as accessible only within their implementation unit, or as
234
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
accessible by code outside that unit. It overcomes the problem of 'dll Hell'.The .NET
Framework uses assemblies as the fundamental unit for several purposes:
• Security
• Type Identity
• Reference Scope
• Versioning
• Deployment
Global Assembly Cache :-- Assemblies can be shared among multiple applications on
the machine by registering them in global Assembly cache(GAC). GAC is a machine
wide a local cache of assemblies maintained by the .NET Framework. We can
register the assembly to global assembly cache by using gacutil command.
We can Navigate to the GAC directory, C:\winnt\Assembly in explore. In the tools
menu select the cache properties; in the windows displayed you can set the memory
limit in MB used by the GAC
MetaData :--Assemblies have Manifests. This Manifest contains Metadata
information of the Module/Assembly as well as it contains detailed Metadata of
other assemblies/modules references (exported). It's the Assembly Manifest which
differentiates between an Assembly and a Module.
Q 135. What are the mobile devices supported by .net platform
Ans :- The Microsoft .NET Compact Framework is designed to run on mobile devices
such as mobile phones, Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs), and embedded devices.
The easiest way to develop and test a Smart Device Application is to use an
emulator.
These devices are divided into two main divisions:

1) Those that are directly supported by .NET (Pocket PCs, i-Mode phones, and WAP
devices)
2) Those that are not (Palm OS and J2ME-powered devices).
Q 136. What is GUID , why we use it and where?
235
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- GUID :-- GUID is Short form of Globally Unique Identifier, a unique 128-bit
number that is produced by the Windows OS or by some Windows applications to
identify a particular component, application, file, database entry, and/or user. For
instance, a Web site may generate a GUID and assign it to a user's browser to record
and track the session. A GUID is also used in a Windows registry to identify COM
DLLs. Knowing where to look in the registry and having the correct GUID yields a
lot information about a COM object (i.e., information in the type library, its physical
location, etc.). Windows also identifies user accounts by a username
(computer/domain and username) and assigns it a GUID. Some database
administrators even will use GUIDs as primary key values in databases.
GUIDs can be created in a number of ways, but usually they are a combination of a
few unique settings based on specific point in time (e.g., an IP address, network
MAC address, clock date/time, etc.).
Q 137. Describe the difference between inline and code behind - which is best in a
loosely coupled solution?
Ans :- ASP.NET supports two modes of page development: Page logic code that is
written inside runat="server"> blocks within an .aspx file and dynamically compiled
the first time the page is requested on the server. Page logic code that is written
within an external class that is compiled prior to deployment on a server and linked
""behind"" the .aspx file at run time.
Q 138. Whats MSIL, and why should my developers need an appreciation of it if at

all?
Ans :- When compiling the source code to managed code, the compiler translates the
source into Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL). This is a CPU-independent set
of instructions that can efficiently be converted to native code. Microsoft
intermediate language (MSIL) is a translation used as the output of a number of
compilers. It is the input to a just-in-time (JIT) compiler. The Common Language
Runtime includes a JIT compiler for the conversion of MSIL to native code.
Before Microsoft Intermediate Language (MSIL) can be executed it, must be

converted by the .NET Framework just-in-time (JIT) compiler to native code. This is
CPU-specific code that runs on the same computer architecture as the JIT compiler.
Rather than using time and memory to convert all of the MSIL in a portable
236
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
executable (PE) file to native code. It converts the MSIL as needed whilst executing,
then caches the resulting native code so its accessible for any subsequent calls.
Q 139. </SCRIPT>How many .NET languages can a single .NET DLL contain?
Ans :- One
Ans :- Server
Q 141. Whats an assembly?
Ans :- Assemblies are the building blocks of .NET Framework applications; they
form the fundamental unit of deployment, version control, reuse, activation scoping,
and security permissions. An assembly is a collection of types and resources that are
built to work together and form a logical unit of functionality. An assembly provides
the common language runtime with the information it needs to be aware of type
implementations. To the runtime, a type does not exist outside the context of an
assembly.
Q 142. How many classes can a single .NET DLL contain?
Ans :- Unlimited.
Q 143. What is the difference between string and String ?
Ans :- No difference
Q 144. What is manifest?
Ans :- It is the metadata that describes the assemblies.
Q 145. What is metadata?
237
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Metadata is machine-readable information about a resource, or ""data about
data."" Such information might include details on content, format, size, or other
characteristics of a data
source. In .NET, metadata includes type definitions, version information, external
assembly references, and other standardized information.
Q 146. What are the types of assemblies?
Ans :- There are four types of assemblies in .NET:
Static assemblies
These are the .NET PE files that you create at compile time.
Dynamic assemblies
These are PE-formatted, in-memory assemblies that you dynamically create at
runtime using the classes in the System.Reflection.Emit namespace.
Private assemblies
These are static assemblies used by a specific application.
Public or shared assemblies

These are static assemblies that must have a unique shared name and can be used
by any application.
An application uses a private assembly by referring to the assembly using a static

path or through an XML-based application configuration file. While the CLR doesn't
enforce versioning policies-checking whether the correct version is used-for private
assemblies, it ensures that an
application uses the correct shared assemblies with which the application was built.
Thus, an application uses a specific shared assembly by referring to the specific
shared assembly, and the CLR ensures that the correct version is loaded at runtime.
In .NET, an assembly is the smallest unit to which you can associate a version
number;
Q 147. What are delegates?where are they used ?
Ans :- A delegate defines a reference type that can be used to encapsulate a method
with a specific signature. A delegate instance encapsulates a static or an instance
238
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
method. Delegates are roughly similar to function pointers in C++; however,
delegates are type-safe and secure.
Q 148. When do you use virutal keyword?.
Ans :- When we need to override a method of the base class in the sub class, then we
give the virtual keyword in the base class method. This makes the method in the
base class to be overridable. Methods, properties, and indexers can be virtual, which
means that their implementation can be overridden in derived classes.
Q 149. What are class access modifiers ?
Ans :- Access modifiers are keywords used to specify the declared accessibility of a
member or a type. This section introduces the four access modifiers:
· Public - Access is not restricted.
· Protected - Access is limited to the containing class or types derived from the
containing class.
· Internal - Access is limited to the current assembly.
· Protected inertnal - Access is limited to the current assembly or types derived ·
from the containing class.
· Private - Access is limited to the containing type.
Q 150. What Is Boxing And Unboxing?
Ans :- Boxing :- Boxing is an implicit conversion of a value type to the type object
type
Eg:-
Consider the following declaration of a value-type variable:
int i = 123;
object o = (object) i;
Boxing Conversion
UnBoxing :- Unboxing is an explicit conversion from the type object to a value type
Eg:
int i = 123; // A value type
239
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
object box = i; // Boxing
int j = (int)box; // Unboxing
Q 151. What is Value type and refernce type in .Net?.
Ans :- Value Type : A variable of a value type always contains a value of that type.
The assignment to a variable of a value type creates a copy of the assigned value,
while the assignment to a variable of a reference type creates a copy of the reference
but not of the referenced object.
The value types consist of two main categories:

* Stuct Type
* Enumeration Type
Reference Type :Variables of reference types, referred to as objects, store references

to the actual data. This section introduces the following keywords used to declare
reference types:
* Class
* Interface
* Delegate
This section also introduces the following built-in reference types:

* object
* string
Q 152. What is the difference between structures and enumeration?.
Ans :- Unlike classes, structs are value types and do not require heap allocation. A
variable of a struct type directly contains the data of the struct, whereas a variable
of a class type contains a reference to the data. They are derived from
System.ValueType class.
Enum->An enum type is a distinct type that declares a set of named constants.They
are strongly typed constants. They are unique types that allow to declare symbolic
names to integral values. Enums are value types, which means they contain their
own value, can't inherit or be inherited from and assignment copies the value of one
enum to another.
240
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
public enum Grade
{
A,
B,
C
}
Q 153. What is namespaces?.
Ans :- Namespace is a logical naming scheme for group related types.Some class
types that logically belong together they can be put into a common namespace. They
prevent namespace collisions and they provide scoping. They are imported as "using"
in C# or "Imports" in Visual Basic. It seems as if these directives specify a particular
assembly, but they don't. A namespace can span multiple assemblies, and an
assembly can define multiple namespaces. When the compiler needs the definition
for a class type, it tracks through each of the different imported namespaces to the
type name and searches each referenced assembly until it is found.
Namespaces can be nested. This is very similar to packages in Java as far as scoping
is concerned.
Q 154. How do you create shared assemblies?.
Ans :- Just look through the definition of Assemblies..

* An Assembly is a logical unit of code
* Assembly physically exist as DLLs or EXEs
* One assembly can contain one or more files
* The constituent files can include any file types like image files, text files etc.
along with DLLs or EXEs
* When you compile your source code by default the exe/dll generated is actually
an assembly
* Unless your code is bundled as assembly it can not be used in any other
application
* When you talk about version of a component you are actually talking about
version of the assembly to which the component belongs.
* Every assembly file contains information about itself. This information is called
as Assembly Manifest.
Following steps are involved in creating shared assemblies :
241
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
* Create your DLL/EXE source code
* Generate unique assembly name using SN utility
* Sign your DLL/EXE with the private key by modifying AssemblyInfo file
* Compile your DLL/EXE
* Place the resultant DLL/EXE in global assembly cache using AL utility
Q 155. What is global assembly cache?
Ans :- Each computer where the common language runtime is installed has a
machine-wide code cache called the global assembly cache. The global assembly
cache stores assemblies specifically designated to be shared by several applications
on the computer.
There are several ways to deploy an assembly into the global assembly cache:
· Use an installer designed to work with the global assembly cache. This is the
preferred option for installing assemblies into the global assembly cache.
· Use a developer tool called the Global Assembly Cache tool (Gacutil.exe), provided
by the .NET Framework SDK.
· Use Windows Explorer to drag assemblies into the cache.
Q 156. What is MSIL?.
Ans :- When compiling to managed code, the compiler translates your source code
into Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL), which is a CPU-independent set of
instructions that can be efficiently converted to native code. MSIL includes
instructions for loading, storing, initializing, and calling methods on objects, as well
as instructions for arithmetic and logical operations, control flow, direct memory
access, exception handling, and other operations. Before code can be run, MSIL must
be converted to CPU-specific code, usually by a just-in-time (JIT) compiler. Because
the common language runtime supplies one or more JIT compilers for each computer
architecture it supports, the same set of MSIL can be JIT-compiled and run on any
supported architecture.
When a compiler produces MSIL, it also produces metadata. Metadata describes the
types in your code, including the definition of each type, the signatures of each type's
members, the members that your code references, and other data that the runtime
uses at execution time. The MSIL and metadata are contained in a portable
executable (PE) file that is based on and extends the published Microsoft PE and
common object file format (COFF) used historically for executable content. This file
format, which accommodates MSIL or native code as well as metadata, enables the
242
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
operating system to recognize common language runtime images. The presence of
metadata in the file along with the MSIL enables your code to describe itself, which
means that there is no need for type libraries or Interface Definition Language
(IDL). The runtime locates and extracts the metadata from the file as needed during
execution.
Q 157. What is Jit compilers?.how many are available in clr?
Ans :- Just-In-Time compiler- it converts the language that you write in .Net into
machine language that a computer can understand. there are tqo types of JITs one
is memory optimized & other is performace optimized.
Q 158. What is tracing?Where it used.Explain few methods available
Ans :- Tracing refers to collecting information about the application while it is

running. You use tracing information to troubleshoot an application.
Tracing allows us to observe and correct programming errors. Tracing enables you to
record information in various log files about the errors that might occur at run time.
You can analyze these log files to find the cause of the errors.
In .NET we have objects called Trace Listeners. A listener is an object that receives
the trace output and outputs it somewhere; that somewhere could be a window in
your development environment, a file on your hard drive, a Windows Event log, a
SQL Server or Oracle database, or any other customized data store.
The System.Diagnostics namespace provides the interfaces, classes, enumerations

and structures that are used for tracing The System.Diagnostics namespace
provides two classes named Trace and Debug that are used for writing errors and
application execution information in logs.
All Trace Listeners have the following functions. Functionality of these functions is
same except that the target media for the tracing output is determined by the Trace
Listener.
Method Name
Result Fail Outputs the specified text with the Call Stack.
Write Outputs the specified text.
WriteLine Outputs the specified text and a carriage return.
Flush Flushes the output buffer to the target media.
243
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Close Closes the output stream in order to not receive the tracing/debugging
output.
Q 159. How to set the debug mode?
Ans :- Debug Mode for ASP.NET applications - To set ASP.NET appplication in

debugging mode, edit the application's web.config and assign the "debug" attribute
in < compilation > section to "true" as show below:
< configuration >
< system.web >
< compilation defaultLanguage="vb" debug="true" / >
....
...
..
< / configuration >
This case-sensitive attribute 'debug tells ASP.NET to generate symbols for

dynamically generated files and enables the
debugger to attach to the ASP.NET application. ASP.NET will detect this change
automatically, without the need to restart the server. Debug Mode for ASP.NET
Webservices - Debugging an XML Web service created with ASP.NET is similar to
the debugging an ASP.NET Web application.
Q 160. What is the property available to check if the page posted or not?
Ans :- The Page_Load event handler in the page checks for IsPostBack property
value, to ascertain whether the page is posted. The Page.IsPostBack gets a value
indicating whether the page is being loaded in response to the client postback, or it
is for the first time. The value of Page.IsPostBack is True, if the page is being loaded
in response to the client postback; while its value is False, when the page is loaded
for the first time. The Page.IsPostBack property facilitates execution of certain
routine in Page_Load, only once (for e.g. in Page load, we need to set default value in
controls, when page is loaded for the first time. On post back, we check for true
value for IsPostback value and then invoke server-side code to
update data).
Q 161. Which are the abstract classes available under system.xml namespace?
Ans :- The System.XML namespace provides XML related processing ability in .NET
244
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
framework. XmlReader and XMLWriter are the two abstract classes at the core of
.NET Framework XML classes:
1. XmlReader provides a fast, forward-only, read-only cursor for processing an XML

document stream.
2. XmlWriter provides an interface for producing XML document streams that
conform to the W3C's XML standards.
Both XmlReader and XmlWriter are abstract base classes, which define the
functionality that all derived classes must support.
Q 162. Is it possible to use multipe inheritance in .net?
Ans :- Multiple Inheritance is an ability to inherit from more than one base class i.e.
ability of a class to have more than one superclass, by inheriting from different
sources and thus combine separately-defined behaviors in a single class. There are
two types of multiple inheritance: multiple type/interface inheritance and multiple
implementation inheritance. C# & VB.NET supports only multiple type/interface
inheritance, i.e.
you can derive an class/interface from multiple interfaces. There is no support for
multiple implementation inheritance in .NET. That means a class can only derived
from one class.
Q 163. What are the derived classes from xmlReader and xmlWriter?
Ans :- Both XmlReader and XmlWriter are abstract base classes, which define the
functionality that all derived classes must support.
There are three concrete implementations of XmlReader:
1.XmlTextReader
2.XmlNodeReader
3.XmlValidatingReader
There are two concrete implementations of XmlWriter:
1.XmlTextWriter
2.XmlNodeWriter
XmlTextReader and XmlTextWriter support reading data to/from text-based stream,
while XmlNodeReader and XmlNodeWriter are designed for working with in-
memory DOM tree structure. The custom readers and writers can also be developed
to extend the built-in functionality of XmlReader and XmlWriter.
Q 164. What is managed and unmanaged code?

245
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- The .NET framework provides several core run-time services to the programs
that run within it - for example exception handling and security. For these services
to work, the code must provide a minimum level of information to the runtime. i.e.,
code executing under the control of the CLR is called managed code. For example,
any code written in C# or Visual Basic .NET is managed code.
Code that runs outside the CLR is referred to as "unmanaged code." COM
components, ActiveX components, and Win32 API functions are examples of
unmanaged code.
Q 165. How you deploy .NET assemblies?
Ans :- One way is simply use xcopy. others are use and the setup projects in .net.
and one more way is use of nontuch deployment.
Q 166. What is Globalizationa and Localization ?

Ans :- Globalization is the process of creating an application that meets the needs of
users from multiple cultures. It includes using the correct
currency, date and time format, calendar, writing direction, sorting rules, and other
issues. Accommodating these cultural differences in an application is called
localization.Using classes of System.Globalization namespace, you can set
application's current culture.
This can be achieved by using any of the following 3 approaches.

1. Detect and redirect
2. Run-time adjustment
3. Using Satellite assemblies.
Q 167. Whate are Resource Files ? How are they used in .NET?
Ans :- Resource files are the files containing data that is logically deployed with an
application.These files can contain data in a number of formats including strings,
images and persisted objects. It has the main advantage of If we store data in these
files then we don't need to compile these if the data get changed. In .NET we
basically require them storing culture specific informations by localizing
application's resources. You can deploy your resources using satellite assemblies.
Q 168. Difference between Dispose and Finallize method?
246
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Finalize method is used to free the memory used by some unmanaged
resources like window handles (HWND). It's similar to the destructor syntax in C#.
The GC calls this method when it founds no more references to the object. But, In
some cases we may need release the memory used by the resources explicitely.To
release the memory explicitly we need to implement the Dispose method of
IDisposable interface.
Q 169. What is encapsulation ?
Ans :- Encapsulation is the ability to hide the internal workings of an object's

behavior and its data. For instance, let's say you have a object named Bike and this
object has a method named start(). When you create an instance of a Bike object and
call its start() method you are not worried about what happens to accomplish this,
you just want to make sure the state of the bike is changed to 'running' afterwards.
This kind of behavior hiding is encapsulation and it makes programming much
easier.
Q 170. How can you prevent your class to be inherated further?
Ans:- By setting Sealed - Key word
public sealed class Planet

{
//code goes here
}
class Moon:Planet
{
//Not allowed as base class is sealed
}
Q 171. What is GUID and why we need to use it and in what condition? How this is
Created?
Ans :- A GUID is a 128-bit integer (16 bytes) that can be used across all computers
and networks wherever a unique identifier is required. Such an identifier has a very
247
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
low probability of being duplicated. Visual Studio .NET IDE has a utility under the
tools menu to generate GUIDs.
Q 172. Why do you need to serialize.?
Ans :- We need to serialize the object,if you want to pass object from one
computer/application domain to another.Process of converting complex objects into
stream of bytes that can be persisted or transported.Namespace for serialization is
System.Runtime.Serialization.The ISerializable interface allows you to make any
class Serializable..NET framework features 2 serializing method.
1.Binary Serialization 2.XML Serialization
Q 173. What is inline schema, how does it works?
Ans :- Schemas can be included inside of XML file is called Inline Schemas.This is
useful when it is inconvenient to physically seprate the schema and the XML
document.A schema is an XML document that defines the structure, constraints,
data types, and relationships of the elements that constitute the data contained
inside the XML document or in another XML document.Schema can be an external
file which uses the XSD or XDR extension called external schema. Inline schema
can take place even when validation is turned off.
Q 174. Describe the advantages of writing a managed code application instead of

unmanaged one. What's involved in certain piece of code being managed?
Ans :- "Advantage includes automatic garbage collection,memory

management,security,type checking,versioning
Managed code is compiled for the .NET run-time environment. It runs in the
Common Language Runtime (CLR), which is the heart of the .NET Framework. The
CLR provides services such as security,
memory management, and cross-language integration. Managed applications
written to take advantage of the features of the CLR perform more efficiently and
safely, and take better advantage of developers existing expertise in languages that
support the .NET Framework.
248
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Unmanaged code includes all code written before the .NET Framework was
introduced—this includes code written to use COM, native Win32, and Visual Basic
6. Because it does not run inside the .NET environment, unmanaged code cannot
make use of any .NET managed facilities."
Q 175. What are multicast delegates ? give me an example ?
Ans :- Delegate that can have more than one element in its invocation List.
using System;
namespace SampleMultiCastDelegate
{
class MultiCast
{
public delegate string strMultiCast(string s);
}
}
MainClass defines the static methods having same signature as delegate.

using System;
{
public class MainClass

{
public MainClass()
{
}
public static string Jump(string s)

{
Console.WriteLine("Jump");
return String.Empty;
}
public static string Run(string s)

{
Console.WriteLine("Run");
249
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
public static string Walk(string s)

{
Console.WriteLine("Walk");
}
}
}
The Main class:
using System;
using System.Threading;
{
public class MainMultiCastDelegate

{
{
MultiCast.strMultiCast Run,Walk,Jump;
MultiCast.strMultiCast myDelegate;
///here mydelegate used the Combine method of System.MulticastDelegate

///and the delegates combine
myDelegate=(MultiCast.strMultiCast)System.Delegate.Combine(Run,Walk);
}
}
}
Q 176. Can a nested object be used in Serialization ?
Ans :- Yes. If a class that is to be serialized contains references to objects of other

classes, and if those classes have been marked as serializable, then their objects are
serialized too.
250
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 177. Difference between int and int32 ?
Ans :- Both are same. System.Int32 is a .NET class. Int is an alias name for
System.Int32.
Q 178. Describe the difference between a Thread and a Process?
Ans :- A Process is an instance of an running application. And a thread is the

Execution stream of the Process. A process can have multiple Thread.
When a process starts a specific memory area is allocated to it. When there is
multiple thread in a process, each thread gets a memory for storing the variables in
it and plus they can access to the global variables which is common for all the
thread. Eg.A Microsoft Word is a Application. When you open a word file,an instance
of the Word starts and a process is allocated to this instance which has one thread.
Q 179.What is the difference between an EXE and a DLL?
Ans :- You can create an objects of Dll but not of the EXE.
Dll is an In-Process Component whereas EXE is an OUt-Process Component.
Exe is for single use whereas you can use Dll for multiple use.
Exe can be started as standalone where dll cannot be.
Q 180. What is strong-typing versus weak-typing? Which is preferred? Why?
Ans :- Strong typing implies that the types of variables involved in operations are
associated to the variable, checked at compile-time, and require explicit conversion;
weak typing implies that they are associated to the value, checked at run-time, and
are implicitly converted as required. (Which is preferred is a disputable point, but I
personally prefer strong typing because I like my errors to be found as soon as
possible.)
Q 190. What is a PID? How is it useful when troubleshooting a system?
Ans :- PID is the process Id of the application in Windows. Whenever a process
251
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
starts running in the Windows environment, it is associated with an individual
process Id or PID.
The PID (Process ID) a unique number for each item on the Process Tab, Image
Name list. How do you get the PID to appear? In Task Manger, select the View
menu, then select columns and check PID (Process Identifier).
In Linux, PID is used to debug a process explicitly. However we cannot do this in a

windows environment.
Microsoft has launched a SDK called as Microsoft Operations Management (MOM).

This uses the PID to find out which dll’s have been loaded by a process in the
memory. This is essentially helpful in situations where the Process which has a
memory leak is to be traced to a erring dll. Personally I have never used a PID, our
Windows debugger does the things required to find out.
Q 191. What is the GAC? What problem does it solve?
Ans :- Each computer where the common language runtime is installed has a
machine-wide code cache called the global assembly cache. The global assembly
cache stores assemblies that are to be shared by several applications on the
computer. This area is typically the folder under windows or winnt in the machine.
All the assemblies that need to be shared across applications need to be done
through the Global assembly Cache only. However it is not necessary to install
assemblies into the global assembly cache to make them accessible to COM interop
or unmanaged code.
There are several ways to deploy an assembly into the global assembly cache:
· Use an installer designed to work with the global assembly cache. This is the
preferred option for installing assemblies into the global assembly cache.
· Use a developer tool called the Global Assembly Cache tool (Gacutil.exe), provided
by the .NET Framework SDK.
· Use Windows Explorer to drag assemblies into the cache.
GAC solves the problem of DLL Hell and DLL versioning. Unlike earlier situations,
GAC can hold two assemblies of the same name but different version. This ensures
that the applications which access a particular assembly continue to access the same
assembly even if another version of that assembly is installed on that machine.
252
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 192. Describe what an Interface is and how it’s different from a Class.
Ans :- An interface is a structure of code which is similar to a class. An interface is a

prototype for a class and is useful from a logical design perspective. Interfaces
provide a means to define the protocols for a class without worrying about the
implementation details. The syntax for creating interfaces follows:
interface Identifier {
InterfaceBody
}
Identifier is the name of the interface and InterfaceBody refers to the abstract
methods and static final variables that make up the interface. Because it is assumed
that all the methods in an interface are abstract, it isn't necessary to use the
abstract keyword
An interface is a description of some of the members available from a class. In

practice, the syntax typically looks similar to a class definition, except that there's
no code defined for the methods — just their name, the arguments passed and the
type of the value returned.
So what good is it? None by itself. But you create an interface so that classes will
implement it.
But what does it mean to implement an interface. The interface acts as a contract or
promise. If a class implements an interface, then it must have the properties and
methods of the interface defined in the class. This is enforced by the compiler.
Broadly the differentiators between classes and interfaces is as follows

• Interface should not have any implementation.
• Interface can not create any instance.
• Interface should provide high level abstraction from the implementation.
• Interface can have multiple inheritances.
• Default access level of the interface is public.
Q 193. What is the difference between XML Web Services using ASMX and .NET
Remoting using SOAP?
Ans :- ASP.NET Web services and .NET Remoting provide a full suite of design
options for cross-process and cross-plaform communication in distributed
applications. In general, ASP.NET Web services provide the highest levels of
interoperability with full support for WSDL and SOAP over HTTP, while .NET
253
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Remoting is designed for common language runtime type-system fidelity and
supports additional data format and communication channels. Hence if we looking
cross-platform communication than web services is the choice coz for .NET remoting
.Net framework is requried which may or may not present for the other platform.
Serialization and Metadata

ASP.NET Web services rely on the System.Xml.Serialization.XmlSerializer class to
marshal data to and from SOAP messages at runtime. For metadata, they generate
WSDL and XSD definitions that describe what their messages contain. The reliance
on pure WSDL and XSD makes ASP.NET Web services metadata portable; it
expresses data structures in a way that other Web service toolkits on different
platforms and with different programming models can understand. In some cases,
this imposes constraints on the types you can expose from a Web service—
XmlSerializer will only marshal things that can be expressed in XSD. Specifically,
XmlSerializer will not marshal object graphs and it has limited support for container
types.
.NET Remoting relies on the pluggable implementations of the IFormatter interface

used by the System.Runtime.Serialization engine to marshal data to and from
messages. There are two standard formatters,
System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter and
System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter. The
BinaryFormatter and SoapFormatter, as the names suggest, marshal types in
binary and SOAP format respectively. For metadata, .NET Remoting relies on the
common language runtime assemblies, which contain all the relevant information
about the data types they implement, and expose it via reflection. The reliance on
the assemblies for metadata makes it easy to preserve the full runtime type-system
fidelity. As a result, when the .NET Remoting plumbing marshals data, it includes
all of a class's public and private members; handles object graphs correctly; and
supports all container types (e.g., System.Collections.Hashtable). However, the
reliance on runtime metadata also limits the reach of a .NET Remoting system—a
client has to understand .NET constructs in order to communicate with a .NET
Remoting endpoint. In addition to pluggable formatters, the .NET Remoting layer
supports pluggable channels, which abstract away the details of how messages are
sent. There are two standard channels, one for raw TCP and one for HTTP.
Messages can be sent over either channel independent of format.
Distributed Application Design: ASP.NET Web Services vs. .NET Remoting

ASP.NET Web services favor the XML Schema type system, and provide a simple
programming model with broad cross-platform reach. .NET Remoting favors the
runtime type system, and provides a more complex programming model with much
254
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
more limited reach. This essential difference is the primary factor in determining
which technology to use. However, there are a wide range of other design factors,
including transport protocols, host processes, security, performance, state
management, and support for transactions to consider as well.
Security
Since ASP.NET Web services rely on HTTP, they integrate with the standard
Internet security infrastructure. ASP.NET leverages the security features available
with IIS to provide strong support for standard HTTP authentication schemes
including Basic, Digest, digital certificates, and even Microsoft® .NET Passport.
(You can also use Windows Integrated authentication, but only for clients in a
trusted domain.) One advantage of using the available HTTP authentication
schemes is that no code change is required in a Web service; IIS performs
authentication before the ASP.NET Web services are called. ASP.NET also provides
support for .NET Passport-based authentication and other custom authentication
schemes. ASP.NET supports access control based on target URLs, and by
integrating with the .NET code access security (CAS) infrastructure. SSL can be
used to ensure private communication over the wire.
Although these standard transport-level techniques to secure Web services are quite
effective, they only go so far. In complex scenarios involving multiple Web services in
different trust domains, you have to build custom ad hoc solutions. Microsoft and
others are working on a set of security specifications that build on the extensibility
of SOAP messages to offer message-level security capabilities. One of these is the
XML Web Services Security Language (WS-Security), which defines a framework for
message-level credential transfer, message integrity, and message confidentiality.
As noted in the previous section, the .NET Remoting plumbing does not secure cross-
process invocations in the general case. A .NET Remoting endpoint hosted in IIS
with ASP.NET can leverage all the same security features available to ASP.NET
Web services, including support for secure communication over the wire using SSL.
If you are using the TCP channel or the HTTP channel hosted in processes other
than aspnet_wp.exe, you have to implement authentication, authorization and
privacy mechanisms yourself.
One additional security concern is the ability to execute code from a semi-trusted
environment without having to change the default security policy. ASP.NET Web
Services client proxies work in these environments, but .NET Remoting proxies do
not. In order to use a .NET Remoting proxy from a semi-trusted environment, you
need a special serialization permission that is not given to code loaded from your
intranet or the Internet by default. If you want to use a .NET Remoting client from
255
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
within a semi-trusted environment, you have to alter the default security policy for
code loaded from those zones. In situations where you are connecting to systems
from clients running in a sandbox—like a downloaded Windows Forms application,
for instance—ASP.NET Web Services are a simpler choice because security policy
changes are not required.
Conceptually, what is the difference between early-binding and late-binding?

Early binding – Binding at Compile Time
Late Binding – Binding at Run Time
Early binding implies that the class of the called object is known at compile-time;
late-binding implies that the class is not known until run-time, such as a call
through an interface or via Reflection.
Early binding is the preferred method. It is the best performer because your
application binds directly to the address of the function being called and there is no
extra overhead in doing a run-time lookup. In terms of overall execution speed, it is
at least twice as fast as late binding.
Early binding also provides type safety. When you have a reference set to the
component's type library, Visual Basic provides IntelliSense support to help you code
each function correctly. Visual Basic also warns you if the data type of a parameter
or return value is incorrect, saving a lot of time when writing and debugging code.
Late binding is still useful in situations where the exact interface of an object is not
known at design-time. If your application seeks to talk with multiple unknown
servers or needs to invoke functions by name (using the Visual Basic 6.0
CallByName function for example) then you need to use late binding. Late binding is
also useful to work around compatibility problems between multiple versions of a
component that has improperly modified or adapted its interface between versions.
Q 194. What is an Asssembly Qualified Name? Is it a filename? How is it different?
Ans :- An assembly qualified name isn't the filename of the assembly; it's the
internal name of the assembly combined with the assembly version, culture, and
public key, thus making it unique.
e.g. (""System.Xml.XmlDocument, System.Xml, Version=1.0.3300.0,

Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089"")
256
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 195. How is a strongly-named assembly different from one that isn’t strongly-
named?
Ans :- Strong names are used to enable the stricter naming requirements associated
with shared assemblies. These strong names are created by a .NET utility – sn.exe
Strong names have three goals:

· Name uniqueness. Shared assemblies must have names that are globally unique.
· Prevent name spoofing. Developers don't want someone else releasing a subsequent
version of one of your assemblies and falsely claim it came from you, either by
accident or intentionally.
· Provide identity on reference. When resolving a reference to an assembly, strong
names are used to guarantee the assembly that is loaded came from the expected
publisher.
Strong names are implemented using standard public key cryptography. In general,
the process works as follows: The author of an assembly generates a key pair (or
uses an existing one), signs the file containing the manifest with the private key,
and makes the public key available to callers. When references are made to the
assembly, the caller records the public key corresponding to the private key used to
generate the strong name.
Weak named assemblies are not suitable to be added in GAC and shared. It is
essential for an assembly to be strong named.
Strong naming prevents tampering and enables assemblies to be placed in the GAC
alongside other assemblies of the same name.
Q 196. How does the generational garbage collector in the .NET CLR manage object
lifetime? What is non-deterministic finalization?
Ans :- The hugely simplistic version is that every time it garbage-collects, it starts by
assuming everything to be garbage, then goes through and builds a list of everything
reachable. Those become not-garbage, everything else doesn't, and gets thrown
away. What makes it generational is that every time an object goes through this
process and survives, it is noted as being a member of an older generation (up to 2,
right now). When the garbage-collector is trying to free memory, it starts with the
lowest generation (0) and only works up to higher ones if it can't free up enough
space, on the grounds that shorter-lived objects are more likely to have been freed
than longer-lived ones.
257
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Non-deterministic finalization implies that the destructor (if any) of an object will
not necessarily be run (nor its memory cleaned up, but that's a relatively minor
issue) immediately upon its going out of scope. Instead, it will wait until first the
garbage collector gets around to finding it, and then the finalisation queue empties
down to it; and if the process ends before this happens, it may not be finalised at all.
(Although the operating system will usually clean up any process-external resources
left open - note the usually there, especially as the exceptions tend to hurt a lot.)
Q 197. What is the difference between Finalize() and Dispose()?
Ans :- Dispose() is called by the user of an object to indicate that he is finished with
it, enabling that object to release any unmanaged resources it holds. Finalize() is
called by the run-time to allow an object which has not had Dispose() called on it to
do the same. However, Dispose() operates determinalistically, whereas there is no
guarantee that Finalize() will be called immediately when an object goes out of scope
- or indeed at all, if the program ends before that object is GCed - and as such
Dispose() is generally preferred.
Q 198. How is the using() pattern useful? What is IDisposable? How does it support
deterministic finalization?
Ans :- The using() pattern is useful because it ensures that Dispose() will always be
called when a disposable object (defined as one that implements IDisposable, and
thus the Dispose() method) goes out of scope, even if it does so by an exception being
thrown, and thus that resources are always released.
Q 199. What does this useful command line do? tasklist /m "mscor*"
Ans :- Lists all the applications and associated tasks/process currently running on
the system with a module whose name begins "mscor" loaded into them; which in
nearly all cases means "all the .NET processes".
Q 200. What’s wrong with a line like this? DateTime.Parse(myString);
Ans :- Therez nothing wrong with this declaration.Converts the specified string
representation of a date and time to its DateTime equivalent.But If the string is not
a valid DateTime,It throws an exception.
258
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 201. What are PDBs? Where must they be located for debugging to work?
Ans :- A program database (PDB) files holds debugging and project state information
that allows incremental linking of debug configuration of your program.There are
several different types of symbolic debugging information. The default type for
Microsoft compiler is the so-called PDB file. The compiler setting for creating this
file is /Zi, or /ZI for C/C++(which creates a PDB file with additional information that
enables a feature called ""Edit and Continue"") or a Visual Basic/C#/JScript .NET
program with /debug.
A PDB file is a separate file, placed by default in the Debug project subdirectory,
that has the same name as the executable file with the extension .pdb. Note that the
Visual C++ compiler by default creates an additional PDB file called VC60.pdb for
VisulaC++6.0 and VC70.PDB file for VisulaC++7.0. The compiler creates this file
during compilation of the source code, when the compiler isn't aware of the final
name of the executable. The linker can merge this temporary PDB file into the main
one if you tell it to, but it won't do it by default. The PDB file can be useful to display
the detailed stack trace with source files and line numbers.
Q 202. What is FullTrust? Do GAC’ed assemblies have FullTrust?
Ans :- Before the .NET Framework existed, Windows had two levels of trust for
downloaded code. This old model was a binary trust model. You only had two
choices: Full Trust, and No Trust. The code could either do anything you could do, or
it wouldn't run at all.
The permission sets in .NET include FullTrust, SkipVerification, Execution,

Nothing, LocalIntranet, Internet and Everything. Full Trust Grants unrestricted
permissions to system resources. Fully trusted code run by a normal, nonprivileged
user cannot do administrative tasks, but can access any resources the user can
access, and do anything the user can do. From a security standpoint, you can think
of fully trusted code as being similar to native, unmanaged code, like a traditional
ActiveX control.
GAC assemblies are granted FullTrust. In v1.0 and 1.1, the fact that assemblies in
the GAC seem to always get a FullTrust grant is actually a side effect of the fact
that the GAC lives on the local machine. If anyone were to lock down the security
policy by changing the grant set of the local machine to something less than
FullTrust, and if your assembly did not get extra permission from some other code
group, it would no longer have FullTrust even though it lives in the GAC.
259
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 203. What does this do? gacutil /l | find /i "Corillian"
Ans :- Global Assembly Cache tool allows you to view and manipulate the contents of
the global assembly cache and download cache.The tool comes with various optional
params to do that.
""/l"" option Lists the contents of the global assembly cache. If you specify the
assemblyName parameter(/l [assemblyName]), the tool lists only the assemblies
matching that name.
Q 204. What does this do .. sn -t foo.dll ?
Ans :- Sn -t option displays the token for the public key stored in infile. The contents
of infile must be previously generated using -p.
Sn.exe computes the token using a hash function from the public key. To save space,
the common language runtime stores public key tokens in the manifest as part of a
reference to another assembly when it records a dependency to an assembly that has
a strong name. The -tp option displays the public key in addition to the token.
Q 205. How do you generate a strong name?
Ans :- .NET provides an utility called strong name tool. You can run this toolfrom
the VS.NET command prompt to generate a strong name with an option "-k" and
providing the strong key file name. i.e. sn- -k < file-name >
What is the difference between a Debug and Release build? Is there a significant
speed difference? Why or why not?
The Debug build is the program compiled with full symbolic debug information and
no optimization. The Release build is the program compiled employing optimization
and contains no symbolic debug information. These settings can be changed as per
need from Project Configuration properties. The release runs faster since it does not
have any debug symbols and is optimized.
Q 206. Explain the use of virtual, sealed, override, and abstract.
Ans:- Abstract: The keyword can be applied for a class or method.

1. Class: If we use abstract keyword for a class it makes the
class an abstract class, which means it cant be instantiated. Though
it is not nessacary to make all the method within the abstract class to be virtual. ie,
260
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Abstract class can have concrete methods
2. Method: If we make a method as abstract, we dont need to provide
implementation
of the method in the class but the derived class need to implement/override this
method.
Sealed: It can be applied on a class and methods. It stops the type from further
derivation i.e no one can derive class
from a sealed class,ie A sealed class cannot be inherited.A sealed class cannot be a
abstract class.A compile time error is thrown if you try to specify sealed class as a
base class.
When an instance method declaration includes a sealed modifier, that method is
said to be a sealed method. If an instance method declaration includes the sealed
modifier, it must also include the override modifier. Use of the sealed modifier
prevents a derived class from further overriding the method For Egs: sealed
override public void Sample() { Console.WriteLine("Sealed Method"); }
Virtual & Override: Virtual & Override keywords provides runtime polymorphism. A
base class can make some of its methods
as virtual which allows the derived class a chance to override the base class
implementation by using override keyword.
For e.g. class Shape

{
int a
public virtual void Display()
{
Console.WriteLine("Shape");
}
}
class Rectangle:Shape
{
public override void Display()
{
Console.WriteLine("Derived");
}
}
261
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 207.Explain the importance and use of each, Version, Culture and
PublicKeyToken for an assembly.?
Ans :- This three alongwith name of the assembly provide a strong name or fully
qualified name to the assembly. When a assebly is referenced with all three.
PublicKeyToken: Each assembly can have a public key embedded in its manifest
that identifies the developer. This ensures that once the assembly ships, no one can
modify the code or other resources contained in the assembly.
Culture: Specifies which culture the assembly supports
Version: The version number of the assembly.It is of the following form

major.minor.build.revision.
Explain the differences between public, protected, private and internal.

These all are access modifier and they governs the access level. They can be applied
to class, methods, fields.
Public: Allows class, methods, fields to be accessible from anywhere i.e. within and
outside an assembly.
Private: When applied to field and method allows to be accessible within a class.
Protected: Similar to private but can be accessed by members of derived class also.
Internal: They are public within the assembly i.e. they can be accessed by anyone
within an assembly but outside assembly they are not visible.
Q 208. What is the difference between typeof(foo) and myFoo.GetType()?
Ans :- Typeof is operator which applied to a object returns System.Type object.

Typeof cannot be overloaded white GetType has lot of overloads.GetType is a method
which also returns System.Type of an object. GetType is used to get the runtime
type of the object.
Example from MSDN showing Gettype used to retrive type at untime:-
public class MyBaseClass: Object {

}
public class MyDerivedClass: MyBaseClass {

}
262
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
public class Test {
public static void Main() {

MyBaseClass myBase = new MyBaseClass();
MyDerivedClass myDerived = new MyDerivedClass();
object o = myDerived;
MyBaseClass b = myDerived;
Console.WriteLine("mybase: Type is {0}", myBase.GetType());

Console.WriteLine("myDerived: Type is {0}", myDerived.GetType());
Console.WriteLine("object o = myDerived: Type is {0}", o.GetType());
Console.WriteLine("MyBaseClass b = myDerived: Type is {0}", b.GetType());
}
}
/*
This code produces the following output.
mybase: Type is MyBaseClass

myDerived: Type is MyDerivedClass
object o = myDerived: Type is MyDerivedClass
MyBaseClass b = myDerived: Type is MyDerivedClass
*/
Q 209. Can "this" be used within a static method?
Ans :- No 'This' cannot be used in a static method. As only static variables/methods

can be used in a static method.
Q 210. What is the purpose of XML Namespaces?
Ans ;- An XML Namespace is a collection of element types and attribute names. It

consists of 2 parts
1) The first part is the URI used to identify the namespace
2) The second part is the element type or attribute name itself.
Together they form a unique name. The various purpose of XML Namespace are
263
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
1. Combine fragments from different documents without any naming conflicts. (See
example below.)
2. Write reusable code modules that can be invoked for specific elements and
attributes. Universally unique names guarantee that
such modules are invoked only for the correct elements and attributes.
3. Define elements and attributes that can be reused in other schemas or instance
documents without fear of name collisions. For
example, you might use XHTML elements in a parts catalog to provide part
descriptions. Or you might use the nil attribute
defined in XML Schemas to indicate a missing value.
< Department >

< Name >DVS1< /Name >
< addr:Address xmlns:addr="http://www.tu-darmstadt.de/ito/addresses" >
< addr:Street >Wilhelminenstr. 7< /addr:Street >
< addr:City >Darmstadt< /addr:City >
< addr:State >Hessen< /addr:State >
< addr:Country >Germany< /addr:Country >
< addr:PostalCode >D-64285< /addr:PostalCode >
< /addr:Address >
< serv:Server xmlns:serv="http://www.tu-darmstadt.de/ito/servers" >
< serv:Name >OurWebServer< /serv:Name >
< serv:Address >123.45.67.8< /serv:Address >
< /serv:Server >
< /Department >
Q 211. What is difference between MetaData and Manifest ?
Ans :- Metadata and Manifest forms an integral part of an assembly( dll / exe ) in
.net framework .
Out of which Metadata is a mandatory component , which as the name suggests
gives the details about various components of IL code viz : Methods , properties ,
fields , class etc.
Essentially Metadata maintains details in form of tables like Methods Metadata

tables , Properties Metadata tables , which maintains the list of given type and other
details like access specifier , return type etc.
Now Manifest is a part of metadata only , fully called as “manifest metadata tables”
, it contains the details of the references needed by the assembly of any other
264
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
external assembly / type , it could be a custom assembly or standard System
namespace .
Now for an assembly that can independently exists and used in the .Net world both
the things ( Metadata with Manifest ) are mandatory , so that it can be fully
described assembly and can be ported anywhere without any system dependency .
Essentially .Net framework can read all assembly related information from
assembly itself at runtime .
But for .Net modules , that can’t be used independently , until they are being
packaged as a part of an assembly , they don’t contain Manifest but their complete
structure is defined by their respective metadata .
Ultimately . .Net modules use Manifest Metadata tables of parent assembly which
contain them .
Q 212. What is the use of Internal keyword?
Ans :- Internal keyword is one of the access specifier available in .Net framework ,
that makes a type visible in a given assembly , for e.g : a single dll can contain
multiple modules , essentially a multi file assembly , but it forms a single binary
component , so any type with internal keyword will be visible throughout the
assembly and can be used in any of the modules .
Q 213. What actually happes when you add a something to arraylistcollection ?
Ans :- Following things will happen :
Arraylist is a dynamic array class in c# in System.Collections namespace derived

from interfaces – ICollection , IList , ICloneable , IConvertible . It terms of in
memory structure following is the implementation .
a. Check up the total space if there’s any free space on the declared list .
b. If yes add the new item and increase count by 1 .
c. If No Copy the whole thing to a temporary Array of Last Max. Size .
d. Create new Array with size ( Last Array Size + Increase Value )
265
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
e. Copy back values from temp and reference this new array as original array .
f. Must doing Method updates too , need to check it up .
Q 214. What is Boxing and unboxing? Does it occure automaatically or u need to

write code to box and unbox?
Ans :- Boxing – Process of converting a System.ValueType to Reference Type ,

Mostly base class System.Object type and allocating it memory on Heap .Reverse is
unboxing , but can only be done with prior boxed variables.
Boxing is always implicit but Unboxing needs to be explicitly done via casting , thus
ensuring the value type contained inside .
Q 215. How Boxing and unboxing occures in memory?
Ans :- Boxing converts value type to reference type , thus allocating memory on
Heap . Unboxing converts already boxed reference types to value types through
explicit casting , thus allocating memory on stack .
Q 216. Why only boxed types can be unboxed?
Ans :- Unboxing is the process of converting a Reference type variable to Value type
and thus allocating memory on the stack . It happens only to those Reference type
variables that have been earlier created by Boxing of a Value Type , therefore
internally they contain a value type , which can be obtained through explicit casting
. For any other Reference type , they don’t internally contain a Value type to
Unboxed via explicit casting . This is why only boxed types can be unboxed .
Q 217. Explain what a diffgram is and its usage ?
Ans ;- A DiffGram is an XML format that is used to identify current and original
versions of data elements. The DataSet uses the DiffGram format to load and persist
its contents, and to serialize its contents for transport across a network connection.
When a DataSet is written as a DiffGram, it populates the DiffGram with all the
necessary information to accurately recreate the contents, though not the schema, of
the DataSet, including column values from both the Original and Current row
versions, row error information, and row order.
266
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
When sending and retrieving a DataSet from an XML Web service, the DiffGram
format is implicitly used. Additionally, when loading the contents of a DataSet from
XML using the ReadXml method, or when writing the contents of a DataSet in XML
using the WriteXml method, you can select that the contents be read or written as a
DiffGram.
The DiffGram format is divided into three sections: the current data, the original (or
"before") data, and an errors section, as shown in the following example.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<diffgr:diffgram
xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"
xmlns:diffgr="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-diffgram-v1"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<DataInstance>
</DataInstance>
<diffgr:before>
</diffgr:before>
<diffgr:errors>
</diffgr:errors>
</diffgr:diffgram>
The DiffGram format consists of the following blocks of data:
<DataInstance>
The name of this element, DataInstance, is used for explanation purposes in this
documentation. A DataInstance element represents a DataSet or a row of a
DataTable. Instead of DataInstance, the element would contain the name of the
DataSet or DataTable. This block of the DiffGram format contains the current data,
whether it has been modified or not. An element, or row, that has been modified is
identified with the diffgr:hasChanges annotation.
<diffgr:before>
This block of the DiffGram format contains the original version of a row. Elements
in this block are matched to elements in the DataInstance block using the diffgr:id
annotation.
<diffgr:errors>
This block of the DiffGram format contains error information for a particular row in
the DataInstance block. Elements in this block are matched to elements in the
DataInstance block using the diffgr:id annotation.
267
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 218. Can you edit data in the Repeater control?
Ans :- NO.
Q 219. Which are the different IsolationLevels ?
Ans :- Following are the various IsolationLevels:
• Serialized Data read by a current transaction cannot be changed by another

transaction until the current transaction finishes. No new data can be
inserted that would affect the current transaction. This is the safest isolation
level and is the default.
• Repeatable Read Data read by a current transaction cannot be changed by

another transaction until the current transaction finishes. Any type of new
data can be inserted during a transaction.
• Read Committed A transaction cannot read data that is being modified by

another transaction that has not committed. This is the default isolation level
in Microsoft® SQL Server.
• Read Uncommitted A transaction can read any data, even if it is being

modified by another transaction. This is the least safe isolation level but
allows the highest concurrency.
• Any Any isolation level is supported. This setting is most commonly used by
downstream components to avoid conflicts. This setting is useful because any
downstream component must be configured with an isolation level that is
equal to or less than the isolation level of its immediate upstream component.
Therefore, a downstream component that has its isolation level configured as
Any always uses the same isolation level that its immediate upstream
component uses. If the root object in a transaction has its isolation level
configured to Any, its isolation level becomes Serialized.
Q 220.How xml files and be read and write using dataset?.
Ans :- DataSet exposes method like ReadXml and WriteXml to read and write xml
Q 221. What are the different rowversions available?
268
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- There are four types of Rowversions.
Current:
The current values for the row. This row version does not exist for rows with a
RowState of Deleted.
Default :
The row the default version for the current DataRowState. For a DataRowState
value of Added, Modified or Current, the default version is Current. For a
DataRowState of Deleted, the version is Original. For a DataRowState value of
Detached, the version is Proposed.
Original:
The row contains its original values.
Proposed:
The proposed values for the row. This row version exists during an edit operation on
a row, or for a row that is not part of a DataRowCollection
Q 222. Explain acid properties?.
Ans :- The term ACID conveys the role transactions play in mission-critical
applications. Coined by transaction processing pioneers, ACID stands for atomicity,
consistency, isolation, and durability.
These properties ensure predictable behavior, reinforcing the role of transactions as

all-or-none propositions designed to reduce the management load when there are
many variables.
Atomicity
A transaction is a unit of work in which a series of operations occur between the
BEGIN TRANSACTION and END TRANSACTION statements of an application. A
transaction executes exactly once and is atomic — all the work is done or none of it
is.
Operations associated with a transaction usually share a common intent and are
interdependent. By performing only a subset of these operations, the system could
compromise the overall intent of the transaction. Atomicity eliminates the chance of
processing a subset of operations.
269
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Consistency
A transaction is a unit of integrity because it preserves the consistency of data,
transforming one consistent state of data into another consistent state of data.
Consistency requires that data bound by a transaction be semantically preserved.

Some of the responsibility for maintaining consistency falls to the application
developer who must make sure that all known integrity constraints are enforced by
the application. For example, in developing an application that transfers money, you
should avoid arbitrarily moving decimal points during the transfer.
Isolation
A transaction is a unit of isolation — allowing concurrent transactions to behave as
though each were the only transaction running in the system.
Isolation requires that each transaction appear to be the only transaction

manipulating the data store, even though other transactions may be running at the
same time. A transaction should never see the intermediate stages of another
transaction.
Transactions attain the highest level of isolation when they are serializable. At this
level, the results obtained from a set of concurrent transactions are identical to the
results obtained by running each transaction serially. Because a high degree of
isolation can limit the number of concurrent transactions, some applications reduce
the isolation level in exchange for better throughput.
Durability
A transaction is also a unit of recovery. If a transaction succeeds, the system
guarantees that its updates will persist, even if the computer crashes immediately
after the commit. Specialized logging allows the system's restart procedure to
complete unfinished operations, making the transaction durable.
Q 223. Whate are different types of Commands available with DataAdapter ?
Ans :- The SqlDataAdapter has SelectCommand, InsertCommand, DeleteCommand

and UpdateCommand
Q 224. What is a Dataset?
Ans :- Datasets are the result of bringing together ADO and XML. A dataset
270
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
contains one or more data of tabular XML, known as DataTables, these data can be
treated separately, or can have relationships defined between them. Indeed these
relationships give you ADO data SHAPING without needing to master the SHAPE
language, which many people are not comfortable with.
The dataset is a disconnected in-memory cache database. The dataset object model
looks like this:
Dataset
DataTableCollection
DataTable
DataView
DataRowCollection
DataRow
DataColumnCollection
DataColumn
ChildRelations
ParentRelations
Constraints
PrimaryKey
DataRelationCollection
Let’s take a look at each of these:
DataTableCollection: As we say that a DataSet is an in-memory database. So it has

this collection, which holds data from multiple tables in a single DataSet object.
DataTable: In the DataTableCollection, we have DataTable objects, which

represents the individual tables of the dataset.
DataView: The way we have views in database, same way we can have DataViews.
We can use these DataViews to do Sort, filter data.
DataRowCollection: Similar to DataTableCollection, to represent each row in each

Table we have DataRowCollection.
DataRow: To represent each and every row of the DataRowCollection, we have

DataRows.
DataColumnCollection: Similar to DataTableCollection, to represent each column in

each Table we have DataColumnCollection.
271
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
DataColumn: To represent each and every Column of the DataColumnCollection, we
have DataColumn.
PrimaryKey: Dataset defines Primary key for the table and the primary key
validation will take place without going to the database.
Constraints: We can define various constraints on the Tables, and can use
Dataset.Tables(0).enforceConstraints. This will execute all the constraints,
whenever we enter data in DataTable.
DataRelationCollection: as we know that we can have more than 1 table in the

dataset, we can also define relationship between these tables using this collection
and maintain a parent-child relationship.
Q 225.Explain the ADO . Net Architecture ( .Net Data Provider)
Ans :- ADO.N et is the data access model for .Net –based applications. It can be used
to access relational database systems such as SQL SERVER 2000, Oracle, and many
other data sources for which there is an OLD DB or ODBC provider. To a certain
extent, ADO.NET represents the latest evolution of ADO technology. However,
ADO.NET introduces some major changes and innovations that are aimed at the
loosely coupled and inherently disconnected – nature of web applications.
A .Net Framework data provider is used to connecting to a database, executing

commands, and retrieving results. Those results are either processed directly, or
placed in an ADO.NET DataSet in order to be exposed to the user in an ad-hoc
manner, combined with data from multiple sources, or remoted between tiers. The
.NET Framework data provider is designed to be lightweight, creating a minimal
layer between the data source and your code, increasing performance without
sacrificing functionality.
Following are the 4 core objects of .Net Framework Data provider:
• Connection: Establishes a connection to a specific data source
• Command: Executes a command against a data source. Exposes Parameters

and can execute within the scope of a Transaction from a Connection.
• DataReader: Reads a forward-only, read-only stream of data from a data

source.
272
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
• DataAdapter: Populates a DataSet and resolves updates with the data
source.
The .NET Framework includes the .NET Framework Data Provider for SQL Server
(for Microsoft SQL Server version 7.0 or later), the .NET Framework Data Provider
for OLE DB, and the .NET Framework Data Provider for ODBC.
The .NET Framework Data Provider for SQL Server: The .NET Framework Data
Provider for SQL Server uses its own protocol to communicate with SQL Server. It is
lightweight and performs well because it is optimized to access a SQL Server
directly without adding an OLE DB or Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) layer.
The following illustration contrasts the .NET Framework Data Provider for SQL
Server with the .NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB. The .NET Framework
Data Provider for OLE DB communicates to an OLE DB data source through both
the OLE DB Service component, which provides connection pooling and transaction
services, and the OLE DB Provider for the data source
The .NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB: The .NET Framework Data
Provider for OLE DB uses native OLE DB through COM interoperability to enable
data access. The .NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB supports both local
and distributed transactions. For distributed transactions, the .NET Framework
Data Provider for OLE DB, by default, automatically enlists in a transaction and
obtains transaction details from Windows 2000 Component Services.
The .NET Framework Data Provider for ODBC: The .NET Framework Data
Provider for ODBC uses native ODBC Driver Manager (DM) through COM
interoperability to enable data access. The ODBC data provider supports both local
and distributed transactions. For distributed transactions, the ODBC data provider,
by default, automatically enlists in a transaction and obtains transaction details
from Windows 2000 Component Services.
The .NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle: The .NET Framework Data
Provider for Oracle enables data access to Oracle data sources through Oracle client
connectivity software. The data provider supports Oracle client software version
8.1.7 and later. The data provider supports both local and distributed transactions
(the data provider automatically enlists in existing distributed transactions, but
does not currently support the EnlistDistributedTransaction method).
The .NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle requires that Oracle client software
(version 8.1.7 or later) be installed on the system before you can use it to connect to
an Oracle data source.
273
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle classes are located in the
System.Data.OracleClient namespace and are contained in the
System.Data.OracleClient.dll assembly. You will need to reference both the
System.Data.dll and the System.Data.OracleClient.dll when compiling an
application that uses the data provider.
Choosing a .NET Framework Data Provider
.NET Framework Data Provider for SQL Server: Recommended for middle-tier
applications using Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 or later. Recommended for single-tier
applications using Microsoft Data Engine (MSDE) or Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 or
later.
Recommended over use of the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server (SQLOLEDB) with
the .NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB. For Microsoft SQL Server version
6.5 and earlier, you must use the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server with the .NET
Framework Data Provider for OLE DB.
.NET Framework Data Provider for OLE DB: Recommended for middle-tier
applications using Microsoft SQL Server 6.5 or earlier, or any OLE DB provider. For
Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 or later, the .NET Framework Data Provider for SQL
Server is recommended. Recommended for single-tier applications using Microsoft
Access databases. Use of a Microsoft Access database for a middle-tier application is
not recommended.
.NET Framework Data Provider for ODBC: Recommended for middle-tier

applications using ODBC data sources. Recommended for single-tier applications
using ODBC data sources.
.NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle: Recommended for middle-tier

applications using Oracle data sources. Recommended for single-tier applications
using Oracle data sources. Supports Oracle client software version 8.1.7 and later.
The .NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle classes are located in the
System.Data.OracleClient namespace and are contained in the
System.Data.OracleClient.dll assembly. You need to reference both the
System.Data.dll and the System.Data.OracleClient.dll when compiling an
application that uses the data provider.
Can you explain the difference between an ADO.NET Dataset and an ADO
Recordset?
Let’s take a look at the differences between ADO Recordset and ADO.Net DataSet:
274
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
1. Table Collection: ADO Recordset provides the ability to navigate through a single
table of information. That table would have been formed with a join of multiple
tables and returning columns from multiple tables. ADO.NET DataSet is capable of
holding instances of multiple tables. It has got a Table Collection, which holds
multiple tables in it. If the tables are having a relation, then it can be manipulated
on a Parent-Child relationship. It has the ability to support multiple tables with
keys, constraints and interconnected relationships. With this ability the DataSet can
be considered as a small, in-memory relational database cache.
2. Navigation: Navigation in ADO Recordset is based on the cursor mode. Even

though it is specified to be a client-side Recordset, still the navigation pointer will
move from one location to another on cursor model only. ADO.NET DataSet is an
entirely offline, in-memory, and cache of data. All of its data is available all the time.
At any time, we can retrieve any row or column, constraints or relation simply by
accessing it either ordinarily or by retrieving it from a name-based collection.
3. Connectivity Model: The ADO Recordset was originally designed without the
ability to operate in a disconnected environment. ADO.NET DataSet is specifically
designed to be a disconnected in-memory database. ADO.NET DataSet follows a
pure disconnected connectivity model and this gives it much more scalability and
versatility in the amount of things it can do and how easily it can do that.
4. Marshalling and Serialization: In COM, through Marshalling, we can pass data

from 1 COM component to another component at any time. Marshalling involves
copying and processing data so that a complex type can appear to the receiving
component the same as it appeared to the sending component. Marshalling is an
expensive operation. ADO.NET Dataset and DataTable components support
Remoting in the form of XML serialization. Rather than doing expensive
Marshalling, it uses XML and sent data across boundaries.
5. Firewalls and DCOM and Remoting: Those who have worked with DCOM know
that how difficult it is to marshal a DCOM component across a router. People
generally came up with workarounds to solve this issue. ADO.NET DataSet uses
Remoting, through which a DataSet / DataTable component can be serialized into
XML, sent across the wire to a new AppDomain, and then Desterilized back to a
fully functional DataSet. As the DataSet is completely disconnected, and it has no
dependency, we lose absolutely nothing by serializing and transferring it through
Remoting.
Q 226. How do you handle data concurrency in .NET ?
275
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- One of the key features of the ADO.NET DataSet is that it can be a self-
contained and disconnected data store. It can contain the schema and data from
several rowsets in DataTable objects as well as information about how to relate the
DataTable objects-all in memory. The DataSet neither knows nor cares where the
data came from, nor does it need a link to an underlying data source. Because it is
data source agnostic you can pass the DataSet around networks or even serialize it
to XML and pass it across the Internet without losing any of its features. However,
in a disconnected model, concurrency obviously becomes a much bigger problem than
it is in a connected model.
In this column, I'll explore how ADO.NET is equipped to detect and handle
concurrency violations. I'll begin by discussing scenarios in which concurrency
violations can occur using the ADO.NET disconnected model. Then I will walk
through an ASP.NET application that handles concurrency violations by giving the
user the choice to overwrite the changes or to refresh the out-of-sync data and begin
editing again. Because part of managing an optimistic concurrency model can
involve keeping a timestamp (rowversion) or another type of flag that indicates
when a row was last updated, I will show how to implement this type of flag and
how to maintain its value after each database update.
Is Your Glass Half Full?
There are three common techniques for managing what happens when users try to
modify the same data at the same time: pessimistic, optimistic, and last-in wins.
They each handle concurrency issues differently.
The pessimistic approach says: "Nobody can cause a concurrency violation with my
data if I do not let them get at the data while I have it." This tactic prevents
concurrency in the first place but it limits scalability because it prevents all
concurrent access. Pessimistic concurrency generally locks a row from the time it is
retrieved until the time updates are flushed to the database. Since this requires a
connection to remain open during the entire process, pessimistic concurrency cannot
successfully be implemented in a disconnected model like the ADO.NET DataSet,
which opens a connection only long enough to populate the DataSet then releases
and closes, so a database lock cannot be held.
Another technique for dealing with concurrency is the last-in wins approach. This
model is pretty straightforward and easy to implement-whatever data modification
was made last is what gets written to the database. To implement this technique
you only need to put the primary key fields of the row in the UPDATE statement's
276
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
WHERE clause. No matter what is changed, the UPDATE statement will overwrite
the changes with its own changes since all it is looking for is the row that matches
the primary key values. Unlike the pessimistic model, the last-in wins approach
allows users to read the data while it is being edited on screen. However, problems
can occur when users try to modify the same data at the same time because users
can overwrite each other's changes without being notified of the collision. The last-in
wins approach does not detect or notify the user of violations because it does not
care. However the optimistic technique does detect violations. Contd....
In optimistic concurrency models, a row is only locked during the update to the
database. Therefore the data can be retrieved and updated by other users at any
time other than during the actual row update operation. Optimistic concurrency
allows the data to be read simultaneously by multiple users and blocks other users
less often than its pessimistic counterpart, making it a good choice for ADO.NET. In
optimistic models, it is important to implement some type of concurrency violation
detection that will catch any additional attempt to modify records that have already
been modified but not committed. You can write your code to handle the violation by
always rejecting and canceling the change request or by overwriting the request
based on some business rules. Another way to handle the concurrency violation is to
let the user decide what to do. The sample application that is shown in Figure 1
illustrates some of the options that can be presented to the user in the event of a
concurrency violation.
Where Did My Changes Go?
When users are likely to overwrite each other's changes, control mechanisms should
be put in place. Otherwise, changes could be lost. If the technique you're using is the
last-in wins approach, then these types of overwrites are entirely possible.For
example, imagine Julie wants to edit an employee's last name to correct the spelling.
She navigates to a screen which loads the employee's information into a DataSet and
has it presented to her in a Web page. Meanwhile, Scott is notified that the same
employee's phone extension has changed. While Julie is correcting the employee's
last name, Scott begins to correct his extension. Julie saves her changes first and
then Scott saves his.Assuming that the application uses the last-in wins approach
and updates the row using a SQL WHERE clause containing only the primary key's
value, and assuming a change to one column requires the entire row to be updated,
neither Julie nor Scott may immediatelyrealize the concurrency issue that just
occurred. In this particular situation, Julie's changes were overwritten by Scott's
changes because he saved last, and the last name reverted to the misspelled version.
277
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
So as you can see, even though the users changed different fields, their changes
collided and caused Julie's changes to be lost. Without some sort of concurrency
detection and handling, these types of overwrites can occur and even go
unnoticed.When you run the sample application included in this column's download,
you should open two separate instances of Microsoft® Internet Explorer. When I
generated the conflict, I opened two instances to simulate two users with two
separate sessions so that a concurrency violation would occur in the sample
application. When you do this, be careful not to use Ctrl+N because if you open one
instance and then use the Ctrl+N technique to open another instance, both windows
will share the same session.
Detecting Violations
The concurrency violation reported to the user in Figure 1 demonstrates what can
happen when multiple users edit the same data at the same time. In Figure 1, the
user attempted to modify the first name to "Joe" but since someone else had already
modified the last name to "Fuller III," a concurrency violation was detected and
reported. ADO.NET detects a concurrency violation when a DataSet containing
changed values is passed to a SqlDataAdapter's Update method and no rows are
actually modified. Simply using the primary key (in this case the EmployeeID) in
the UPDATE statement's WHERE clause will not cause a violation to be detected
because it still updates the row (in fact, this technique has the same outcome as the
last-in wins technique). Instead, more conditions must be specified in the WHERE
clause in order for ADO.NET to detect the violation.
The key here is to make the WHERE clause explicit enough so that it not only
checks the primary key but that it also checks for another appropriate condition.
One way to accomplish this is to pass in all modifiable fields to the WHERE clause
in addition to the primary key. For example, the application shown in Figure 1 could
have its UPDATE statement look like the stored procedure that's shown in Figure 2.
Notice that in the code in Figure 2 nullable columns are also checked to see if the
value passed in is NULL. This technique is not only messy but it can be difficult to
maintain by hand and it requires you to test for a significant number of WHERE
conditions just to update a row. This yields the desired result of only updating rows
where none of the values have changed since the last time the user got the data, but
there are other techniques that do not require such a huge WHERE clause.
Another way to make sure that the row is only updated if it has not been modified by
another user since you got the data is to add a timestamp column to the table. The
SQL Server(tm) TIMESTAMP datatype automatically updates itself with a new
278
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
value every time a value in its row is modified. This makes it a very simple and
convenient tool to help detect concurrency violations.
A third technique is to use a DATETIME column in which to track changes to its

row. In my sample application I added a column called LastUpdateDateTime to the
Employees table.
ALTER TABLE Employees ADD LastUpdateDateTime DATETIME
There I update the value of the LastUpdateDateTime field automatically in the

UPDATE stored procedure using the built-in SQL Server GETDATE function.
The binary TIMESTAMP column is simple to create and use since it automatically
regenerates its value each time its row is modified, but since the DATETIME
column technique is easier to display on screen and demonstrate when the change
was made, I chose it for my sample application. Both of these are solid choices, but I
prefer the TIMESTAMP technique since it does not involve any additional code to
update its value.
Retrieving Row Flags
One of the keys to implementing concurrency controls is to update the timestamp or

datetime field's value back into the DataSet. If the same user wants to make more
modifications, this updated value is reflected in the DataSet so it can be used again.
There are a few different ways to do this. The fastest is using output parameters
within the stored procedure. (This should only return if @@ROWCOUNT equals 1.)
The next fastest involves selecting the row again after the UPDATE within the
stored procedure. The slowest involves selecting the row from another SQL
statement or stored procedure from the SqlDataAdapter's RowUpdated event.
I prefer to use the output parameter technique since it is the fastest and incurs the
least overhead. Using the RowUpdated event works well, but it requires me to make
a second call from the application to the database. The following code snippet adds
an output parameter to the SqlCommand object that is used to update the Employee
information:
oUpdCmd.Parameters.Add(new SqlParameter("@NewLastUpdateDateTime",
SqlDbType.DateTime, 8, ParameterDirection.Output,
false, 0, 0, "LastUpdateDateTime", DataRowVersion.Current, null));
oUpdCmd.UpdatedRowSource = UpdateRowSource.OutputParameters;
279
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The output parameter has its sourcecolumn and sourceversion arguments set to
point the output parameter's return value back to the current value of the
LastUpdateDateTime column of the DataSet. This way the updated DATETIME
value is retrieved and can be returned to the user's .aspx page. Contd....
Saving Changes
Now that the Employees table has the tracking field (LastUpdateDateTime) and the
stored procedure has been created to use both the primary key and the tracking field
in the WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement, let's take a look at the role of
ADO.NET. In order to trap the event when the user changes the values in the
textboxes, I created an event handler for the TextChanged event for each TextBox
control:
private void txtLastName_TextChanged(object sender, System.EventArgs e)
// Get the employee DataRow (there is only 1 row, otherwise I could
// do a Find)
dsEmployee.EmployeeRow oEmpRow =
(dsEmployee.EmployeeRow)oDsEmployee.Employee.Rows[0];
oEmpRow.LastName = txtLastName.Text;
// Save changes back to Session
Session["oDsEmployee"] = oDsEmployee;
This event retrieves the row and sets the appropriate field's value from the TextBox.
(Another way of getting the changed values is to grab them when the user clicks the
Save button.) Each TextChanged event executes after the Page_Load event fires on
a postback, so assuming the user changed the first and last names, when the user
clicks the Save button, the events could fire in this order: Page_Load,
txtFirstName_TextChanged, txtLastName_TextChanged, and btnSave_Click.
The Page_Load event grabs the row from the DataSet in the Session object; the
TextChanged events update the DataRow with the new values; and the
280
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
btnSave_Click event attempts to save the record to the database. The btnSave_Click
event calls the SaveEmployee method (shown in Figure 3) and passes it a
bLastInWins value of false since we want to attempt a standard save first. If the
SaveEmployee method detects that changes were made to the row (using the
HasChanges method on the DataSet, or alternatively using the RowState property
on the row), it creates an instance of the Employee class and passes the DataSet to
its SaveEmployee method. The Employee class could live in a logical or physical
middle tier. (I wanted to make this a separate class so it would be easy to pull the
code out and separate it from the presentation logic.)
Notice that I did not use the GetChanges method to pull out only the modified rows
and pass them to the Employee object's Save method. I skipped this step here since
there is only one row. However, if there were multiple rows in the DataSet's
DataTable, it would be better to use the GetChanges method to create a DataSet
that contains only the modified rows.
If the save succeeds, the Employee.SaveEmployee method returns a DataSet

containing the modified row and its newly updated row version flag (in this case, the
LastUpdateDateTime field's value). This DataSet is then merged into the original
DataSet so that the LastUpdateDateTime field's value can be updated in the
original DataSet. This must be done because if the user wants to make more
changes she will need the current values from the database merged back into the
local DataSet and shown on screen. This includes the LastUpdateDateTime value
which is used in the WHERE clause. Without this field's current value, a false
concurrency violation would occur.
Reporting Violations
If a concurrency violation occurs, it will bubble up and be caught by the exception

handler shown in Figure 3 in the catch block for DBConcurrencyException. This
block calls the FillConcurrencyValues method, which displays both the original
values in the DataSet that were attempted to be saved to the database and the
values currently in the database. This method is used merely to show the user why
the violation occurred. Notice that the exDBC variable is passed to the
FillConcurrencyValues method. This instance of the special database concurrency
exception class (DBConcurrencyException) contains the row where the violation
occurred. When a concurrency violation occurs, the screen is updated to look like
Figure 1.
The DataSet not only stores the schema and the current data, it also tracks changes
that have been made to its data. It knows which rows and columns have been
281
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
modified and it keeps track of the before and after versions of these values. When
accessing a column's value via the DataRow's indexer, in addition to the column
index you can also specify a value using the DataRowVersion enumerator. For
example, after a user changes the value of the last name of an employee, the
following lines of C# code will retrieve the original and current values stored in the
LastName column:
string sLastName_Before = oEmpRow["LastName", DataRowVersion.Original];
string sLastName_After = oEmpRow["LastName", DataRowVersion.Current];
The FillConcurrencyValues method uses the row from the DBConcurrencyException

and gets a fresh copy of the same row from the database. It then displays the values
using the DataRowVersion enumerators to show the original value of the row before
the update and the value in the database alongside the current values in the
textboxes.
User's Choice
Once the user has been notified of the concurrency issue, you could leave it up to her
to decide how to handle it. Another alternative is to code a specific way to deal with
concurrency, such as always handling the exception to let the user know (but
refreshing the data from the database). In this sample application I let the user
decide what to do next. She can either cancel changes, cancel and reload from the
database, save changes, or save anyway.
The option to cancel changes simply calls the RejectChanges method of the DataSet
and rebinds the DataSet to the controls in the ASP.NET page. The RejectChanges
method reverts the changes that the user made back to its original state by setting
all of the current field values to the original field values. The option to cancel
changes and reload the data from the database also rejects the changes but
additionally goes back to the database via the Employee class in order to get a fresh
copy of the data before rebinding to the control on the ASP.NET page.
The option to save changes attempts to save the changes but will fail if a
concurrency violation is encountered. Finally, I included a "save anyway" option.
This option takes the values the user attempted to save and uses the last-in wins
technique, overwriting whatever is in the database. It does this by calling a different
command object associated with a stored procedure that only uses the primary key
field (EmployeeID) in the WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement. This technique
should be used with caution as it will overwrite the record.
282
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
If you want a more automatic way of dealing with the changes, you could get a fresh
copy from the database. Then overwrite just the fields that the current user
modified, such as the Extension field. That way, in the example I used the proper
LastName would not be overwritten. Use this with caution as well, however, because
if the same field was modified by both users, you may want to just back out or ask
the user what to do next. What is obvious here is that there are several ways to deal
with concurrency violations, each of which must be carefully weighed before you
decide on the one you will use in your application.
Wrapping It Up
Setting the SqlDataAdapter's ContinueUpdateOnError property tells the

SqlDataAdapter to either throw an exception when a concurrency violation occurs or
to skip the row that caused the violation and to continue with the remaining
updates. By setting this property to false (its default value), it will throw an
exception when it encounters a concurrency violation. This technique is ideal when
only saving a single row or when you are attempting to save multiple rows and want
them all to commit or all to fail.
I have split the topic of concurrency violation management into two parts. Next time
I will focus on what to do when multiple rows could cause concurrency violations. I
will also discuss how the DataViewRowState enumerators can be used to show what
changes have been made to a DataSet.
Q 227. How you will set the datarelation between two columns?
ADO.NET provides DataRelation object to set relation between two columns.It helps
to enforce the following constraints,a unique constraint, which guarantees that a
column in the table contains no duplicates and a foreign-key constraint,which can
be used to maintain referential integrity.A unique constraint is implemented either
by simply setting the Unique property of a data column to true, or by adding an
instance of the UniqueConstraint class to the DataRelation
object's ParentKeyConstraint. As part of the foreign-key constraint, you can specify
referential integrity rules that are applied at three points,when a parent record is
updated,when a parent record is deleted and when a change is accepted or rejected.
283
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
C# and VB.NET
Ans :- Server side code executes on the server.For this to occur page has to be
submitted or posted back.Events fired by the controls are executed on the
server.Client side code executes in the browser of the client without submitting the
page.
e.g. In ASP.NET for webcontrols like asp:button the click event of the button is
executed on the server hence the event handler for the same in a part of the code-
behind (server-side code). Along the server-side code events one can also attach
client side events which are executed in the clients browser i.e. javascript events.
284
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 229. How does VB.NET/C# achieve polymorphism?
Ans :- Polymorphism is also achieved through interfaces. Like abstract classes,

interfaces also describe the methods that a class needs to implement. The difference
between abstract classes and interfaces is that abstract classes always act as a base
class of the related classes in the class hierarchy. For example, consider a hierarchy-
car and truck classes derived from four-wheeler class; the classes two-wheeler and
four-wheeler derived from an abstract class vehicle. So, the class 'vehicle' is the base
class in the class hierarchy. On the other hand dissimilar classes can implement one
interface. For example, there is an interface that compares two objects. This
interface can be implemented by the classes like box, person and string, which are
unrelated to each other.
C# allows multiple interface inheritance. It means that a class can implement more
than one interface. The methods declared in an interface are implicitly abstract. If a
class implements an interface, it becomes mandatory for the class to override all the
methods declared in the interface, otherwise the derived class would become
abstract.
Can you explain what inheritance is and an example of when you might use it?
The savingaccount class has two data members-accno that stores account number,
and trans that keeps track of the number of transactions. We can create an object of
savingaccount class as shown below.
savingaccount s = new savingaccount ( "Amar", 5600.00f ) ;

From the constructor of savingaccount class we have called the two-argument
constructor of the account class using the base keyword and passed the name and
balance to this constructor using which the data member's name and balance are
initialised.
We can write our own definition of a method that already exists in a base class. This
is called method overriding. We have overridden the deposit( ) and withdraw( )
methods in the savingaccount class so that we can make sure that each account
maintains a minimum balance of Rs. 500 and the total number of transactions do
not exceed 10. From these methods we have called the base class's methods to
update the balance using the base keyword. We have also overridden the display( )
method to display additional information, i.e. account number.
Working of currentaccount class is more or less similar to that of savingaccount

class.
285
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Using the derived class's object, if we call a method that is not overridden in the
derived class, the base class method gets executed. Using derived class's object we
can call base class's methods, but the reverse is not allowed.
Unlike C++, C# does not support multiple inheritance. So, in C# every class has
exactly one base class.
Now, suppose we declare reference to the base class and store in it the address of
instance of derived class as shown below.
account a1 = new savingaccount ( "Amar", 5600.00f ) ;

account a2 = new currentaccount ( "MyCompany Pvt. Ltd.", 126000.00f) ;
Such a situation arises when we have to decide at run-time a method of which class
in a class hierarchy should get called. Using a1 and a2, suppose we call the method
display( ), ideally the method of derived class should get called. But it is the method
of base class that gets called. This is because the compiler considers the type of
reference (account in this case) and resolves the method call. So, to call the proper
method we must make a small change in our program. We must use the virtual
keyword while defining the methods in base class as shown below.
public virtual void display( ) { }

We must declare the methods as virtual if they are going to be overridden in derived
class. To override a virtual method in derived classes we must use the override
keyword as given below.
public override void display( ) { }

Now it is ensured that when we call the methods using upcasted reference, it is the
derived class's method that would get called. Actually, when we declare a virtual
method, while calling it, the compiler considers the contents of the reference rather
than its type.
If we don't want to override base class's virtual method, we can declare it with new
modifier in derived class. The new modifier indicates that the method is new to this
class and is not an override of a base class method.
Q 230. How would you implement inheritance using VB.NET/C#?
Ans :- When we set out to implement a class using inheritance, we must first start
with an existing class from which we will derive our new subclass. This existing
class, or base class, may be part of the .NET system class library framework, it may
be part of some other application or .NET assembly, or we may create it as part of
our existing application. Once we have a base class, we can then implement one or
286
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
more subclasses based on that base class. Each of our subclasses will automatically
have all of the methods, properties, and events of that base class ? including the
implementation behind each method, property, and event. Our subclass can add new
methods, properties, and events of its own - extending the original interface with
new functionality. Additionally, a subclass can replace the methods and properties of
the base class with its own new
implementation - effectively overriding the original behavior and replacing it with
new behaviors. Essentially inheritance is a way of merging functionality from an
existing class into our new subclass. Inheritance also defines rules for how these
methods, properties, and events can be merged. In VB.NET we can use implements
keyword for inheritance, while in C# we can use the sign ( :: ) between subclass and
baseclass.
Q 231. How is a property designated as read-only?
Ans :- VB.NET:
Private mPropertyName as DataType

Public ReadOnly Property PropertyName() As DataType
Get Return mPropertyName
End Get
End Property
In C#
Private DataType mPropertyName;

public returntype PropertyName
{
get{
//property implementation goes here
return mPropertyName;
}
// Do not write the set implementation
}
Q 232. What is hiding in CSharp ?
Ans :- Hiding is also called as Shadowing. This is the concept of Overriding the
methods. It is a concept used in the Object Oriented Programming.
287
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
E.g.
public class ClassA {
public virtual void MethodA() {
Trace.WriteLine("ClassA Method");
}
}
public class ClassB : ClassA {

public new void MethodA() {
Trace.WriteLine("SubClass ClassB Method");
}
}
public class TopLevel {

static void Main(string[] args) {
TextWriter tw = Console.Out;
Trace.Listeners.Add(new TextWriterTraceListener(tw));
ClassA obj = new ClassB();

obj.MethodA(); // Outputs “Class A Method"
ClassB obj1 = new ClassB();

obj.MethodA(); // Outputs “SubClass ClassB Method”
}
}
Q 233. What is the difference between an XML "Fragment" and an XML

"Document."
Ans :- An XML fragment is an XML document with no single top-level root element.
To put it simple it is a part (fragment) of a well-formed xml document. (node) Where
as a well-formed xml document must have only one root element.
Q 234. What does it meant to say “the canonical” form of XML?
Ans :- "The purpose of Canonical XML is to define a standard format for an XML
document. Canonical XML is a very strict XML syntax, which lets documents in
canonical XML be compared directly.
Using this strict syntax makes it easier to see whether two XML documents are the
288
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
same. For example, a section of text in one document might read Black & White,
whereas the same section of text might read Black & White in another document,
and even in another. If you compare those three documents byte by byte, they'll be
different. But if you write them all in canonical XML, which specifies every aspect of
the syntax you can use, these three documents would all have the same version of
this text (which would be Black & White) and could be compared without problem.
This Comparison is especially critical when xml documents are digitally signed. The
digital signal may be interpreted in different way and the document may be rejected.
Q 235. Why is the XML InfoSet specification different from the Xml DOM? What
does the InfoSet attempt to solve?
Ans:- "The XML Information Set (Infoset) defines a data model for XML. The Infoset
describes the abstract representation of an XML Document. Infoset is the
generalized representation of the XML Document, which is primarily meant to act
as a set of definitions used by XML technologies to formally describe what parts of
an XML document they operate upon.
The Document Object Model (DOM) is one technology for representing an XML
Document in memory and to programmatically read, modify and manipulate a xml
document.
Infoset helps defining generalized standards on how to use XML that is not
dependent or tied to a particular XML specification or API. The Infoset tells us what
part of XML Document should be considered as significant information.
Q 236. Contrast DTDs versus XSDs. What are their similarities and differences?
Which is preferred and why?
Ans :- Document Type Definition (DTD) describes a model or set of rules for an XML
document. XML Schema Definition (XSD) also describes the structure of an XML
document but XSDs are much more powerful.
The disadvantage with the Document Type Definition is it doesn’t support data
types beyond the basic 10 primitive types. It cannot properly define the type of data
contained by the tag.
An Xml Schema provides an Object Oriented approach to defining the format of an
xml document. The Xml schema support most basic programming types like integer,
byte, string, float etc., We can also define complex types of our own which can be
used to define a xml document.
289
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Xml Schemas are always preferred over DTDs as a document can be more precisely
defined using the XML Schemas because of its rich support for data representation.
Q 237. Speaking of Boolean data types, what's different between C# and C/C++?
Ans :- There's no conversion between 0 and false, as well as any other number and
true, like in C/C++.
Q 238. How do you convert a string into an integer in .NET?
Ans:- Int32.Parse(string)
Q 239. Can you declare a C++ type destructor in C# like ~MyClass()?
Ans:- Yes, but what's the point, since it will call Finalize(), and Finalize() has no
guarantees when the memory will be cleaned up, plus, it introduces additional load
on the garbage collector.
Q 240. What's different about namespace declaration when comparing that to

package declaration in Java?
Ans :- No semicolon.
Q 241. What's the difference between const and readonly?
Ans :- The readonly keyword is different from the const keyword. A const field can
only be initialized at the declaration of the field. A readonly field can be initialized
either at the declaration or in a constructor. Therefore, readonly fields can have
different values depending on the constructor used. Also, while a const field is a
compile-time constant, the readonly field can be used for runtime constants as in the
following example:
public static readonly uint l1 = (uint) DateTime.Now.Ticks;
290
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 242. What does \a character do?
Ans :- On most systems, produces a rather annoying beep.
Q 243. Can you create enumerated data types in C#?

Ans :- Yes.
Q 244. What's different about switch statements in C#?
Ans :- No fall-throughs allowed.
Q 245. What happens when you encounter a continue statement inside the for loop?
Ans :- The code for the rest of the loop is ignored, the control is transferred back to
the beginning of the loop.
Ans :- By calling Sort() and then Reverse() methods.
Ans :- Yes.
Q 248. What's the C# equivalent of C++ catch (…), which was a catch-all statement
for any possible exception?
Ans :- A catch block that catches the exception of type System.Exception. You can
also omit the parameter data type in this case and just write catch {}.
Q 249.Can multiple catch blocks be executed?
291
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- No, once the proper catch code fires off, the control is transferred to the finally
block (if there are any), and then whatever follows the finally block.
Ans :- Well, if at that point you know that an error has occurred, then why not write
the proper code to handle that error instead of passing a new Exception object to the
catch block? Throwing your own exceptions signifies some design flaws in the
project.
Q 251. What's the difference between // comments, /* */ comments and /// comments?
Ans :- Single-line, multi-line and XML documentation comments.
Q 252. How do you generate documentation from the C# file commented properly
Ans :- Compile it with a /doc switch.
Ans :- Yes, if you are debugging via Visual Studio.NET, just go to Immediate
window.
Q 254. What's the implicit name of the parameter that gets passed into the class' set
method?
Ans :- Value, and it's datatype depends on whatever variable we're changing.
Ans :- Place a colon and then the name of the base class. Notice that it's double colon
in C++.
Q 256. Does C# support multiple inheritance?
292
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- No, use interfaces instead.
Q 257. So how do you retrieve the customized properties of a .NET application from
XML .config file? Can you automate this process?
Ans :- Initialize an instance of AppSettingsReader class. Call the GetValue method

of AppSettingsReader class, passing in the name of the property and the type
expected. Assign the result to the appropriate variable. In Visual Studio yes, use
Dynamic Properties for automatic .config creation, storage and retrieval.
Ans :- The designer will likely through it away, most of the code inside
Q 259. Where do you add an event handler?
Ans :- It's the Attributesproperty, the Add function inside that property.
e.g. btnSubmit.Attributes.Add(""onMouseOver"",""someClientCode();"")
Q 260. What are jagged array?
Ans :- First lets us answer the question that what an array is?
The dictionary meaning of array is an orderly arrangement or sequential
arrangement of elements.
In computer science term:
An array is a data structure that contains a number of variables, which are accessed
through computed indices. The variables contained in an array, also called the
elements of the array, are all of the same type, and this type is called the element
type of the array.
An array has a rank that determines the number of indices associated with each
array element. The rank of an array is also referred to as the dimensions of the
array. An array with a rank of one is called a single-dimensional array. An array
293
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
with a rank greater than one is called a multi-dimensional array. Specific sized
multidimensional arrays are often referred to as two-dimensional arrays, three-
dimensional arrays, and so on.
Now let us answer What are jagged arrays?

A jagged array is an array whose elements are arrays. The elements of jagged array
can be of different dimensions and sizes. A jagged array is sometimes called as
“array-of-arrays”. It is called jagged because each of its rows is of different size so
the final or graphical representation is not a square.
When you create a jagged array you declare the number of rows in your array. Each
row will hold an array that will be on any length. Before filling the values in the
inner arrays you must declare them.
Jagged array declaration in C#:
For e.g. : int [] [] myJaggedArray = new int [3][];
Declaration of inner arrays:
myJaggedArray[0] = new int[5] ; // First inner array will be of length 5.

myJaggedArray[1] = new int[4] ; // Second inner array will be of length 4.
myJaggedArray[2] = new int[3] ; // Third inner array will be of length 3.
Now to access third element of second row we write:

int value = myJaggedArray[1][2];
Note that while declaring the array the second dimension is not supplied because
this you will declare later on in the code.
Jagged array are created out of single dimensional arrays so be careful while using
them. Don’t confuse it with multi-dimensional arrays because unlike them jagged
arrays are not rectangular arrays.
For more information on arrays:

us/csref/html/vclrfarrayspg.asp
Q 261. What is a delegate, why should you use it and how do you call it ?
Ans :- A delegate is a reference type that refers to a Shared method of a type or to an

instance method of an object. Delegate is like a function pointer in C and C++.
294
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Pointers are used to store the address of a thing. Delegate lets some other code call
your function without needing to know where your function is actually located. All
events in .NET actually use delegates in the background to wire up events. Events
are really just a modified form of a delegate.
It should give you an idea of some different areas in which delegates may be
appropriate:
• They enable callback functionality in multi-tier applications as demonstrated

in the examples above. <o:p></o:p>
• The CacheItemRemoveCallback delegate can be used in ASP.NET to keep

cached information up to date. When the cached information is removed for
any reason, the associated callback is exercised and could contain a reload of
the cached information. <o:p></o:p>
• Use delegates to facilitate asynchronous processing for methods that do not

offer asynchronous behavior.
• Events use delegates so clients can give the application events to call when
the event is fired. Exposing custom events within your applications requires
the use of delegates.
Q 262. How does the XmlSerializer work?
Ans :- XmlSerializer in the .NET Framework is a great tool to convert Xml into
runtime objects and vice versa
If you define integer variable and a object variable and a structure then how those
will be plotted in memory.
Integer , structure – System.ValueType -- Allocated memory on stack , infact

integer is primitive type recognized and allocated memory by compiler itself .
Infact , System.Int32 definition is as follows :
295
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
[C#]
[Serializable]
public struct Int32 : IComparable, IFormattable, IConvertible
So , it’s a struct by definition , which is the same case with various other value types
.
Object – Base class , that is by default reference type , so at runtime JIT compiler
allocates memory on the “Heap” Data structure .
Reference types are defined as class , derived directly or indirectly by

System.ReferenceType
WebServices And Windows Services
Can you give an example of when it would be appropriate to use a web service as
opposed to non-serviced .NET component
Web service is one of main component in Service Oriented Architecture. You could
use web services when your clients and servers are running on different networks
and also different platforms. This provides a loosely coupled system. And also if the
client is behind the firewall it would be easy to use web service since it runs on port
80 (by default) instead of having some thing else in Service Oriented Architecture
applications.
What is the standard you use to wrap up a call to a Web service
"SOAP.
"
Q 263. What is the transport protocol you use to call a Web service SOAP?
Ans :- HTTP with SOAP

Ans :- "WSDL stands for Web Services Dsescription Langauge. There is WSDL.exe
that creates a .wsdl Files which defines how an XML Web service behaves and
instructs clients as to how to interact with the service.
eg: wsdl http://LocalHost/WebServiceName.asmx"
Q 265. Where on the Internet would you look for Web Services?
Ans :- www.uddi.org
296
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- Web Services Description Language
Q 268. True or False: To test a Web service you must create a windows application
or
Web application to consume this service?
Ans :- False.
Q 269. What are the various ways of accessing a web service ?
Ans :- 1.Asynchronous Call

Application can make a call to the Webservice and then continue todo watever oit
wants to do.When the service is ready it will notify the application.Application can
use BEGIN and END method to make asynchronous call to the webmethod.We can
use either a WaitHandle or a Delegate object when making asynchronous call.
The WaitHandle class share resources between several objects. It provides several
methods which will wait for the resources to become available
The easiest and most powerful way to to implement an asynchronous call is using a
delegate object. A delegate object wraps up a callback function. The idea is to pass a
method in the invocation of the web method. When the webmethod has finished it
will call this callback function to process the result
2.Synchronous Call
Application has to wait until execution has completed.
Q 270. What are VSDISCO files?
Ans :- VSDISCO files are DISCO files that support dynamic discovery of Web
services. If you place the following VSDISCO file in a directory on your Web server,
for example, it returns references to all ASMX and DISCO files in the host
directory and any subdirectories not noted in <EXCLUDE>elements:
<DYNAMICDISCOVERY
xmlns="urn:schemas-dynamicdiscovery:disco.2000-03-17">
<EXCLUDE path="_vti_cnf" />
297
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
<EXCLUDE path="_vti_pvt" />
<EXCLUDE path="_vti_log" />
<EXCLUDE path="_vti_script" />
<EXCLUDE path="_vti_txt" />
</DYNAMICDISCOVERY>
Q 271. How does dynamic discovery work?
Ans :- ASP.NET maps the file name extension VSDISCO to an HTTP handler that
scans the host directory and subdirectories for ASMX and DISCO files and returns
a dynamically generated DISCO document. A client who requests a VSDISCO file
gets back what appears to be a static DISCO document.
Note that VSDISCO files are disabled in the release version of ASP.NET. You can
reenable them by uncommenting the line in the <HTTPHANDLERS>section of
Machine.config that maps *.vsdisco to
System.Web.Services.Discovery.DiscoveryRequestHandler and granting the
ASPNET user account permission to read the IIS metabase. However, Microsoft is
actively discouraging the use of VSDISCO files because they could represent a
threat to Web server security.
Q 272. Is it possible to prevent a browser from caching an ASPX page?
Ans :- Just call SetNoStore on the HttpCachePolicy object exposed through the
Response object's Cache property, as demonstrated here:
<%@ Page Language="C#" %>

<%
Response.Cache.SetNoStore ();
Response.Write (DateTime.Now.ToLongTimeString ());
%>
SetNoStore works by returning a Cache-Control: private, no-store header in the

HTTP response. In this example, it prevents caching of a Web page that shows the
current time.
Q 273. What does AspCompat="true" mean and when should I use it?
298
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- AspCompat is an aid in migrating ASP pages to ASPX pages. It defaults to
false but should be set to true in any ASPX file that creates apartment-threaded
COM objects--that is, COM objects registered ThreadingModel=Apartment. That
includes all COM objects written with Visual Basic 6.0. AspCompat should also be
set to true (regardless of threading model) if the page creates COM objects that
access intrinsic ASP objects such as Request and Response. The following directive
sets AspCompat to true:
<%@ Page AspCompat="true" %>
Setting AspCompat to true does two things. First, it makes intrinsic ASP objects
available to the COM components by placing unmanaged wrappers around the
equivalent ASP.NET objects. Second, it improves the performance of calls that the
page places to apartment- threaded COM objects by ensuring that the page
(actually, the thread that processes the request for the page) and the COM objects it
creates share an apartment. AspCompat="true" forces ASP.NET request threads
into single-threaded apartments (STAs). If those threads create COM objects
marked ThreadingModel=Apartment, then the objects are created in the same STAs
as the threads that created them. Without AspCompat="true," request threads run
in a multithreaded apartment (MTA) and each call to an STA-based COM object
incurs a performance hit when it's marshaled across apartment boundaries.
Do not set AspCompat to true if your page uses no COM objects or if it uses COM
objects that don't access ASP intrinsic objects and that are registered
ThreadingModel=Free or ThreadingModel=Both.
Q 274. Can two different programming languages be mixed in a single ASMX file?
Ans :- No.
Q 275. What namespaces are imported by default in ASMX files?
Ans :- The following namespaces are imported by default. Other namespaces must
be imported manually.· System,
System.Collections,System.ComponentModel,System.Data,
System.Diagnostics,System.Web,System.Web.Services
How do I provide information to the Web Service when the information is required
as a SOAP Header?
The key here is the Web Service proxy you created using wsdl.exe or through Visual
Studio .NET's Add Web Reference menu option. If you happen to download a WSDL
file for a Web Service that requires a SOAP header, .NET will create a SoapHeader
299
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
class in the proxy source file. Using the previous example:
public class Service1 : System.Web.Services.Protocols.SoapHttpClientProtocol
{
public AuthToken AuthTokenValue;
[System.Xml.Serialization.XmlRootAttribute(Namespace="http://tempuri.org/",
IsNullable=false)]
public class AuthToken : SoapHeader { public string Token; }}
In this case, when you create an instance of the proxy in your main application file,
you'll also create an instance of the AuthToken class and assign the string:
Service1 objSvc = new Service1();
processingobjSvc.AuthTokenValue = new AuthToken();
objSvc.AuthTokenValue.Token = <ACTUAL token value>;
Web Servicestring strResult = objSvc.MyBillableWebMethod();
Q 276. What is WSDL?
Ans :- WSDL is the Web Service Description Language, and it is implemented as a

specific XML vocabulary. While it's very much more complex than what can be
described here, there are two important aspects to WSDL with which you should be
aware. First, WSDL provides instructions to consumers of Web Services to describe
the layout and contents of the SOAP packets the Web Service intends to issue. It's
an interface description document, of sorts. And second, it isn't intended that you
read and interpret the WSDL. Rather, WSDL should be processed by machine,
typically to generate proxy source code (.NET) or create dynamic proxies on the fly
(the SOAP Toolkit or Web Service Behavior).
Q 277. What is a Windows Service and how does its lifecycle differ from a "standard"
EXE?
Ans :- Windows service is a application that runs in the background. It is equivalent

to a NT service.
The executable created is not a Windows application, and hence you can't just click
and run it . it needs to be installed as a service, VB.Net has a facility where we can
add an installer to our program and then use a utility to install the service. Where
as this is not the case with standard exe
Q 278. How can a win service developed in .NET be installed or used in Win98?
300
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:- Windows service cannot be installed on Win9x machines even though the .NET
framework runs on machine.
Q 279. Can you debug a Windows Service? How ?
Ans :- Yes we can debug a Windows Service.

Attach the WinDbg debugger to a service after the service starts
This method is similar to the method that you can use to attach a debugger to a
process and then debug a process.
Use the process ID of the process that hosts the service that you want to debug
1 To determine the process ID (PID) of the process that hosts the service that you
want to debug, use one of the following methods.
• Method 1: Use the Task Manager
a. Right-click the taskbar, and then click Task Manager. The Windows Task
Manager dialog box appears.
b. Click the Processes tab of the Windows Task Manager dialog box.
c. Under Image Name, click the image name of the process that hosts the service
that you want to debug. Note the process ID of this process as specified by the value
of the corresponding PID field.
• Method 2: Use the Task List Utility (tlist.exe)
a. Click Start, and then click Run. The Run dialog box appears.
b. In the Open box, type cmd, and then click OK.
c. At the command prompt, change the directory path to reflect the location of the
tlist.exe file on your computer.
Note The tlist.exe file is typically located in the following directory: C:\Program
Files\Debugging Tools for Windows
d. At the command prompt, type tlist to list the image names and the process IDs of
all processes that are currently running on your computer.
Note Make a note of the process ID of the process that hosts the service that you
want to debug.
2 At a command prompt, change the directory path to reflect the location of the
windbg.exe file on your computer.
Note If a command prompt is not open, follow steps a and b of Method 1. The
windbg.exe file is typically located in the following directory: C:\Program
Files\Debugging Tools for Windows.
3 At the command prompt, type windbg –p ProcessID to attach the WinDbg
301
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
debugger to the process that hosts the service that you want to debug.
Note ProcessID is a placeholder for the process ID of the process that hosts the
service that you want to debug.
Use the image name of the process that hosts the service that you want to debug
You can use this method only if there is exactly one running instance of the process
that hosts the service that you want to run. To do this, follow these steps:
1 Click Start, and then click Run. The Run dialog box appears.
2 In the Open box, type cmd, and then click OK to open a command prompt.
3 At the command prompt, change the directory path to reflect the location of the
windbg.exe file on your computer.
Note The windbg.exe file is typically located in the following directory: C:\Program
4 At the command prompt, type windbg –pn ImageName to attach the WinDbg
debugger to the process that hosts the service that you want to debug.
NoteImageName is a placeholder for the image name of the process that hosts the
service that you want to debug. The "-pn" command-line option specifies that the
ImageName command-line argument is the image name of a process.
back to the top
Start the WinDbg debugger and attach to the process that hosts the service that you
want to debug
1 Start Windows Explorer.

2 Locate the windbg.exe file on your computer.
Note The windbg.exe file is typically located in the following directory: C:\Program
Files\Debugging Tools for Windows
3 Run the windbg.exe file to start the WinDbg debugger.
4 On the File menu, click Attach to a Process to display the Attach to Process dialog
box.
5 Click to select the node that corresponds to the process that hosts the service that
you want to debug, and then click OK.
6 In the dialog box that appears, click Yes to save base workspace information.
Notice that you can now debug the disassembled code of your service.
Configure a service to start with the WinDbg debugger attached
You can use this method to debug services if you want to troubleshoot service-
302
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
startup-related problems.
1 Configure the "Image File Execution" options. To do this, use one of the following
methods:
• Method 1: Use the Global Flags Editor (gflags.exe)
a. Start Windows Explorer.
b. Locate the gflags.exe file on your computer.
Note The gflags.exe file is typically located in the following directory: C:\Program
c. Run the gflags.exe file to start the Global Flags Editor.
d. In the Image File Name text box, type the image name of the process that hosts
the service that you want to debug. For example, if you want to debug a service that
is hosted by a process that has MyService.exe as the image name, type
MyService.exe.
e. Under Destination, click to select the Image File Options option.
f. Under Image Debugger Options, click to select the Debugger check box.
g. In the Debugger text box, type the full path of the debugger that you want to use.
For example, if you want to use the WinDbg debugger to debug a service, you can
type a full path that is similar to the following: C:\Program Files\Debugging Tools
for Windows\windbg.exe
h. Click Apply, and then click OK to quit the Global Flags Editor.
• Method 2: Use Registry Editor
a. Click Start, and then click Run. The Run dialog box appears.
b. In the Open box, type regedit, and then click OK to start Registry Editor.
c. Warning If you use Registry Editor incorrectly, you may cause serious problems
that may require you to reinstall your operating system. Microsoft cannot guarantee
that you can solve problems that result from using Registry Editor incorrectly. Use
Registry Editor at your own risk.
In Registry Editor, locate, and then right-click the following registry subkey:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows
NT\CurrentVersion\Image File Execution Options
d. Point to New, and then click Key. In the left pane of Registry Editor, notice that
New Key #1 (the name of a new registry subkey) is selected for editing.
e. Type ImageName to replace New Key #1, and then press ENTER.
Note ImageName is a placeholder for the image name of the process that hosts the
service that you want to debug. For example, if you want to debug a service that is
hosted by a process that has MyService.exe as the image name, type MyService.exe.
f. Right-click the registry subkey that you created in step e.
303
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
g. Point to New, and then click String Value. In the right pane of Registry Editor,
notice that New Value #1, the name of a new registry entry, is selected for editing.
h. Replace New Value #1 with Debugger, and then press ENTER.
i. Right-click the Debugger registry entry that you created in step h, and then click
Modify. The Edit String dialog box appears.
j. In the Value data text box, type DebuggerPath, and then click OK.
Note DebuggerPath is a placeholder for the full path of the debugger that you
want to use. For example, if you want to use the WinDbg debugger to debug a
service, you can type a full path that is similar to the following: C:\Program
Files\Debugging Tools for Windows\windbg.exe
2 For the debugger window to appear on your desktop, and to interact with the
debugger, make your service interactive. If you do not make your service interactive,
the debugger will start but you cannot see it and you cannot issue commands. To
make your service interactive, use one of the following methods:
• Method 1: Use the Services console
a. Click Start, and then point to Programs.
b. On the Programs menu, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services.
The Services console appears.
c. In the right pane of the Services console, right-click ServiceName, and then click
Properties.
Note ServiceName is a placeholder for the name of the service that you want to
debug.
d. On the Log On tab, click to select the Allow service to interact with desktop
check box under Local System account, and then click OK.
• Method 2: Use Registry Editor
a. In Registry Editor, locate, and then click the following registry subkey:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\ServiceName
Note Replace ServiceName with the name of the service that you want to debug.
For example, if you want to debug a service named MyService, locate and then click
the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\MyService
b. Under the Name field in the right pane of Registry Editor, right-click Type, and
then click Modify. The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.
c. Change the text in the Value data text box to the result of the binary OR
operation with the binary value of the current text and the binary value,
0x00000100, as the two operands. The binary value, 0x00000100, corresponds to the
SERVICE_INTERACTIVE_PROCESS constant that is defined in the WinNT.h
header file on your computer. This constant specifies that a service is interactive in
304
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
nature.
3 When a service starts, the service communicates to the Service Control Manager
how long the service must have to start (the time-out period for the service). If the
Service Control Manager does not receive a "service started" notice from the service
within this time-out period, the Service Control Manager terminates the process
that hosts the service. This time-out period is typically less than 30 seconds. If you
do not adjust this time-out period, the Service Control Manager ends the process and
the attached debugger while you are trying to debug. To adjust this time-out period,
follow these steps:
a. In Registry Editor, locate, and then right-click the following registry subkey:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control
b. Point to New, and then click DWORD Value. In the right pane of Registry Editor,
notice that New Value #1 (the name of a new registry entry) is selected for editing.
c. Type ServicesPipeTimeout to replace New Value #1, and then press ENTER.
d. Right-click the ServicesPipeTimeout registry entry that you created in step c, and
then click Modify. The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.
e. In the Value data text box, type TimeoutPeriod, and then click OK
Note TimeoutPeriod is a placeholder for the value of the time-out period (in
milliseconds) that you want to set for the service. For example, if you want to set the
time-out period to 24 hours (86400000 milliseconds), type 86400000.
f. Restart the computer. You must restart the computer for Service Control
Manager to apply this change.
4 Start your Windows service. To do this, follow these steps:
a. Click Start, and then point to Programs.
b. On the Programs menu, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services.
The Services console appears.
c. In the right pane of the Services console, right-click ServiceName, and then click
Start.
Note ServiceName is a placeholder for the name of the service that you want to
debug.
305
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
COM And COM+
Q 280. What are different transaction options available for services components ?
Ans :- There are 5 transactions types that can be used with COM+. Whenever an
object is registered with COM+ it has to abide either to these 5 transaction types.
306
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Disabled: - There is no transaction. COM+ does not provide transaction support for
this component.
Not Supported: - Component does not support transactions. Hence even if the calling
component in the hierarchy is transaction enabled this component will not
participate in the transaction.
Supported: - Components with transaction type supported will be a part of the

transaction if the calling component has an active transaction.
If the calling component is not transaction enabled this component will not start a
new transaction.
Required: - Components with this attribute require a transaction i.e. either the
calling should have a transaction in place else this component will start a new
transaction.
Required New: - Components enabled with this transaction type always require a
new transaction. Components with required new transaction type instantiate a new
transaction for themselves every time.
Q 281. Can we use com Components in .net?.How ?.can we use .net components in
vb?.Explain how ?
Ans:- COM components have different internal architecture from .NET components
hence they are not innately compatible. However .NET framework supports
invocation of unmanaged code from managed code (and vice-versa) through
COM/.NET interoperability. .NET application communicates with a COM
component through a managed wrapper of the component called Runtime Callable
Wrapper (RCW); it acts as managed proxy to the unmanaged COM component.
When a method call is made to COM object, it goes onto RCW and not the object
itself. RCW manages the lifetime management of the COM component.
Implementation Steps -
Create Runtime Callable Wrapper out of COM component. Reference the metadata
assembly Dll in the project and use its methods & properties RCW can be created
using Type Library Importer utility or through VS.NET. Using VS.NET, add
reference through COM tab to select the desired DLL. VS.NET automatically
generates metadata assembly putting the classes provided by that component into a
namespace with the same name as COM dll (XYZRCW.dll)
307
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.NET components can be invoked by unmanaged code through COM Callable
Wrapper (CCW) in COM/.NET interop. The unmanaged code will talk to this proxy,
which translates call to managed environment. We can use COM components in
.NET through COM/.NET interoperability. When managed code calls an unmanaged
component, behind the scene, .NET creates proxy called COM Callable wrapper
(CCW), which accepts commands from a COM client, and forwards it to .NET
component. There are two prerequisites to creating .NET component, to be used in
unmanaged code:
1. .NET class should be implement its functionality through interface. First define
interface in code, then have the class to imlpement it. This way, it prevents breaking
of COM client, if/when .NET component changes.
2.Secondly, .NET class, which is to be visible to COM clients must be declared

public. The tools that create the CCW only define types based
on public classes. The same rule applies to methods, properties, and events that will
be used by COM clients.
Implementation Steps -
1. Generate type library of .NET component, using TLBExporter utility. A type
library is the COM equivalent of the metadata contained within
a .NET assembly. Type libraries are generally contained in files with the extension
.tlb. A type library contains the necessary information to allow a COM client to
determine which classes are located in a particular server, as well as the methods,
properties, and events supported by those classes.
2. Secondly, use Assembly Registration tool (regasm) to create the type library and
register it.
3. Lastly install .NET assembly in GAC, so it is available as shared assembly.
Q 282. What is Runtime Callable wrapper?.when it will created?.
Ans :- The common language runtime exposes COM objects through a proxy called
the runtime callable wrapper (RCW). Although the RCW appears to be an ordinary
object to .NET clients, its primary function is to marshal calls between a .NET client
and a COM object. This wrapper turns the COM interfaces exposed by the COM
component into .NET-compatible interfaces. For oleautomation (attribute indicates
that an interface is compatible with Automation) interfaces, the RCW can be
generated automatically from a type library. For non-oleautomation interfaces, it
308
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
may be necessary to develop a custom RCW which manually maps the types exposed
by the COM interface to .NET-compatible types.
Q 283. What is Com Callable wrapper?when it will created?

Ans :- .NET components are accessed from COM via a COM Callable Wrapper
(CCW). This is similar to a RCW, but works in the opposite direction. Again, if the
wrapper cannot be automatically generated by the .NET development tools, or if the
automatic behaviour is not desirable, a custom CCW can be developed. Also, for
COM to 'see' the .NET component, the .NET component must be registered in the
registry.CCWs also manage the object identity and object lifetime of the managed
objects they wrap.
Q 284. What is a primary interop ?
Ans:- A primary interop assembly is a collection of types that are deployed,

versioned, and configured as a single unit. However, unlike other managed
assemblies, an interop assembly contains type definitions (not implementation) of
types that have already been defined in COM. These type definitions allow managed
applications to bind to the COM types at compile time and provide information to
the common language runtime
about how the types should be marshaled at run time.
Q 285. What are tlbimp and tlbexp tools used for ?
Ans :- The Type Library Exporter generates a type library that describes the types
defined in a common language runtime assembly.
The Type Library Importer converts the type definitions found within a COM type
library into equivalent definitions in a common language runtime assembly. The
output of Tlbimp.exe is a binary file (an assembly) that contains runtime metadata
for the types defined within the original type library.
Q 286. What benefit do you get from using a Primary Interop Assembly (PIA)?
Ans :- PIAs are important because they provide unique type identity. The PIA
distinguishes the official type definitions from counterfeit definitions provided by
other interop assemblies. Having a single type identity ensures type compatibility
between applications that share the types defined in the PIA. Because the PIA is
signed by its publisher and labeled with the PrimaryInteropAssembly attribute, it
can be differentiated from other interop assemblies that define the same types.
309
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Remoting FAQ's
Q 287. What distributed process frameworks outside .NET do you know?
Ans :- Distributed Computing Environment/Remote Procedure Calls (DEC/RPC),

Microsoft Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM), Common Object Request
Broker Architecture (CORBA), and Java Remote Method Invocation (RMI).
Q 288. What are possible implementations of distributed applications in .NET?
310
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans :- .NET Remoting and ASP.NET Web Services. If we talk about the Framework
Class Library, noteworthy classes are in System.Runtime.Remoting and
System.Web.Services.
Q 289. When would you use .NET Remoting and when Web services?
Ans :- Use remoting for more efficient exchange of information when you control
both ends of the application. Use Web services for open-protocol-based information
exchange when you are just a client or a server with the other end belonging to
someone else.
Q 290. What's a proxy of the server object in .NET Remoting?
Ans :- It's a fake copy of the server object that resides on the client side and behaves
as if it was the server. It handles the communication between real server object and
the client object. This process is also known as marshaling.
Q 291. What are remotable objects in .NET Remoting?
Ans :- Remotable objects are the objects that can be marshaled across the
application domains. You can marshal by value, where a deep copy of the object is
created and then passed to the receiver. You can also marshal by reference, where
just a reference to an existing object is passed.
Q 292. What are channels in .NET Remoting?
Ans :- Channels represent the objects that transfer the other serialized objects from
one application domain to another and from one computer to another, as well as one
process to another on the same box. A channel must exist before an object can be
transferred.
Q 293. What security measures exist for .NET Remoting in

System.Runtime.Remoting?
Ans :- None. Security should be taken care of at the application level. Cryptography
and other security techniques can be applied at application or server level.

Ans :- A formatter is an object that is responsible for encoding and serializing data
311
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
into messages on one end, and deserializing and decoding messages into data on the
other end.
Q 295. Choosing between HTTP and TCP for protocols and Binary and SOAP for
formatters, what are the trade-offs?
Ans :- Binary over TCP is the most effiecient, SOAP over HTTP is the most
interoperable.
Q 296. What's SingleCall activation mode used for?
Ans :- If the server object is instantiated for responding to just one single request,
the request should be made in SingleCall mode.
Q 297 .What's Singleton activation mode?
Ans :- A single object is instantiated regardless of the number of clients accessing it.
Lifetime of this object is determined by lifetime lease.
Q 298. How do you define the lease of the object?
Ans :- By implementing ILease interface when writing the class code.
Q 299. Can you configure a .NET Remoting object via XML file?
Ans :- Yes, via machine.config and application level .config file (or web.config in
ASP.NET). Application-level XML settings take precedence over machine.config.
Q 300. How can you automatically generate interface for the remotable object in
.NET with Microsoft tools?
Ans :- Use the Soapsuds tool.
Q 201. What are CAO's i.e. Client Activated Objects ?
Ans :- Client-activated objects are objects whose lifetimes are controlled by the
calling application domain, just as they would be if the object were local to the client.
With client activation, a round trip to the server occurs when the client tries to
create an instance of the server object, and the client proxy is created using an object
312
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
reference (ObjRef) obtained on return from the creation of the remote object on the
server. Each time a client creates an instance of a client-activated type, that
instance will service only that particular reference in that particular client until its
lease expires and its memory is recycled. If a calling application domain creates two
new instances of the remote type, each of the client references will invoke only the
particular instance in the server application domain from which the reference was
returned.
In COM, clients hold an object in memory by holding a reference to it. When the last
client releases its last reference, the object can delete itself. Client activation
provides the same client control over the server object's lifetime, but without the
complexity of maintaining references or the constant pinging to confirm the
continued existence of the server or client. Instead, client-activated objects use
lifetime leases to determine how long they should continue to exist. When a client
creates a remote object, it can specify a default length of time that the object should
exist. If the remote object reaches its default lifetime limit, it contacts the client to
ask whether it should continue to exist, and if so, for how much longer. If the client
is not currently available, a default time is also specified for how long the server
object should wait while trying to contact the client before marking itself for garbage
collection. The client might even request an indefinite default lifetime, effectively
preventing the remote object from ever being recycled until the server application
domain is torn down. The difference between this and a server-activated indefinite
lifetime is that an indefinite server-activated object will serve all client requests for
that type, whereas the client-activated instances serve only the client and the
reference that was responsible for their creation. For more information, see Lifetime
Leases.
To create an instance of a client-activated type, clients either configure their
application programmatically (or using a configuration file) and call new (New in
Visual Basic), or they pass the remote object's configuration in a call to
Activator.CreateInstance. The following code example shows such a call, assuming a
TcpChannel has been registered to listen on port 8080.
Q 302. How many processes can listen on a single TCP/IP port?
Ans :- One.
Q 303. What technology enables out-of-proc communication in .NET?
Ans :- Most usually Remoting;.NET remoting enables client applications to use

objects in other processes on the same computer or on any other computer available
313
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
on its network.While you could implement an out-of-proc component in any number
of other ways, someone using the term almost always means Remoting.
Q 304. How can objects in two diff. App Doimains communicate with each other?
Ans :- .Net framework provides various ways to communicate with objects in

different app domains.
First is XML Web Service on internet, its good method because it is built using
HTTP protocol and SOAP formatting.
If the performance is the main concern then go for second option which is .Net
remoting because it gives you the option of using binary encoding and the default
TcpChannel, which offers the best interprocess communication performance
Q 305. What is the difference between .Net Remoting and Web Services?
Ans :- Although we can develop an application using both technologies, each of them
has its distinct advantages. Yes you can look at them in terms of performance but
you need to consider your need first. There are many other factors such
authentications, authorizing in process that need to be considered.
Point Remoting Webservices
If your application needs Yes, Choose Web Services
interoperability with because it is more flexible
No
other platforms or in that they are support
operating systems SOAP.
If performance is the You should use the TCP
main requirement with channel and the binary No
security formatter
Complex Programming Yes No
Supports a range of state Its stateless service
management, depending on management (does not
State Management what object lifetime scheme inherently correlate
you choose (single call or multiple calls from the
singleton call). same user)
It can access through TCP or It can be access only
Transport Protocol
HTTP channel. through HTTP channel.
314
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
WinForms FAQ :
Ans :- System.Windows.Forms.Form
Q 307. What is the difference between Debug.Write and Trace.Write? When should
each be used?
Ans :- The Debug.Write call won't be compiled when the DEBUGsymbol is not
315
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
defined (when doing a release build). Trace.Write calls will be compiled.
Debug.Write is for information you want only in debug builds, Trace.Write is for
when you want it in release build as well.
Q 308. Difference between Anchor and Dock Properties?
Ans :- Dock Property->Gets or sets which edge of the parent container a control is
docked to. A control can be docked to one edge of its parent container or can be
docked to all edges and fill the parent container. For example, if you set this
property to DockStyle.Left, the left edge of the
control will be docked to the left edge of its parent control. Additionally, the docked
edge of the control is resized to match that of its container
control.
Anchor Property->Gets or sets which edges of the control are anchored to the edges
of its container. A control can be anchored to one or more edges of its parent
container. Anchoring a control to its parent ensures that the anchored edges remain
in the same position relative to the edges of the parent container when the parent
container is resized.
Q 309. When would you use ErrorProvider control?
Ans :- ErrorProvider control is used in Windows Forms application. It is like

Validation Control for ASP.NET pages. ErrorProvider control is used to provide
validations in Windows forms and display user friendly messages to the user if the
validation fails.
E.g
If we went to validate the textBox1 should be empty, then we can validate as below
1). You need to place the errorprovide control on the form
private void textBox1_Validating(object sender,
System.ComponentModel.CancelEventArgs e)
{
ValidateName();
}
private bool ValidateName()
{
bool bStatus = true;
if (textBox1.Text == "")
{
errorProvider1.SetError (textBox1,"Please enter your Name");
bStatus = false;
316
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
}
else
errorProvider1.SetError (textBox1,"");
return bStatus;
}
it check the textBox1 is empty . If it is empty, then a message Please enter your
name is displayed.
Q 310. Can you write a class without specifying namespace? Which namespace does
it belong to by default?
Ans :- Yes, you can, then the class belongs to global namespace which has no name.
For commercial products, naturally, you wouldn't want global namespace.
Q 311. You are designing a GUI application with a windows and several widgets on
it. The user then resizes the app window and sees a lot of grey space, while the
widgets stay in place. What's the problem?
Ans :- One should use anchoring for correct resizing. Otherwise the default property
of a widget on a form is top-left, so it stays at the same location when resized.
Q 312. How can you save the desired properties of Windows Forms application?
Ans :- .config files in .NET are supported through the API to allow storing and
retrieving information. They are nothing more than simple XML files, sort of like
what .ini files were before for Win32 apps.
Q 313. So how do you retrieve the customized properties of a .NET application from
XML .config file?
Ans :- Initialize an instance of AppSettingsReader class. Call the GetValue method

of AppSettingsReader class, passing in the name of the property and the type
expected. Assign the result to the appropriate variable.
Q 314.Can you automate this process?
Ans:- In Visual Studio yes, use Dynamic Properties for automatic .config creation,
storage and retrieval.
317
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 315. My progress bar freezes up and dialog window shows blank, when an
intensive background process takes over.?
Ans :- Yes, you should've multi-threaded your GUI, with taskbar and main form
being one thread, and the background process being the other.
Q 316. What's the safest way to deploy a Windows Forms app?
Ans:- Web deployment: the user always downloads the latest version of the code, the
program runs within security sandbox, properly written app will not require
additional security privileges.
Ans :- The designer will likely through it away, most of the code inside
Q 318. What's the difference between WindowsDefaultLocation and

WindowsDefaultBounds?
Ans :- WindowsDefaultLocation tells the form to start up at a location selected by

OS, but with internally specified size. WindowsDefaultBounds delegates both size
and starting position choices to the OS.
Q 319. What's the difference between Move and LocationChanged? Resize and
SizeChanged?
Ans :- Both methods do the same, Move and Resize are the names adopted from VB
to ease migration to C#.
Q 320. How would you create a non-rectangular window, let's say an ellipse?
Ans :- Create a rectangular form, set the TransparencyKey property to the same
value as BackColor, which will effectively make the background of the form
transparent. Then set the FormBorderStyle to FormBorderStyle.None, which will
remove the contour and contents of the form.
Q 321. How do you create a separator in the Menu Designer?
318
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Ans:- A hyphen '-' would do it. Also, an ampersand '&\' would underline the next
letter.
Q 322. How's anchoring different from docking?
Ans;- Anchoring treats the component as having the absolute size and adjusts its
location relative to the parent form. Docking treats the component location as
absolute and disregards the component size. So if a status bar must always be
at the bottom no matter what, use docking. If a button should be on the top right,
but change its position with the form being resized, use anchoring.
Q 323.How do you trigger the Paint event in System.Drawing?
Ans:- Invalidate the current form, the OS will take care of repainting. The Update
method forces the repaint.
Q 324. With these events, why wouldn't Microsoft combine Invalidate and Paint, so
that you wouldn't have to tell it to repaint, and then to force it to repaint?
Ans:- Painting is the slowest thing the OS does, so usually telling it to repaint, but
not forcing it allows for the process to take place in the background.
Q 325. How can you assign an RGB color to a System.Drawing.Color object?
Ans:- Call the static method FromArgb of this class and pass it the RGB values.
Q 326.What class does Icon derive from?
Ans:-Isn't it just a Bitmap with a wrapper name around it? No, Icon lives in
System.Drawing namespace. It's not a Bitmap by default, and is treated separately
by .NET. However, you can use ToBitmap method to get a valid Bitmap object from
a valid Icon object.
Q 327. Before in my VB app I would just load the icons from DLL. How can I load
the icons provided by .NET dynamically?
Ans:- By using System.Drawing.SystemIcons class, for example

System.Drawing.SystemIcons.Warning produces an Icon with a warning sign in it.
319
______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Q 328. When displaying fonts, what's the difference between pixels, points and ems?
Ans:- A pixel is the lowest-resolution dot the computer monitor supports. Its size
depends on user's settings and monitor size. A point is always 1/72 of an inch. An em
is the number of pixels that it takes to display the letter M.
Dear Readers
! Your comments on the contents are highly appreciated. Please e-mail

your feedback on rakesh@terrafirmajobs.com
! For subscription e-mail to: newsletter@terrafirmajobs.com
! If you want to publish your articles, please e-mail your articles to:
rakesh@terrafirmajobs.com
320
______________________________________________________________________________

Ultimate Microsoft Technical Q &amp; A

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ultimate Microsoft Technical Q &amp; A

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Register your resume: www.terrafirmajobs.

Free E-books available with Terra Firma

To get these free e-books, email to: rakesh@terrafirmajobs.com with

Copy Right Note

1) C# interview Questions and Answers. 4

3) ADO.net and Database Question 26

4) C#, DOT NET, XML, IIS Interview Questions 28

5) Dot NET. 120

7) Interview Questions for Dot NET Forms. 161

Q 2. How do you inherit from a class in C#?

Q 3. Does C# support multiple inheritances?

Ans: - No, use interfaces instead.

Q 4. When you inherit a protected class-level variable, who is it available to?

Ans: - Classes in the same namespace.

Q 5. Are private class-level variables inherited?

Q 6. Describe the accessibility modifier protected internal?

Q 7. C# provides a default constructor for me. I write a constructor that takes a

Q 8. What’s the top .NET class that everything is derived from?

Ans: - System. Object.

Ans: - The method can be over-ridden.

Q 12. Can you override private virtual methods?

Q 16. What’s an abstract class?

Ans: - A class that cannot be instantiated. A concept in C++ known as pure

Q 18. What’s an interface class?

Q 20 Can you inherit multiple interfaces?

Ans: - Yes, why not.

Q 21. And if they have conflicting method names?

Q 22. What’s the difference between an interface and abstract class?

Q 23. How can you overload a method?

Ans: - Different parameter data types, different number of parameters, different

Q 25. What’s the difference between Systems? String and System.StringBuilder

Ans: - System. String is immutable; System.StringBuilder was designed with the

Q 26. What’s the advantage of using System.Text.StringBuilder over System

Q 27. Can you store multiple data types in System? Array?

Q 28. What’s the difference between the System.Array.CopyTo () and

Ans: - By calling Sort () and then Reverse () methods.

Ans: - Hash Table.

Q 31. What’s class Sorted List underneath?

Ans: - A sorted Hash Table.

Q 34. Can multiple catch blocks be executed?

Q 35. Why is it a bad idea to throw your own exceptions?

Q 36. What’s a delegate?

Ans:- A delegate object encapsulates a reference to a method. In C++ they were

Q 37. What’s a multicast delegate?

Q 38 How’s the DLL Hell problem solved in .NET?

Q 39. What are the ways to deploy an assembly?

Ans: - An MSI installer, a CAB archive, and XCOPY command.

Ans: - When you write a multilingual or multi-cultural application in .NET, and

Q 41. What namespaces are necessary to create a localized application?

Ans: - System. Globalization, System. Resources.

Q 42. What’s the difference between // comments, /* */ comments and ///

Ans: - Single-line, multi-line and XML documentation comments.

Q 43 How do you generate documentation from the C# file commented properly

Ans: - Compile it with a /doc switch.

Ans: - Single line code example and multiple-line code example.

Q 45. Is XML case-sensitive?

Ans: - Yes, so <Student> and <student> are different elements.

Q 46. What debugging tools come with the .NET SDK?

Ans: - CorDBG – command-line debugger, and DbgCLR – graphic debugger.

Q 47. What does the window show in the debugger?

Ans: - In debug compilation, assert takes in a Boolean condition as a parameter,

Q 50. Why are there five tracing levels in System.Diagnostics.TraceSwitcher?

Q 51. Where is the output of TextWriterTraceListener redirected?

Q 52. How do you debug an ASP.NET Web application?

Ultimate Microsoft Technical Q & A

Ultimate Microsoft Technical Q & A